Home

TT User Setup User Manual

1. Automatic Diagnostics X_STUDY FMDS Settings V Enable automatic diagnostic checks by User Setup Server V Show automatic diagnostic check notifications only to Super Administrators ID Diagnostic Name Enabl Category Help y filter v filte w filter v filter Gateway Logins Explain Gateway Logins missing Accounts Missing Product Limits Order Books with mismatched Credit Currency Order Books with mismatched Product Limits TTORDs mapped to invalid Exchange Traders Gateway Logins missing passwords Gateway Logins Ex lain Order Book Explain Order Book Gateway Logins Gateway Logins Si8i8fi i isis Users with Customer Default Markets missing corresponding Gateway Login Markets Users with TTORD Accounts missing corresponding Customer Default Accounts Users with Customer Default Accounts missing from User s TTORDs Accounts improperly shared between unrelated Order Books Users with multiple available to user flags checked for same gateway FIX Adapter client Users configured for gateways that a FIX Adapter is not configured for FIX Adapter Client Users with Gateway Logins that are incompatible with an assigned FIX Adapter FIX Adapter client Users with multiple available to fix client flags checked for same gateway Order Books with Users with mismatched Gateways Order Book Users with Direct Trader Logins that ar
2. Password never expires f TT recommends that you leave the Password never expires option checked 5 On the New User window click the FIX Adapter tab If a version requirement message appears click OK TT User Setup User Manual 309 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials The FIX Adapter Role field automatically populates with FIX Adapter Server If FIX client users have been created they appear in the Available FIX client users grid If FIX client users have not been created this grid is empty Main Gateway Logins Fle amp dapter Fis Adapter Fis Adapter role FIS Adapter Server Ww Order routing server client or server Drop copy server Available Fis chent users Username 1 Display Mame Group 6 Click the Order routing server radio button 7 Continue to the next section Assigning TT Gateway Credentials When creating an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter you must designate the credentials called gateway logins used to login to the TT Gateways TT FIX Adapter Server logs into each TT Gateway once and acts on behalf of all FIX Adapter client users Thus the gateway logins MGTs that the TT FIX Adapter Server uses to log into the TT Gateways must have the authority to act on behalf of all FIX Adapter client users Specifically the MGTs TT FIX Adapter Server uses to log into the TT Gateways must have permissions to view all orders and fills of all FI
3. TTORDFA 001 001 doesn t have product limits for the following gateways CME Credit limits and or currency differ for one or more Gateway Logins in the TTORDFA 001 Group Risk checking for these Gateway Logins is based on a shared orderbook so it is recommended that credit limits and currency be the same for each Gateway Login in 4 group Pubin Cancel Copy Textto Cipboard _ Note Gateway logins where Member and Group are the same will share an order book After clicking Publish a status window appears and shows each successfully published gateway login The message for a successful publish concludes with Done Publishing 1 Publishing 7379954 KE1 004 Done publishing 208 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Server Administration Collecting Log Files TT User Setup allows you to collect remote log files from other machines on your gateway directly from your client side machine The machines from which you collect log files must be set up in the same trading environment as your own Note Collecting log files could cause significant network traffic As such it is recommended that large log files not be collected during peak trading hours Note You can also collect specific logfiles from the TT User Setup server s logfiles folder using the TT User Setup Command Line Client application Refer to the Advanced Data Collection topic in chapter 4 of the TT U
4. Locked out Limit the number of concurrent logins based on IF address ime Because FIX Adapter Client users are unable to update an expired password using the same pro cedure as an X_TRADER user TT recommends that you leave the Password never expires option checked For information about the other user fields refer to the TT user Setup user Guide 9 Repeat this procedure to create users AB BILL and AB MIKE 10 Continue to the next procedure Assigning TT Gateway Credentials When creating a TT FIX Adapter Client user that connects to an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter you must designate one or more sets of credentials gateway logins that will be used to route orders This procedure is similar to setting up a TTORD in Guardian except in TT user Setup you can create the TTORD and assign it to a FIX Adapter client in one step TT User Setup User Manual 313 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials In our example e TT FIX Adapter Client user AB BOB will route orders as TTORDAB 001 001 e TT FIX Adapter Client user AB BILL will route orders as TTORDAB 001 002 e TT FIX Adapter Client user AB MIKE will route orders as TTORDAB 002 001 To assign these credentials to each of the FIX Adapter client users 1 On the New User or Edit User window click the Gateway Logins tab 2 For our example Client user AB BOB uses the TTORDAB 001 001 MGT Client user AB BILL uses the TTORDAB 001 002 MGT and Client
5. Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER _RISK Product Group Permissions _TRADER Properties _TRADER Customer Defaults x_RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS Copy Replace Account Numbers Cog Customer 42 Sel Market 4 ProductType 45 Product 4 Account Acct First DEFAULT gt Restrict Eq filter filter in filter filter filter meal fil W filter filter OPTION However the account numbers for the new user end in _b instead of _a In this case you would remove the last character and then add the letter b at the end 3 Click Review Changes The Review Account Number Changes window appears Review Account Number Changes Before Atter Comments filter se filter e filter w acre cre fb Ic E oa a ER 222a ER 222_b CMES33_a CMESI3_b TT111_a TT111_b 4 Click Apply Changes The account numbers are replaced TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users Configuring X_ STUDY and FMDS This topic describes how to enable and configure the X_ STUDY and FMDS settings per user For infor mation about enabling and configuring the X_ STUDY and FMDS settings for the entire system refer to Enabling and Configuring X STUDY and FMDS System Settings on page 233 gt To enable X_ STUDY FMDS functionality for a user 1 From a
6. Eurex ABCCD UME 004 Eurex KGO04 ML ML Eurex xXXJO1 YED J04 Eurex A 643000 ccc ccc EUREXPF A ABCCD UBW 007 TT User Setup User Manual 261 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Note If there are no Eurex MGTs available click the Create button to open the New Exchange Trader ID window and create a Eurex MGT 7 Using the arrow buttons transfer a Eurex MGT from the Available Exchange Traders section to the Selected Exchange Traders pane Selected Exchange Traders Gateway 4 Member 42 Group 43 Trader BTec AUUS LDA WABTT CME CM123 TT2 TT2 Eurex AZ44 BPS Gateway 4 Member 42 Group 3 Trader filter Vv filter filter z Taa gt gt UMK 001 ML ML YBD J01 Eurex 4 G48000 ccc cece EUREXPF 4 amp ABCCD lt lt lt ICE012 Q a T 8 Click Done 9 On the Edit Gateway Login window click Save and then Close 10 On the Edit User window click New to create a new product limit 11 Select Eurex for the Gateway field and edit the data in one or more additional fields e g Change the maximum order quantity to 2000 Use Product Limit for TT SIM only Gateway Login TTORDJS 001 001 Margin Gateway Eue S Additional margin 0 Producttype FUTURE x Maximum order qty 2000 Se Maximum position Unlimited Maximum long short Unlimited v Trade Out allowed Save and Add New Close 12
7. Main TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access Group Administrator Can only manage the User Groups listed below Able to manage Gateway Logins 7 Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins If unchecked can only create and edt TTORDSs Gateway Login Administrator V Restrict Gateway Login Administrator to User Groups listed below Password Administrator Can only reset user passwords and unlock users 4 Restrict Password Admin to User Groups listed below View Only J Restrict View Only Userto User Groups listed below Collect Log Files Only Can only use TT User Setup to collect log files Warning Ensure that None is selected for users that are not allowed to log into TT User Setup Additionally only users with the Active option checked can log onto TT User Setup 16 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Outgoing Email Settings TT User Setup Permissions Login Confirm password fF Generate Password Active C Password never expires To log out of TT User Setup without automatically closing the application From the TT User Setup Control Panel open the File menu and select Logout Using the Control Panel File UserAdmin ServerAdmin Reports Help BOB a The TT User Setup Cont
8. Completed 10 of 10 No product limit exists for the EVREXPF Gateway coy bam etre aO AMME Wink Coe hy Max Pantin Maj 4 Correct the problem and re run the diagnostic check Allowing or Blocking Product Groups for Specific Markets Some markets have specifically defined product groups ICE for example has product groups such as OTC Gas OTC Power and US Futures Instead of allowing a user to subscribe to all products in a mar ket you can allow or block each available product group per user If a product group is blocked a user logging into a TT application will not have access to any of the products in that group This includes the ability to view market data for that product or to trade that product TT User Setup allows all newly added product groups or markets for all users TT User Setup also allows all the product groups or markets for all newly added users It is up to the TT User Setup admin istrator to block access to product groups Note The following TT software versions and later support Product Group Permissions FIX Adapter 7 6 1 X_TRADER 7 9 0 X_RISK 7 5 XTAPI 7 7 0 TT API 7 2 0 CME Gateway 7 14 3 ICE Gateway 7 14 1 OSE Gateway 7 17 35 You can manually allow or block each product for each X_TRADER X_RISK and FIX Adapter client user from the Product Group Permissions window or tab If a market i e an exchange is not listed in the Product Group Permissions tab the user is
9. 186 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking Setting Pre Trade Price Controls The price control features allow an administrator to configure how far from the market price a user may enter an order Orders submitted outside the defined price band will be rejected This topic contains the following sections e Price Controls Overview on page 187 e Price Checking Overview on page 188 e Example Static Price Range Control on page 188 e Example Directional Price Range Control on page 189 e Enabling and Setting the Pre trade Price Controls on page 190 Price Controls Overview The User Level Risk section on the Main tab of the User profile contains the pre trade price controls To configure how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks check the Prevent orders that are more than X ticks from the market price checkbox and enter the number of ticks User Level Risk v Trading allowed Currency USD x E Use P amp L risk algorithm E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders E Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second E Ovenide credit for TT SIM Unlimited The administrator can set the number of ticks to a static range or a directional range by checking or unchecking the Only enforce a maximum pr
10. Product Group Permissions X_TRADER Properties _TRADER Customer Defaults x_RISK Properties xX_STUDY FMDS Copy Replace Account Numbers Cop Customer 42 Sel Market 42 Product Type amp 5 Product amp 4 Account Acct First lt DEFAULT gt Restrict Eq filter filter filter Vv ifilter s filter filter filter DEFAULT i FUTURE TT111_a AY DEFAULT FUTURE DEFAULT OPTION 272 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Click Replace Account Numbers The Replace Account Numbers window appears T Replace Account Numbers o Replace the Account Numbers of the selected rows Step 1 Remove characters The first 1 characters The last 2 All characters before this All characters after this Step 2 Add characters At stat At end Characters to add Configure the account replacement rules to determine how the existing account numbers will be replaced e Inthe Step 1section check Remove characters and set the options to The first 1 char acters e Inthe Step 2 section check Add characters At end and then enter b into the Charac ters to add field 7 Click Review Changes TT User Setup User Manual 273 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials The Review Account Number Changes window appears Review Account
11. Delete Export to HTML Export to CSV Specify sort criteria Function Accesses the New Account Default window which allows you to create a FIX Adapter account default by applying values such as Username Account Market Gateway and Product type Accesses the Edit Account Default window which allows you to edit a FIX Adapter account default Accesses the New Account Default window which allows you to create a new FIX Adapter account default based off an existing account default Permanently removes the selected FIX Adapter account default Exports data to an HTML file which you can use to generate a report Exports data to an CSV file which you can use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to determine the order in which data is dis played TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 351 19 Appendix Option Function Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns Show Hide Arrange columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is Find Control Panel useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel Unlock Users Reset Passwords Window The options available from the Unlock Users Reset Passwords window context menu include Option Function Unlock Unlocks users either in all available user groups or in a restricted number of groups Reset a password s e
12. F GTC GTDate orders allowed TT API allowed 7 Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed f applicable F Account changes on fills allowed User Defined Fields User Defined 1 lt values differ gt v User Defined 2 v User Defined 3 X User Defined 4 v User Defined 5 X User Defined 6 X Login Usemame lt VALUES DIFFER gt Display name lt values differ gt User group lt values differ gt Select Group F Active SBSBSBSBSQG 1 Getting Started Contact Country lt values differ gt z Address lt values differ gt A City lt values differ gt State Province lt values differ Zip lt values differ gt ual Email lt values differ gt A Phone number lt values differ gt E Organization lt values differ gt Customer in ICE Product Groups Report User Level Risk F Trading allowed Use P amp L risk algorithm Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price wv Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum Price on sell orders Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second E E Ovemide credit for TT SIM TT SIM credit Unlimited v Note Fields with different values display lt values differ gt checkboxes with different values display as either shaded or shaded and checked depending on your Windows Theme fields with common values display those common values and fields that cannot be edited are disabled grayed out 5 Edit one o
13. TT User Setup User Manual 205 Trading Technologies International Inc 15 Publishing to Guardian g Pubich to Giada Current Guardian TT User Setup Differences Publish to ove Publish Selected Gateway Logins to Guardian Comments Differences gt Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Record exists in filter x filter i KE1 003 KF1 nn TT TTO A MIKE a s il cxcnange Wagers diiic TTORD 00 003 TT 001 TT t 002 002 Ti pa Total rows displ Note TT User Setup includes an optional server side setting DisableProductLimitPublishing which causes TT User Setup to disregard all changes that are not related to order routing when checking for differences between Guardian and TT User Setup Order routing data includes TTORD to exchange trader mappings and TTORD account numbers This option must only be used with FIX Adapter 7 6 and later when all traders who are risk checked in the environment are using X_TRADER 7 8 or later For a detailed description on disabling product limit publish ing refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual Displaying Detailed Differences TT User Setup provides a detailed account of differences that exist between TT User Setup and Guard ian data prior to publishing You can use the information provided to reconcile these differences The Guardian User Setup Differences Details window consists of three sections 206 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Te
14. The following figure shows the Login and Contact sections of Main tab for a new FIX Adapter Server CCDC 7 i Login Contact Username CCDC Country United States Display name ClearCo Drop Copy Address User group FIX Adapter CCDC City Password Kenn State Province lt None gt Confirm password oe l Zip _ o E Email i E Phone number sd Password never expires Bolas Customer in ICE Product G Lo ES ker m ut Note TT recommends that you leave the Password never expires option checked On the New User window click the FIX Adapter tab If a version requirement message appears click OK The FIX Adapter Role field automatically populates with FIX Adapter Server Existing FIX client users appear in the Available FIX client users or The following FIX client users can connect to this FIX Adapter table If FIX client users have not been created these tables are empty TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Gateway Logins FIM Adapter Fis Adapter Fis Adapter role FIS Adapter Server wt Order routing server client or server Drop copy server Available Fis chent users Username Display Mame filter Wwe filter filter wt 6 Click the Drop copy server or Order routing server radi
15. To view and clear any product margin conflicts 1 From the Server Admin menu select Product Margins The Product Margins window appears TT User Setup User Manual 217 Trading Technologies International Inc 2 Click View All TTUS Guardian Conflicts The Product Table Conflicts window appears 16 Server Administration 3 218 Eurex Eurex Product Table Conflicts Market ProductType Product FUTURE FUTURE Source Margin TT User Setup 50 Eurex 50 Eurex Eurex B 50 TT User Setup Eurex Eurex Eurex B Use this Margin Use this margin Use this margin Use this margin Use this margin Use this margin Use this margin Use this margin Use this margin Use for All Conflicts for this Market Use TT User Setup margin values to resolve all Eurex confli Use Guardian Eurex margin values to resolve all Eurex conf Use Guardian Eurex 4 margin values to resolve all Eurex co Use Guardian Eurex B margin values to resolve all Eurex co Use TT User Setup margin values to resolve all Eurex confi Use Guardian Eurex margin values to resolve all Eurex conf Use Guardian Eurex 4 margin values to resolve all Eurex co Use Guardian Eurex B margin values to resolve all Eurex co Each conflict is listed separately TT User Setup allows you to resolve the conflict by selecting the TT User Setup value or the Guardian value for each product Select the TT User Setup or Guardian
16. Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Use this tool to migrate users to a new gateway based on how they are configured for a current gateway For example you may have users configured to log into a CME A gateway but you might like to install a CME B gateway as a backup This tool can be used to configure existing CME A users for the CME B gateway It will copy their gateway logins customer defaults product limits etc This tool can also be used f a gateway is rebranded For example you may have a CBOT A Gateway that will be taken down and brought up as a CME A gateway You can use this to copy users configurations for CBOT A over to CME A Source Gateway Target Gateway man E Delete Gateway Logins related to source gateway Available to User FIX Client Copy source settings to target Set all to available checked C Set all to unavailable unchecked Automatically Login Copy source settings to target Set all to auto checked Set all to manual unchecked Mandatory Login Copy source settings to target CO Set all to mandatory checked Set all to optional unchecked 2 3 224 Use the browse buttons to select the Source Gateway the gateway from which the users will be migrated and the Target Gateway the gateway to which the users will be migrated Check or uncheck the Delete Gateway Logins related to source gateway checkbox e Ifthe use
17. Username 4 Display Name Username 4 Display Name Group filter filter filter v ccDC ClearCo Drop Copy Server CCOR ClearCo Order Router Server FIX Adapter CCOR Versions with an asterisk indicate a planned future release Future releases are subject to change Check the product s release notes for detai Save View FIx Adapter Client fields 2 Use the transfer arrow buttons gt lt gt gt lt lt to select the FIX Adapter server users to which each client can connect For our example move the CCDC Server from the Available Fix Adapters list to the This FIX Client User can connect to the following FIX Adapter Servers list 3 Ifchecked the Enabling Debug Logging for Orders and Enabling Debug Logging for Prices options prompt the selected TT FIX Adapter Server to generate verbose debugging information TT User Setup User Manual 305 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Because a significant increase in the log file size affects performance only check these options when troubleshooting 4 Save and close the Users window 5 Repeat this procedure for each FIX Adapter Client user 6 Continue to the next section Running the TT User Setup Diagnostic Checks Use the Diagnostics Check utility after adding or modifying users to confirm that all of the data in TT User Setup is consistent and valid Invalid data can cause FIX Adapter
18. You have successfully assigned users to a gateway login Editing a User s Gateway Login Attributes The User s Gateway Login Attributes window displays all the users the gateway logins to which they are assigned and various attributes applied to each specific login Use this window to edit attributes across one or more users simultaneously The login attribute options include Login Attribute Description Indicates whether a user has access to a given Available to User gateway login after performing a universal login Indicates whether a FIX Client has access to a Available to FIX Client given gateway login after performing a uni versal login Specifies that a user will automatically be Automatically login logged into a gateway after logging into X_TRADER 146 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics Login Attribute Description Indicates whether the user must log onto this Gateway when logging into TT applications Mandatory login Check this option to prevent users from bypassing risk limits by not logging into a specific Gateway Indicates whether the user is allowed to deploy strategies to an AlgoSE Server This setting is only valid when the Gateway is an AlgoSE Server Algo deployment allowed Indicates whether the user is allowed to share algorithms with other users on Algo SE serv Algo sharing allowed ers This setting is o
19. ated Accounts TT User Setup User Manual 157 Trading Technologies International Inc 9 Account Administration Overview 158 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Account Group Administration Account Group Administration Overview Account groups allow TT User Setup administrators to configure combined risk limits for all of the accounts assigned to an account group New orders that are submitted with an account in a given account group are checked against the limits of the account group based on the combined positions and working orders of each account in the group This is independent of any risk checking that may be con figured for the user or Member Group Trader MGT Per group administrators can configure product specific position and order size limits as well as TT Gateway specific margin limits With account group product limits administrators can also disable trading per product Note To manage accounts that are not in account groups refer the Account Administration Overview on page 153 topic To create and configure accounts refer to the following topics e Creating Account Groups on page 160 e Assigning Accounts to an Account Group on page 162 e Adding Account Group Level Risk Checking on page 176 e Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 e Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 180 ic
20. 8 Click Save You have successfully set password expiration rules Automatic Diagnostics TT User Setup allows you to run diagnostic checks that list potential set up issues based on the informa tion available in the TT User Setup database For example Gateway Logins missing Accounts and Missing Product Limits The Automatic Diagnostics window allows you to select the diagnostics checks that all clients will automatically run When the TT User Setup Server detects one of the automatically configured errors it opens the Server Messages window and displays an Automatic diagnostics checks error 7 Server Messages fo Severity Message Source Source IP Time r E ker S Frer Frer Al Frer User Setup and Guardian are now not in sync UserSetupServer 3076 2010 12 21 10 51 Publish to Guardian started for trader TTORDAB 002 001 UserSetupServer 3076 2010 12 21 10 52 Publish to Guardian completed UserSetupServer 3076 2010 12 21 10 52 2010 12 21 10 52 User Setup and Guardian are now in sync UserSetupServer 3076 2010 12 21 10 52 V Scroll automatically to most recent message Show only Wamings and Errors Hours of message history to keep for display 12 lt Ready To configure Automatic Diagnostics 1 From the Server Admin menu select System Settings 2 Select the Automatic Diagnostics tab 232 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration
21. Configure any gateway specific margin limits as described in the Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 180 topic Click Save You have successfully created a new account group Note You can also access the Edit Account Group window by clicking Edit Account Group on the Accounts window Note To assign accounts to the account group refer to the Assigning Accounts to an Account Group on page 162 topic TT User Setup User Manual 161 Trading Technologies International Inc 10 Account Group Administration Assigning Accounts to an Account Group Youc an assign one or more accounts to a single account group from the Accounts window To create an account refer to the Creating Accounts on page 154 topic and to create an account group refer to the Creating Account Groups on page 160 topic 1 To assign accounts to an account group From the User Admin menu select Accounts g wee 9 Accounts G a meio 68 Acouac Fasono Account Group Account Description 2 Account Group Yt Member Group Trader filter filter filter v filter grp8743 ABROWN ABC Alfred Brown BTAYLOR _ ABC Brenda Taylor ABC John Doe ICE ACCOUNT ABC Total rows displayed 91 Rows selected 1 Ready 2 From the Accounts window select one or more accounts to assign to a group and then click Assign to Account Group This o
22. First Recorded Number of Recordings File Location Most Recent Recorded Login Date Time for this Username Description Universal Login ID used to log into one or more TT Gateways e g JDOE An identifier whereby you easily recognize the user e g John Doe An identifier used to categorize users e g Chicago An identifier as to whether the user is active or inactive The user s email contact The user s telephone contact An identifier of the machine on which the TT product resides The specific TT product e g X_TRADER Version number of the TT product The last date and time at which a report was exported The newest version information for client applications e g X_TRADER that have logged in The initial date and time a report was exported The total number of reports that you have exported The directory in which your html or csv file is stored The date and time the user last logged in with a specific username on the specific IP address 240 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports To display TT product version in a report 1 From the Reports menu select Run Reports The Reports window appears 2 From the Report drop down list select TT Product Version User Usage 3 Click Run The report appears Using Audit Trail to Track Database Updates Use the Audit Trail window to track updates made to the database Data
23. Gateway Product 44 Product Type 49 Account Acct Give Up FFT2 filter Iw filter Vi filter MA fiter filter filter fi ffilter filter m DEFAULT At JOHN DOE FUTURE 1091982 Total rows displayed 2 Rows selected 0 C Restrict user from editing their local customer defaults View All fields v Add New Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit For a detailed description of customer default functionality refer to the customer defaults topics in the Managing Users section TT User Setup User Manual 259 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 25 On the Edit User window click the Save button The newly created user and associated data display in the Users window 26 On the control panel click the Publish to Guardian icon Note TTORDs must be published to Guardian to be valid How to Map an Additional Gateway Login to an Existing TTORD User In this tutorial you will learn to update an existing TTORD user John Doe Using John s unique TTORD ID TTORDJS001001 you will add a Eurex gateway to the CME BrokerTec and CBOT Gateways that John currently logs into In addition you will add corresponding product limits to John s Eurex Gateway Login gt To map an additional gateway login to an existing TTORD user 1 From the User Admin menu select Users
24. The Users window appears 2 Inthe Display Name column filter type John s display name to easily locate his user record 3 To open the Edit User window for JDOE double click on the row associated with John s user record For additional ways to access the Edit User window refer to Creating Editing and Deleting Records on page 25 isa Edit User JDOE X_TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions Login Usemame JDOE Display name John Doe User group Chicago 260 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 4 Click the Gateway Logins tab and then double click the row for any of John s existing logins The Edit Gateway Logins window appears g Edit Gateway Login TTORDJS 001 001 Gateway Login Info Group Permissions Member TTORDJS Exchange Traders Remove Map to Exchange Traders Group 001 Trader 001 Gateway 41 Member 42 Group 3 Trader 4 BTec AUUS LDA MWABTT CBOT A UMOg ZM3 lem CBOT B 8c222 Set Password CBOT E NONG Aias CBOT ee B5002 CME Ch123 E Disable Auto Calculate SOD AZ44 5 Click Map to Exchange Traders 6 On the Available Exchange Traders section of the Map Exchange Traders to window type Eurex in the Gateway column filter to easily locate any available Eurex MGTs Available Traders Gateway 1 Member 42 Group 3 Trader 4 Cg filter w filter filter
25. To access the Server Messages window 1 From the Reports menu select Server Messages The following is an example of the Server Messages window and some of the types of mes sages it displays TT User Setup User Manual 225 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Severty Message Source P v v Done bading traders from Guardian Loaded 23 traders UserSetupServer 3076 Guardian and User Setup trader deta matches UserSetupServer 3076 Master detects no other master heartbeats Able to process UserSetupServer 3076 messages to update database EET Done with al startup tasks Master ready _Login Attempt _ ver 3076 5 Login attempt UserSetup style user TTSYSTEM result Ok a UserSetupServer 3076 Slave initializing UserSetupServer 4104 Detected master at ip serSetupServer 4104 Steve detected active master heartbeat Starting replication UserSetupServer 4104 mastd Error Message j database from siave UserSetupServer 3076 Warning Message Warning Detected that Stave server went down at ip 172r Ose SetupServer 3076 v Scroll automatically to most recent message Show only Wamings and Erors Hours of message history to keep for display 12 Ready Note The Server Messages window appears automatically whenever an error is received The Server Messages window displays only messages that occur while the client is running Refer to the server log files in the tt logfiles directory for curr
26. United States X Display name Mark Brown Address 1 Liberty Plaza User group Chicago Select Group City New York Password Da State Province New York X Confirm password mained Zp 10006 Email mbrown email com T Active Phone number 555 555 5555 Password never expires Organization Locked out Customer in ICE Product Groups Report V Limit the number of concurrent logins based on IP address 1 Max number allowed Force logoff XT 7 7 6 FA 7 8 TT API allowed Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed if applicable Account changes on fills allowed User Defined Fields User Defined 1 X User Defined 2 X User Defined 3 X User Defined 4 X User Defined 5 X User Defined 6 X View TT User Setup Admin fields x Save and Add New Close Ready 4 On the Main tab 1 Assign Mark a Username Display name and Password 2 Select Password never expires 3 Add any other data in the applicable fields and 4 Click Save 5 On the TT User Setup Permissions tab click to select either Super Administrator or Group Administrator Note If you select the Group Administrator option you must assign at least one user group to that group Administrator 6 Change the View to X_TRADER X_RISK fields Notice that the TT User Setup Permissions tab remains 7 From the X_TRADER X_RISK tab select the X_RISK Properties tab and then select the X_RISK options as needed 264 TT Us
27. 001 JPS 001 001 002 We Note If you copied any TTORDs remember to edit the gateway login and update the Account numbers if needed Edit the settings on the remaining tabs as needed When you are finished click Save You have successfully created a new user by copying an existing user 68 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc User Administration X_ TRADER or X_RISK Users Creating and Editing X_TRADER or X_RISK Users To create an X_ TRADER or X_RISK user complete the following topics e Applying Basic User Properties on page 69 e Applying X_TRADER Properties on page 72 e Applying X_RISK Properties on page 73 e Creating and Managing X TRADER Customer Defaults on page 73 e Configuring X_ STUDY and FMDS on page 80 e Creating a New Gateway Login through the Users Window on page 82 e Generating a Gateway Login for all Gateways on page 83 e Assigning Gateway Logins to a User Through the Users Window on page 83 e Allowing or Blocking Product Groups on page 84 Applying Basic User Properties Edit the user properties using the Main tab on the New User or Edit User window The procedures in this topic describe how to create a new X_TRADER or X RISK user but they apply to editing or copying existing users as well Refer to the Creating Editing and Deleting Records on page 25 topic for other methods you can use to create or ed
28. Click Save John s new product limits display in the Product Limits window 13 Close the Product Limits window 14 On the Edit User window click Save 262 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 15 Click Close Note To apply John s new gateway login settings you must publish them to Guardian How to Set Up an Administrator Who Uses Both X RISK and TT User Setup In this tutorial you will learn to create an admin type user Mark that is able to log into both X_RISK and TT User Setup In addition you will set up Mark so that he can create new users assign risk param eters in TT User Setup publish SODs and monitor trading via X_RISK Note As part of the administrator setup procedure you should set up an administrator email account for the dissemination of newly generated passwords For the procedure for setting up such an account refer to the topic Configuring the Outgoing Email Settings on page 93 To set up an administrator who uses both X_RISK and TT User Setup 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 From the Users window set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields 3 Click New The New User window appears TT User Setup User Manual 263 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Main TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings Login Contact Usemame MBROWN Country
29. How to Set Up an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter Server and Corresponding FIX Adapter Clients In this tutorial you will learn how to set up IDs for an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter Server as well as FIX Adapter client users that will connect to it After creating the IDs you will then be able to assign the FIX Adapter Clients to the FIX Adapter Server The following example demonstrates these tasks Example ClearCo is an FCM that hosts two TT Gateways CME A and Eurex A AB Asset Management is one of their customers Three traders BOB BILL and MIKE at AB Asset Management would like to use their own FIX application to route orders to these TT Gateways Traders BOB and BILL must have the ability to see each others orders Trader MIKE does not share an order book with anyone The traders will be mapped as follows AB BOB gt TTORDAB 001 001 AB BILL gt TTORDAB 001 002 AB MIKE gt TTORDAB 002 001 Based on these requirements ClearCo needs to set up a new Order Routing FIX Adapter Server CCOR and three FIX Adapter client users AB BOB AB BILL and AB MIKE Complete all of the sections in both of the following topics Creating TT FIX Adapter Servers Creating an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter Server in TT user Setup consists of the following tasks Creating a FIX Adapter Server username gt To create a FIX Adapter Server username 1 From the TT User Setup Control Panel open the User Admin menu and click
30. ID TT User Setup User Manual 265 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Contin password Set Password Note Use TTADM for a full admin 12 Click Add Gateways The Select Gateway window appears 13 Select a Market a Gateway and click Done Repeat this step for each gateway that Mark would log into 266 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials l Market Exchange ID filter filter Bele le lElElzElE 5 goSe as e nose ose ose ose AlgoSE Note You do not have to associate an account as this is only necessary when publishing to Guardian 14 Click Save Note For Mark being a TT User Setup user the newly created gateway login can be used to log into X_RISK 15 On the Edit User window click Save Mark s new administrator user data appears in the Users window How to Set Up a Third party Risk Administrator TT User Setup User Manual 267 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials In this tutorial you will learn how to create an administrator that will only manage risk for a select group of TT Gateways This is useful when you use a third party s exchange credentials but do not want that third party to create users edit non risk settings or edit risk settings that do not belong to them Example ABC Trading hosts two TT Gateways CME A and Eurex A and manages traders u
31. Inc 1 Getting Started Server Messages window enhancement Added a Show only Warnings and Errors checkbox to the Server Messages window Check this option to display only warnings and errors in the Server Messages window for this TT User Setup Client For more information refer to the Understanding Server Messages topic 7 3 Enhancements Tiered administration enhancement Added two TT User Setup user types a View Only Administrator has read only privileges and a Gateway Login Administrator can manage gate way logins and risk but who cannot create users Diagnostic checks tool Added an option to run diagnostic checks that list potential setup issues Copying Users Added the ability to copy a user s TTORD IDs and non TTORD IDs when copying a user Forced logoff Added functionality that allows an administrator to shut down a user s running X_TRADER application to reclaim the X_TRADER license User Level Risk Added risk functionality to the user properties Main tab that allows an admin istrator to determine whether a user can log in and actively trade how much credit is available for placing orders and in what currency any filled orders will be calculated This enhancement is especially helpful for users who are assigned to multiple Direct Trader Logins as it allows an administrator to set one limit for the user as opposed to several FIX Adapter Server and Client users Added the ability to configure TT FIX Adapter server
32. Inc 19 Appendix Field Eurex Persist orders Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults Manual Fill MF access allowed Start of Day SOD access allowed Contract Session Prices CSP access allowed Instant Messages IM access allowed Feature Determines whether Eurex orders sent from X_TRADER are automatically set to persist or whether the user can config ure the Persist orders and Only GTC options in X_TRADER Forces the user to use only the specified customer defaults Allows the user to publish manual fills in X_RISK Allows the user to publish Start of Day records in X_RISK Allows the user to publish Contract Ses sion Prices in X_RISK Allows the user to send instant messages in X_RISK Location New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User X_RISK Properties tab New User Edit User X_RISK Properties tab New User Edit User X_RISK Properties tab New User Edit User X_RISK Properties tab Minimum Version Supported X_TRADER 7 X X TRADER 7 6 0 X RISK 7 4 2 X RISK 7 4 2 X RISK 7 4 2 X RISK 7 4 2 TT User Setup User Manual 359 Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Field X STUDY FMDS allowed for this user Override system set tings with user set tings X_STUDY FMDS Allowed Staged order creation allowed Direct Mark
33. Introducing System Settings 4 542060 esdes td dbase eed eae ede Wesde Gaeaeas 226 Configuring Concurrent Login Rules 0 0000s 227 Configuring Password Locking Rules 0 228 Customizing the Failed Login Attempt Message 00 0 cece ee eens 229 Configuring Password Rules 44424 4i 94 405 bx eae eeab eee es bn eeas ees nese ks 230 Automatic Diagnostics isc a4p rae we SAK eee eRe ek ee Rd ee ee KES 232 vi TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 TT Gateway and the Exchange Enabling and Configuring X_ STUDY and FMDS System Settings 233 REPONS 2 f4 ciGe Hi ceed a bene eee wedewe pe ree ead E nee A owes da eee eee 237 Displaying and Exporting Reports j 0446 40404 4a44 eee eeadeadd ees leae GR as KERaE OS 237 Displaying a Report disc ovata os sreatha gesa kirt tarni opad aiaia ia eA 238 Exporting a Report as HTML or CSV oooeunnanaananannna unran 238 Tracking the TT Product Version Number 00 0 cece ee eee teen ene 239 Using Audit Trail to Track Database Updates 0 teens 241 Displaying Logged ti USC S 2 625224 kreeni esinen E net a Gnaeus EEEE EA 243 Viewing Server Messages 5 5 ba eho nk awh nennu nenna eeaeee 246 Displaying Running Servers i445 6iause ie ct nnana nauraa 247 Viewing Server SUS sa seama ihopa Rando etv ar toe abd atheuhewstheatous 248 Generating an ICE Product Groups Report 0 000 cc ccc eens 248 T tonalS L
34. Lj Account Groups ole xs l Description Group Permissions Last Changed Creat filter filte Yv grp128742 Group 128742 2012 10 23 grp34t63 Group 34t63 2012 10 23 grp4532 Group 4532 2012 10 23 grp8743 Group 8743 2012 10 23 grpSSE44 Group SSE44 2012 10 23 Total rows displayed 5 Rows selected 0 Ready TT User Setup User Manual 159 Trading Technologies International Inc 10 Account Group Administration Note The Account Groups window is a standard data grid except that you cannot copy or mass edit accounts Refer to the Data Grid Functionality on page 25 topic if needed Creating Account Groups Create account groups from the Account Groups window or when assigning an account to an account group To create a new account group 1 From the User Admin menu select Account Groups i Description v filter Group 128742 Group 34t63 Group 4532 vr Group Permissions filter Last Changed Creat v filter v 2012 10 23 2012 10 23 2012 10 23 2012 10 23 2012 10 23 Total rows displayed 5 Ready 2 From the Account Groups window click New 160 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 10 Account Group Administration 7 8 filter EJ New Account Group baba al Account Group Info Associated Accounts Margin Limits Gateway 41 Enabled Cur
35. M Reports Menu Reports Menu Shortcut Reports Menu ALT R Logged in Users ALT R L Audit Trail ALT R A Run Reports ALT R R Server Messages ALT R M TT User Setup Servers ALT R S Environment Server Status ALT R E ICE Product Group Reports ALT R I Help Menu Help Menu Shortcut Help Menu ALT H Help Topics ALT H H What s New ALT H W TT Remote Help Center ALT H T About TT User Setup ALT H A TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 355 19 Appendix TT User Setup Feature and TT Product Compatibility Field Force logoff GTC GTDate orders allowed Trading allowed Credit Currency Use P amp L risk algo rithm Prevent orders that are more than X ticks from the market price Only enforce a maxi mum price on buy orders and a mini mum price on sell orders Feature Force a user logoff Allow or Prevent Good Till Cancel and Good Till Date orders Allow or prevent trading adding mod ifying or deleting orders Configure user credit limit Configure credit cur rency Use the P amp L risk algorithm to risk check a user Set how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks Location New User Edit User Main tab New User Edit User Main tab New User Edit User Main tab New User Edit User Main tab New User Edit User Main tab New User Edit User Main tab Both controls are available in two lo
36. Only Super Administrators have access to the System Settings because these properties apply to all users Configuring Concurrent Login Rules Administrators can limit the number of times a single user can be logged in concurrently based on the number of IP addresses from which a user has logged in If a user attempts to log in with a username that has already reached the assigned maximum number of logins the login fails until that user ID closes a client connection and releases a license TT SIM logins do not affect concurrent license counts Note The concurrent login feature works for users logged in using Universal Login only Warning To correctly control time delays you must synchronize the machine times for each TT User Setup server gt To limit the number of concurrent logins 1 From the Server Admin menu select System Settings The System Settings window appears and defaults to the General tab Concurrent Logins C Enforce maximum concurrent logins per user based on IP address This time delay gives Guardservers a chance to syne ensuring that a user cannot use more concurrent logins than they are allowed by quickly logging in from multiple IP addresses In most environments 12 seconds is sufficient 2 Check the Enforce maximum concurrent logins per user option 3 In the Seconds that a user must wait between successful login attempts field select the num ber of seconds between 0 and 100 that must pass bef
37. You can sort by columns alphabetically A Z or Z A or numerically For example sort by the Last Changed column of the Users window to determine which users were most recently added or edited TT User Setup indicates sort order by placing a number in the header of a sorted column The number one indicates the highest priority the number two indicates the second highest priority and so on A down arrow indicates the items are sorted in descending order and an up arrow indicates an ascending order To sort the columns e From the data grid click the column headers from the lowest priority to the highest priority For more information refer to Sorting from the Data Grid e Right click the data grid and select Specify sort criteria Set the sort order from the Sort dialog box For more information refer to Sorting from the Sort Dialog Box Sorting from the Data Grid gt To manually sort the columns from the data grid TT User Setup User Manual 33 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started 1 Open a data grid window for example Gateway Logins 2 On the column header row click one of the column titles r gt 4 Gateway Logins m a ee Ge S Member Group 4 Trader 4 Gateway 4 Exch Member filter w filter w filter w filter w filter 054001 E TO 000 CME A 054001 p TTADM KAX MGR CME A TTADM TTORDY2 XXX VIEW CME A TTORDY2 CME 001 001 CME B CME TTORDIS 001 001 CME B CME
38. administrators can create and manage rules that reject logins or warn users when the users is attempting to connect to TT User Setup with a specific version of X_TRADER or X_RISK Administrators can also Collect Log Files from other machines on their gateway reset the Guardian exchange tree and edit currency tables FIX Adapter Administration Administrators can create TT FIX Adapter Order Routing Servers FIX Adapter Drop Copy Servers and their corresponding FIX Adapter client users Administrators also assign FIX Adapter servers and clients login information contact information gateway logins and FIX Adapter account defaults Reports Administrators can view the list of users that are connected in an environment an audit trail of the changes to the database and various additional reports that list user and system information These reports can all be exported to CSV or HTML Users either logged in or not can also monitor Server activity and status using the Server Messages TT User Setup Servers and Environment Server Status windows which provide updates on login attempts server up downs error conditions active servers in your environment etc Logging Into TT User Setup Use the TT Login window to log into TT User Setup To log in successfully a TT User Setup Server must be running as a Master server For a detailed description on the role of a Master server refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual Note Wi
39. edit and create users gateway logins and accounts that exist in one of the user groups the administrator is designated to manage Also pro vides the option to prevent a group administrator from creating or editing direct trader gateway logins as well as from assigning those logins directly to traders e Gateway Login Administrator Provides permission to assign gateway logins and gateway login attributes to users in the user groups the administrator is designated to manage e Password Administrator Provides permission to unlock users and reset passwords for some user groups or all user groups e View Only Provides permission to view users gateway logins and accounts that exist in one of the user groups the administrator is designated to view View only Administrators can also view system settings and relevant diagnostic checks e Collect Log Files Only Provides permission to collect any log files in the trading environment including log files containing sensitive trading information This user cannot view or edit any user or system settings TT User Setup User Manual 13 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Server Administration From the System Settings window administrators can configure the login rules set password rules and restrictions set the default behavior for newly added product groups configure automatic diagnostics and enable and configure FMDS for the system From the Version Rules window
40. filter filter filter filter filter v TTSIM BOND 10_YEAR TTSIM BOND ee ee TTSIM BOND 3_YEAR TTSIM BOND 30_YEAR TTSIM BOND 5_YEAR TTSIM BOND CAD 5_3 4_ lt Total rows displayed 171 Rows selected 1 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 2 Select one or more product margins and then click Edit 216 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration 4 Edit Product Margin TTSIM FUTURE 068 _ pen Market TTSIM Product Type FUTURE Product 066 Currency Margin 3 Inthe Margin field enter the new margin and then click OK 4 When you are finished editing margins click Save and Publish All You have successfully edited the project margins Note Although the Guardian product tables are updated the Guardian GUI on the TT User Setup Server will not display the new settings from TT User Setup until the Guardian service is restarted Viewing and Clearing Product Margin Conflicts When TT User Setup detects multiple gateways with different margins for the same products TT User Setup adds a comment to the Comments Conflicts column and also makes an entry in the Product Table Conflicts window Conflicts typically happen when a product margin has been changed outside of TT User Setup A TT User Setup Super administrator can view and clear the conflicts gt
41. filter x TTORDJS 001 001 CME CM123 TT2 TT2 TTORDJS 001 001 CME A CME 001 001 TTORDJS 001 001 Eurex AZ44 BPS JPS TTORDJS 001 001 Eurex A D54032 001 TTORDJS 001 001 Eurex B D54048 001 TTORDJS 001 001 ICE_IPE ICE012 002 lt Total rows displayed 6 Rows selected 0 View X_TRADER X_RISK fields v Add New SO K Ready Leave the Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways option unchecked To use this option refer to Generating a Gateway Login for all Gateways on page 83 To create a new gateway login click New You can also edit an existing login by selecting it and clicking Edit Follow the procedures in the Assigning the MemberGroupTrader ID on page 135 topic start ing with step 2 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users Generating a Gateway Login for all Gateways In some instances you may want to configure an admin user to connect to all gateways To do this you can create a gateway login for each gateway and assign the gateway logins to the admin user or you can use the Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways feature one time This feature allows you to add additional gateways to your trading environment without having to update the administrative user This is especially helpful when setting up for example a Username for your Historical Fill Server Each time your HFS starts up
42. for orders that have not been allocated to a customer Indicates the clearing member code Used for Give up trade accounts only Used for annotation purposes by the trader or back office sub account The back office manager usually dictates how to use these free form text fields Indicates the time the order is in force includ ing GTD Good Till Day Order is valid only for the current trading day GTC Good Till Cancel Order is valid until you cancel it or the contract expires GIS Good in Session Order is valid only for the current trading session Some exchanges like Euronext have products with different trading ses sions in one day TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 55 2 User Administration Fields Description Indicates the order type and determines whether the order is sent as a Limit or Market order e Limit Works at a specific price e Mkt Market Works the inside mar ket e MTL Market Limit Sends a Market order with the condition that on a par tial fill the remaining quantity rests as a Limit order at the price that was just hit or taken Available on TOCOM and SGX e BL Best Limit Joins the best bid or offer without being required to enter a price Available on TOCOM Order type Specifies if the user has an order restriction such as FOK IOC or LSM Order restriction Note Support and definitions for order restrict
43. ond that a trader may send to a given TT Gateway The TT Gateway will reject orders submitted in excess of the configured limit per second This topic contains the following sections e Order Throughput Controls Overview on page 191 e Order Rejection Overview on page 192 e Example Order Throughput Control on page 192 e Enabling and Setting the Order Throughput Controls on page 193 e QOverriding the Order Throughput Controls on page 194 Order Throughput Controls Overview The User Level Risk section on the Main tab of the User profile contains the order throughput controls To prevent more than a specific number of orders per second check the Per TT Gateway prevent more than X orders per second checkbox and enter the number of orders per second User Level Risk Trading allowed Currency USD E Use P amp L risk algorithm E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders E Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second E Ovenide credit for TT SIM Unlimited Note Use the Prevent more than X orders per second overrides the User Level setting option to set the maximum rate of orders per second allowed per TT Gateway and override the user level setting For more details refer to Overriding the Order Throughput Controls on page 194 The TT Gateway calculates the number of order
44. this option limits the X_RISK administrator to accounts in the specified user groups Restrict X_RISK administrator to publishing MEF SODs to accounts within the User Groups listed below X_STUDY FMDS The X_STUDY FMDS tab has the following fields Fields Description Determines if the user has X_STUDY FMDS enabled The option is only available when the X_STUDY FMDS Allowed system setting is enabled X_STUDY FMDS allowed for this user For a detailed description of FMDS and X_STUDY settings refer to the Enabling and Configuring X_ STUDY and FMDS Sys tem Settings on page 233 topic TT User Setup User Manual 57 Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Fields Description Overrides the FMDS server system settings i i ith tti f Override system settings with user settings with settings for this user Specifies the IP address port service and timeout settings for the primary and second ary FMDS server Primary FMDS Server settings Secondary FMDS Server settings FIX Adapter The FIX Adapter tab applies to FIX Adapter Server and Client users It contains the following tabs e FIX Adapter server role on page 58 e FIX Adapter client role on page 58 e Account Defaults on page 59 FIX Adapter server role The FIX Adapter tab fields vary depending on the selected role client or server When you set the FIX Adapter role to F
45. when assigning a Gateway Login to a user refer to the Assigning Users to a Gateway Login topic and from the User s Gateway Login Attributes window refer to the Editing a User s Gateway Login Attributes topic Note You can assign the same Operator ID to multiple users from the User s Gateway Login Attri butes window or the Assign to users window 7 4 6 Enhancements Price controls TT User Setup allows you to restrict the price band in which orders can be entered for a given user to a pre determined number of ticks above or below the current market price For more information refer to the Setting Pre Trade Price Controls topic Order throughput controls TT User Setup allows you to limit the rate at which orders can be submitted For more information refer to the Setting Order Throughput Controls topic GTC GTDate order controls TT User Setup allows you to prevent GTC and GTDate orders per user For more information refer to the Applying Basic User Properties topic 7 4 5 Enhancements There are no new user features in this release 7 4 4 7 4 3 Enhancements Machine Gun Order Support TT User Setup allows you to enable or disable the X_ TRADER Machine Gun option for versions of X_TRADER that support the Machine Gun option For more information refer to the New User and Edit User Window Fields topic Eurex Persist Order Support TT User Setup allows you to configure whether Eurex orders sent f
46. 18 Tutorials The New Exchange Trader window appears E Mew Exchange Trader Market CME Gateway CME Member OMI123 Group TIZ Trader TTA Save and Add New Close 11 Click the Market field or the button select a Gateway and then click Select The Market and Gateway fields automatically populate with your selection 12 Complete the Member Group and Trader fields and click Save 13 If there are available exchange traders in the Map Exchange Trader to window you can skip Steps 9 and 10 and use the arrow buttons to transfer multiple IDs from the Available Exchange Traders section to the Selected Exchange Traders section 14 Click Done 15 On the New Gateway Login window click Assign Accounts Note You are required to assign a unique account number when setting up a new TTORD ID The Assign accounts window displays a list of all accounts not currently in use by another ID TT User Setup User Manual 255 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 16 17 Account No Filter 002 1020304 1091982 1231232123 123533456 1877563 the Selected Accounts pane Using the arrow buttons transfer one or more records from the Available Accounts section to Note In order to trade John Doe would be required to use one of the selected account numbers If there are no available accounts to select click Create Account Name Gateway 41 Enabled Currency M
47. 48 e FIX Adapter on page 58 e TT User Setup Permissions on page 61 e Outgoing Email Settings on page 63 e Product Group Permissions Settings on page 64 Main The Main tab contains the user s basic information This tab is appears for all user types Fields Description A Universal Login ID used to log into a TT application e g JDOE Username Note Usernames are limited to 11 characters An identifier whereby you easily recognize Display name the user e g John Doe An identifier used to categorize users e g Chicago You can use it to group traders in the X_RISK Position window User group optional Note The user group also determines which TT User Setup administrators can manage which users The user s login password e g 12345678 Note Password fields only appear in the New Password Confirm password P User window before a user has been saved Enables a user s login If this field is Active unchecked the user is considered inactive Inactive users cannot log in 42 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Fields Password never expires Locked out Limit the number of concurrent logins Force logoff TT API allowed GTC GTDate orders allowed User Defined Fields Contact fields Trading allowed Description Sets the user s password to never expire Indicates whether the use
48. 9d He deaekd e da Rene endaekd Kids eee eee eade 165 Account and Account Group Level Risk 0 0 0 c ccc eee 165 User Level Risk 6 0b 644d ke Rese RAETARRARRA REE ER EMT AGEERARG ATR AR ELE GRA 165 Prod ct Limits OvEIMICW 40 4 0cwsntaee ra dak ex araateee e aaee E a a aa ea e aa 166 Configuring Gateway Login Risk 1 2 0 0 ccc cent e eee nee 166 Creating Product Limits for Gateway Logins c64 ces en anneer beeatenes beee ue 168 Copying Product Limits to Additional Gateways or Gateway Logins 172 Account and Account Group Risk Administration 0000 cece ees 175 Adding Account Level Risk Checking 0 cece cence ene nes 175 Adding Account Group Level Risk Checking 0 00 176 Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups 0 00 ee eee eee 176 Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups 0 0 0 eee eee 180 Copying Product Limits to Additional Accounts or Account Groups 4 181 Copying Account Based Product Limits to Additional Gateways 000 182 User Level Risk Checking i isicdssisaineneiacine cana eta nie eieenedaedeana wee dawan s 185 Adding User Level Risk Checking 0 ccc cece cence ene neas 185 Setting Pre Trade Price Conle 5i0444 sakes dood edioteivetieeehedsabeeeeedeatox 187 TT User Setup User Manual v Trading Technologies International Inc Table of Contents Price Con
49. Account Group Based Risk Checking Administrators can now config ure risk limits for a particular account or place multiple account numbers into a single account group and configure risk checking for the group as a whole This includes controlling the maxi mum order size of a single order the worst case maximum long or short positions that can be attained per product and or contract and the worst case sum of all long and short contracts per product Per account or account group administrators can also define margin limits that apply to individual TT Gateways When a client submits an order that includes an account the TT Gateway checks the order against the limits of the account If the account belongs to an account group the TT Gateway risk checks based on the combined positions and working orders of all the accounts in the group Additionally per account or account group administrators can e Enable or disable risk checking e Enable or disable trading per product For more information refer to the Adding Account Level Risk Checking and Adding Account Group Level Risk Checking topics Note No account or account group risk checking will take place until risk checking is enabled and the gateways have been upgraded to 7 16 8 This will allow administrators to configure new limits without impacting their current setups e Preventing the Use of Undefined Accounts Administrators can determine whether or not to allow an order
50. Acct FFT2 filter filter Move to Top Move Up Total rows displayed 3 Rows selected 1 View FIX Adapter Client fields v Save and Add New Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit For example based on the values in the illustration below if the restrict override option is checked an order must match all of the values including a Clearing Acct value and an FFT2 value However if the restrict value is unchecked only the key values Account Market Gateway and Product type must match 106 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Usemame Producttype Ft Account type Al Clearing Acct FFT2 FFT3 Ready Creating an Account Default The following procedure describes how to create an account default from the User window You can also access the New Account Default window by selecting FIX Adapter Account Defaults from the User Admin menu To create an account default 1 From the User Admin menu select Users The Users window appears 2 Double click the row of an existing user The Edit User window appears TT User Setup User Manual 107 Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users n Click the FIX Adapter tab and then click the Account Defaults tab 4 On the Account Defaults tab click New The New Accoun
51. Administrator can reset passwords for users in one or more defined user groups When resetting a password a user s existing password is replaced the Password administrator does not need to know the user s existing password to reset that password Note A Password Administrator cannot reset a Super Administrator s or Group Administrator s pass word gt To reset a password 1 To force the user to change their password at the next login check the Require user to change initial password option on the Password Rules tab of the System Settings window Refer to the Configuring Password Rules on page 230 topic if needed 2 From the User Admin menu select Unlock Users Reset Passwords 3 Click the row of the user whose password you want to reset and then click Reset Password Note Alternatively you can click the Password button on the Main tab of the Edit User win dow The Password change window appears 4 Inthe New Password and Confirm New Password fields enter the new password 5 Click Save Note If you have configured the Outbound Email Settings you can also generate and email a new password using the Auto Generate Password button Refer to Auto Generating and Emailing a User s Password on page 114 topic You have successfully reset a password TT User Setup User Manual 113 Trading Technologies International Inc 6 User Maintenance Auto Generating and Emailing a User s Password Administrators tha
52. Available to User Available to FIX client Automatically login E Mandatory login XT 7 17 Prevent more than orders per second Overides the userlevel setting Denat acon Clearing member Prefered IF Operator ID 5 Uncheck the Available to User option to disable the feature 6 Click Save The Available To User column on the User s Gateway Login Attributes window shows the value unchecked 7 On the User s Gateway Login Attributes window filter the Gateway column by CME A 8 Holding down the Ctrl key click the applicable user rows for which you want to make the asso ciated login available 9 Click Edit On the Edit multiple user Gateway Login records prompt click OK The Edit Multiple User Gateway Login Attributes window appears 10 Check the Available to user option to enable the feature 11 Click Save TT User Setup User Manual 149 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics The CME A gateway is made available to the applicable user s associated gateway login b gt jba jEs T Users Gateway Login Attributes Username 4 at Name User Group d Member Group Trader Avail to User a filte RADAMS RobertAdams Chicago CME CME 001 RADAMS RobertAdams Chicago CME A CME 001 001 No RMARTIN Richard Martin New York CME TTORDNY RMARTN Richard martin New Yo CME A TTORONY a Total rows displayed 46 Rows selected 2 Ready To edit mult
53. Column Title Associated Windows Undefined Accounts Allowed Users XT CD tab Users Users Users Users Selected Users GW Login Product Limits Description Determines if orders submit ted by this user will be rejected if they are sent with an account that is not defined in TT User Setup Indicates that the option to enforce a maximum order quantity has or has not been enabled Determines if the P amp L risk algorithm is used to risk check this user When Use P amp L Risk Algo is set to yes the P amp L risk algorithm is used for risk checking In X_TRADER the P L based on setting defaults to Risk Algorithm and is uneditable When Use P amp L Risk Algo is set to no risk checking uses the Last Traded Price The P L based on X_TRADER set ting remains editable Displays optional user infor mation such as MGT account number or any information you choose to enter Overrides the FMDS server system settings with settings for this user Universal Login ID used to Username Users Accounts Account Groups log into one or more TT Gate User GWL Attributes Assign ways e g JDOE to Available Users FA tab 342 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title User Group see Group User Status see Status Version X_RISK Access X_STUDY FMDS X_ TRADER Mode XR CSP Access XR IM Access XR ME Access XR SOD Access XT Av
54. D54031 D54001 ABCCD KG004 XXJO1 San i Create 2 Using the transfer arrow buttons gt gt gt lt lt lt move one or more exchange traders MGTs from the Available Exchange Traders section to the Selected Exchange Traders section Note If the exchange trader does not exist click Create to create it After you save the new exchange trader it is automatically added to the Selected Exchange Traders section 3 Click Done Additional exchange traders appear in the Edit Gateway Login window 4 Because you are creating a TTORD gateway login you must also assign an account number Continue to the Assigning Accounts on page 141 topic TT User Setup User Manual 139 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics Adding Gateways to Existing TTORDs You can assign gateway s to existing TTORDs from the Gateway Logins window This is useful when the TTORD already exists and is assigned to the correct exchange traders but needs to be assigned additional gateways Note The selected gateway logins must all be tradable TTORDs Example 50 traders trade on the CME A gateway using unique TTORDs Later a CME B gateway is added as a backup to CME A In this case you could add the CME B Gateway to the traders existing TTORDs To assign gateways to existing TTORDs 1 From the Gateway Logins window select one or more gateway logins make sure to select only TTORDs 2 Click A
55. Edit Account window click the Group Permissions tab a i Edit Account ACT11 rcs Account Info Group Permissions Available User Groups Account permitted in the following User Groups User Group 4 filter v lt General gt User Group 4 Users with Account Gateway Logins with Account Chicago BTAYLOR London Hew York Singapore Sydney Ready 4 Use the transfer buttons lt lt lt gt gt gt to select users from the Available User Groups list and add them to the Account permitted in the following User Groups list The Account permitted in the following User Groups section contains the following fields e User Group Displays the name of the user group e Users with Account Displays users in the given user group to whom the account is assigned e Gateway Logins with Account Displays gateway logins in the given user group to which this account is assigned TT User Setup User Manual 203 Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration 5 Click Save 204 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Publishing to Guardian Publishing to Guardian If you make changes to the product limits or gateway login risk settings you must publish the changes to Guardian before the changes take effect If TT User Setup and Guardian become out of synch the Publish icon on the control panel changes as indicated below to indicate that da
56. Exchange Rates window appears From 41 To 42 Exchange Rate Description Published Original Exchange Rate filte filter v filter filter v filter v 0 2442 One ARS 0 2442 AUD One AUD 4 095 ARS No 2 Select the currency you want to edit and click Edit you cannot select multiple currencies The Edit Exchange Rate window appears One AUD 4 095 You must click the Publish Exchange Rates button to save and publish the new rates 3 Enter the exchange rate into either field TT User Setup calculates the other field value for you In the example above one Argentinean Peso exchanges to 0 2442 Australian Dollars TT User Setup automatically calculates the reverse exchange at one Australian Dollar to 4 095 Argentin ean Pesos TT User Setup User Manual 213 Trading Technologies International Inc 4 Click OK 16 Server Administration Note To reset an exchange rate access the Edit Exchange Rate window and set both values to 0 5 When you are finished editing exchange rates click Publish Exchange Rates You have successfully edited the currency exchange rates Adding and Deleting Currencies When logged on as a Super Administrator you can add or delete currencies and you can select the pri mary currency that clients applications use when displaying P L and available credit Administrators previously performed these tasks from the Currency Table window in Guardi
57. FUTURE MLEE Chicago TTORDJS 001 002 Eurex FUTURE No PROUX Chicago TTORDJS 007 007 Eurex FUTURE RART lew vor ae a Ce FUTURE as Total rows displayed 150 Rows selected 3 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit e To edit or create product limits for Gateway Logins refer to the Creating Product Limits for Gateway Logins on page 168 topic You can also assign existing product limits to existing gate way logins Refer to Copying Product Limits to Additional Gateways or Gateway Logins on page 172 if needed e To edit or create product limits for accounts or account groups refer to the Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 topic Note The Product Limits window is a standard data grid Refer to Data Grid Functionality on page 25 if needed Configuring Gateway Login Risk When creating editing or copying a gateway login you can append specific Guardian risk data to the login The risk fields include e Risk Check Determines whether Guardian risk checks orders sent with this gateway login When Risk Check is checked the related risk settings are applied to a trader s orders e Trading allowed Determines if a gateway login can be used to trade e Ignore P amp L Determines whether P amp L is used in available credit calculations e Credit Specifies the sum of money available at the start of a trading session which can be affec
58. For example one trader s account number can be CME1 and another s can be cmel 3 Ifyou need to create a new account click Create enter the account number and description and then click Save The new account appears in the Selected Accounts section 4 Click Done 5 When you are finished adding accounts do one of the following 6 Add risk limits refer to the Configuring Risk on page 143 topic 7 Uncheck the Risk Check option to disable risk checking ween ca N Dan no a n mee gt smar ie ee Add to Guardian Product Limits New Product Limit Edit Copy Delete Gateway 4 Product 42 Product Type 4 Margin Addl Margin Max Order Qty Max Position Maru Risk Check filter Vv filter filter x filter x filter M filter Vv filter v Trading allowed CME A FUTURE 0 Unlimited Unlimited C Ignore P amp L Eurex A ul FUTURE 0 5000 Unlimited i Credit Unlimited Currency USD v C Override credit for TT SIM 8 After you configure or disable risk limits Save your changes 9 Ifneeded publish the changes to Guardian refer to Publishing to Guardian on page 205 142 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics Configuring Risk gt To configure risk 1 On the New Gateway Logins or Edit Gateway Logins window check Add to Guardian The Risk Check option
59. Gateway 4 AvailtoUser Exch Trader Accounts Addto Guardian Credit per MG Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter filter v filter v filter x filter x filter filter x filter filter x filter TTADM XXX VIEW CME A No TTADM XXX VIEW Eurex 4 No TTADM XXX VIEW LIFFE C No lt T Total rows TESSY 3 Rows selected 0 A A 7 Save and close the New User or Edit User window 8 Continue to the next section Creating TT FIX Adapter Client Users Creating a TT FIX Adapter client user in TT User Setup that connects to a Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter consists of the following tasks Creating a FIX Adapter Client Username To create a client username 1 From the TT User Setup Control Panel open the User Admin menu and click Users The Users window appears 2 From the New User View list select FIX Adapter Client fields New User View FIX Adapter Client fields 3 Click New The New User window appears 4 On the Main tab enter data in the following fields 5 Username The name of the FIX Adapter client user In FIX this is also known as RemoteCom pld Display name An identifier for the TT FIX Adapter client user 7 User group An identifier used to categorize users e g FIX Adapter For a detailed descrip tion on user groups refer to the TT User Setup User Guide de TT User Setup User Manual 301 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorial
60. Ifchecked the Enabling Debug Logging for Orders and Enabling Debug Logging for Prices options prompt the selected TT FIX Adapter server to generate verbose debugging information Note Because a significant increase in the amount of data logged affects performance only check the debug options when troubleshooting 4 Save and close the Users window 5 Repeat this procedure for each FIX Adapter client user You have successfully assigned a FIX Adapter server to a FIX Adapter client To assign TT FIX Adapter clients to the TT FIX Adapter server 1 On the server user s New User or Edit User window click the FIX Adapter tab If a version requirement message appears click OK TT User Setup User Manual 111 Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users iar erenreneran Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter FIX Adapter FIX Adapter role FIx Adapter Server Order routing server client or server Drop copy server Available FIX client users The following FIX client users can connect to this FIX Adapter Username Display Name Group gt Username Display Name Group filter j filter filter v ABROWH Alfred Brown FIX Adapter CCDC AB BILL FIX Client AB BILL FIX Adapter CCOR YZANDER Yolanda Zander FIX Adapter CCDC AB BOB FIX Client AB BOB FIX Adapter CCOR AB MIKE FIX Client AB MIKE FIX Adapter CCOR Versions with an asterisk indicate a planned future release Fu
61. New Edit Account window New Edit Account Group window Minimum Version Supported These fields do not apply to X_TRADER ver sions 7 8 or later TT Gateways 7 16 8 TT Gateways 7 16 8 Adds risk checking to Edit Account and Account and Account y accounts and account Account Group win TT Gateways 7 16 8 Group Info groups dow 362 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc
62. New Edit Creating and Managing X_TRADER Cus tomer Defaults on page 73 topic for more information Copy Copies the selected customer default Delete Deletes the selected customer default s Copies an existing customer default from Copy from User ie another user within your environment 52 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Buttons Fields Replace Account Numbers Restrict user from editing their local Cus tomer Defaults Description Replaces one or more customer default account numbers with similar account num bers based on selected pattern matching rules Forces the trader to use only these customer defaults The data grid has the following fields Fields Customer Selected Market Gateway Product type Description Sets the name of the profile Determines whether the customer is added to the X_TRADER Customer List window so the user can trade for those customers Lists available markets Enter an asterisk to apply the account and account type to all markets the trader is logged into Specifies the market flavor a user is able to log into and trade on using the assigned gate way login e g CME A Lists product types including Future Spread Option Strategy Stock Bond Swap Energy FOREX NDF or Warrant Enter an asterisk to use all product types TT User Setup User Manual Trading Techn
63. Note Use the Find Control Panel option available on most right click menus to bring the control panel into focus This is useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel The following is a list of menu options e Use the File menu to access login and logout features The options available from the File menu include Option Login Logout Publish to Guardian Exit Function Opens the TT Login window Logs you out of TT User Setup without clos ing the application The Login Server Mes sages and Server Status options remain available Opens the Publish to Guardian window from which you can publish risk and order routing data to Guardian Note If DisableProductLimitPublishing Mode is on then only order routing data is published to Guardian refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual for more information about the DisableProduct LimitPublishingMode parameter Closes the TT User Setup client e Use the User Admin menu to perform user and gateway login setup functions The options available from the User Admin menu include 20 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Option Users Gateway Logins Accounts Product Limits X_TRADER Customer Defaults Product Group Permissions Users Gateway Login Attributes Function Opens the Users window which allows you to create and manage users Opens the Gatewa
64. Prevent more than orders per second 3 7 Overides the userdevel setting 3 The Available Users list displays all the users you can assign to this gateway login Select the user s that you want to assign to the gateway login Note Press the Ctrl key to select multiple users 4 Using the transfer arrow buttons gt lt gt gt lt lt move the selected user s from the Available Users section to the Selected Users section Note When assigning a user to a TTORD that is used for multiple Gateways each Gateway appears as a separate entry in the Selected Users list TT User Setup User Manual 145 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics 5 Review the login attributes listed for the users in the Selected Users list If any attributes need to be changed for example if you wanted to disable Auto Login select the user edit the attri butes in the Login Attributes section and then click Set login attributes If you select multiple users the change will apply to the selected users Note Use the Prevent more than X orders per second overrides the User Level setting option to set the maximum rate of orders per second allowed per TT Gateway and override the user level setting For more details refer to Overriding the Order Throughput Controls on page 194 Note The Auto Login option is selected automatically when a user is assigned to a gateway login 6 Click Save
65. Publishing to Guardian In this tutorial you will learn how to use the Publish to Guardian window This includes e How to recognize when Guardian and TT User Setup data are out of synch e How to recognize when there are differences between Guardian and TT User Setup data e How to read data in the Publish to Guardian window e How to import data from Guardian To publish records to Guardian 1 From the File menu select Publish to Guardian or click the Publish to Guardian icon on the toolbar The Publish to Guardian window appears 2 Highlight the differences you want to publish 3 Click the Publish Selected Gateway Logins to Guardian button Recognizing when Guardian and TT User Setup data is out of sync TT User Setup provides a pop up message window that notifies you when data needs to be pub lished to Guardian This message appears automatically when you make a change that causes TT User Setup and Guardian to be out of sync The message also appears if you open the TT User Setup client when TT User Setup and Guardian are out of sync TT User Setup User Manual 285 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 286 CME in TT User Setup but not in Guardian TE s 18 Tutorials 5 TT User Setup and Guardian are out of sync Click the Publish to Guardian button to view differences and publish Understanding differences in Guardian and TT User Setup data TT User Setup provides a detailed account
66. Quoting option in X_TRADER If you leave Quoting RFQ allowed checked which is the default setting the user can turn Quoting RFQ allowed the X_TRADER Quoting functionality on or off Otherwise the user cannot enable Quot ing in X_TRADER For information about X_TRADER s quoting functionality refer to the X_TRADER Help Determines whether the user can configure the Wholesale Trades option in X_TRADER If you leave Wholesale trades allowed checked which is the default setting the user Wholesale trades allowed can turn X_TRADER s Wholesale Trades option on or off Otherwise the user cannot enable Wholesale Trades in X_TRADER For information about the X_TRADER wholesale trading functionality refer to the X_TRADER Help Determines whether the user is allowed to cre Staged order creation allowed ate staged orders This option is unchecked by default Determines whether the user is allowed to Staged order management allowed claim and work staged orders This option is unchecked by default 50 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Buttons Fields Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed Machine gun orders allowed Description Determines whether the user is allowed to cre ate DMA orders This option is checked by default Determines whether the user can configure the Machine Gun option on the X_TRADER Order Entry property tab If y
67. SE or Synthetic SE Gateway Login procedure above click Add Gateways and then select the appropriate Auto TT User Setup User Manual 321 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials spreader SE or Synthetic SE server Because risk is already configured for the Gateway to which Synthetic SE connects there is no need to set up risk for the Synthetic SE gateway login r ft New Gateway Login Gateway Login Info ia Pemissions Group SE1 Trader 001 Al Gateway SSE Set Password Alias V Enable SODs 5 Click Save 6 The newly created gateway login can be assigned to other traders as needed Creating TT SIM Credit Limits and Product Limits TT User Setup supports TT SIM mode trading using existing gateway logins and user profiles Gateway logins and user profiles are configured as usual with the following exceptions e Ifyou want the credit limit to be higher or lower for TT SIM trading you can set a different TT SIM credit limit for gateway logins and user profiles If you do not set a TT SIM credit limit then non TT SIM credit limits are used e If your existing product limits are configured with wildcards you must configure a new product limit that has a specific product type and product Users trading in TT SIM mode will not be able to see instruments with product limits that are configured with wildcards e Ifyou want the product limits to be different for TT SIM mode trad
68. Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 63 2 User Administration Fields Description Specifies miscellaneous user instructions Additional message text optional Includes the email recipients username in the Include username in message email Product Group Permissions Settings Administrators can allow or block access to product groups in supported markets For example an administrator can allow trading on ICE US Futures but prevent trading on ICE UK Futures Buttons Description Allows the user to access the selected product Allow group s Prevents the user from accessing the selected Block product group s The Product Groups data grid fields are Fields Description Specifies the product group that supports the Product Group allow block feature Specifies whether the user can access the Allowed product group You can also check or uncheck this option from within the table Market Specifies the product group s market TT User Login and Risk Administration Copying Users When copying a user you can choose to copy only Direct Trader gateway logins admin gateway logins TTORD gateway logins customer defaults and account defaults The available options depend on which settings are available in the user record being copied 64 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration This topic describes how to
69. Super Administrator 0 06 0 45 cccsc eee e ee ee en aeestaaeewnbenesanesaes 85 Creating a Group Administrator cds nn eese done OR MKLTER EE RRADRRES RASTER 86 Creating a Gateway Login Administrator 0 0 20 0 c eee eee eee nea 88 Creating a Password Administrator 0 0 00 seerne raer 89 Creatine a View Only User 25 44k 6 24dn gaits Ene NE EEN EEN EEEREN edb eee ERS 91 Creating a Collect Log Files Only User 0 0 0 0 nnana unane 92 Configuring the Outgoing Email Settings 0 00 eee eee ae 93 User Administration FIX Adapter 02 0s 95 TT FIX Adapter and TT User Setup Overview y c 5 cu234405bncsb etn dates hea encadeesd 95 Setting Up a TT FIX Adapter Server cas 304s es ae sc dask ees eeN eos ieee es vende es 96 Setting Up a FIX Adapter Client User 0 0 0 0 cette 100 Setting Up an Account Details os siios en disodadeeniotridettetedusadee eeeveaton 104 Assigning TT FIX Adapter Client s to a FIX Adapter Server 0000 0 ee 110 Allowing or Blocking Product Groups for a FIX Adapter User 00 005 112 User MaintenaNC naas cciiee cine ce edie eee Skee S cere wee eeer gees ines 113 How to Maintain USES euse sad eas bedehdadeed ei ae ted atweaea deliver bededeaatows 113 Resetting a User Password 0 4 ses 5pa0e awa eo HS wen em RRR KS ee A eR 113 Auto Generating and Emailing a User s Password 00 0 0 cece cece ene eens 114 Unlocking USErS 5 2 tcp ardeg oha taraia d
70. TT FIX Adapter server user CCOR Gateway Login Info Group Permissions Member TTORDAB Group i Trader MGR For a detailed description of the various types of logins used in a TT environment refer to the TT user Login and Risk Administration Reference Guide Click Add Gateways The Select Gateway window appears A TT FIX Adapter Server must be configured to connect to the TT Gateways from which the associated FIX Adapter client users will require fills Hold down the Ctrl key click CME Aand Eurex A gateway options and click Select On the New Gateway Login window click Save TT user Setup returns to the Gateway Login tab of the New User or Edit User window TT User Setup User Manual 311 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials p Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all Gateways Edit Remove Assign Existing Logins View E dit Product Limits 2 Trader 4 Gateway 4 AvailtoUser ExchTrader Accounts Addto Guardian Credit per MGT Member 4 Group filter x filter v filter filter v filter v filter v TTORDAB KAK MGR CME A No No TTORDAB KKH MGR Eurex A J filter filter v filter 7 Save and close the New User or Edit User window 8 Continue to the next section Creating TT FIX Adapter Client users Creating a TT FIX Adapte
71. TTORDIS 001 002 CME B CME TTORDIS 101 002 CME B CME TTORDIMF 001 001 eCBOT A 054001 054007 TTO 000 eCBOTA 054001 EUREX1 001 001 Eurex EUREX1 4 nm Total rows displayed 212 Rows selected 1 E Hide TT Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit Note You can sort by more than one column by clicking on each column s title When clicking for example on the Gateway Login window s Gateway column title the col umn sorts alphabetically 3 To sort in descending order click the column heading again 4 When sorting multiple columns click the lowest priority column first TT User Setup assigns the highest priority to the column clicked last You have successfully sorted by a column 34 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Sorting from the Sort Dialog Box Use the Sort dialog box to specify the sort criteria for multiple columns of any window that contains a grid gt To set the sort order from the Sort dialog box 1 Open a data grid window For example Gateway Logins 2 Right click in one of the columns and on the context menu select Specify sort criteria The Sort dialog box appears Select columns to sort by Column Exch Member Gateway Asc Exch Trader Member Asc Trader Enable SODs Users Assigned to Company Account s 3 Use the transfer buttons lt lt lt gt gt gt to select the columns to
72. Title Associated Windows Description ee on Logins tab oe The date of the most recent Login Window Product Lim Last Changed update to the applicable its Window Accounts Win TT User Setup data dow User GWL Attributes P Users GW Logins tab GW The login ID used to make Login Window Product Lim the most recent update to the Takt neneey By its Window Accounts Win applicable TT User Setup dow User GWL Attributes data The most recent time that a l l particular user has attempted Last Failed Login Attempt Users and failed to log into TT User Setup The most recent time that a Last Logged In Users particular user logged into TT User Setup finned Losin sce Limits the number of concur rent logins Indicates whether a user has surpassed defined limits for the number of times an incor Locked Out Users rect password is entered or the amount of time that has passed since the user s last login attempt Assign to Available Users 7 eine asa a ia Mandatory Login User GWL Attributes GW p 8 y ogn automatically logged into a Logins tab given gateway Margin Product Limits Window Arant reinen erolla eral on a position XT CD tab XT FA Account Defaults tab FA Account The exchange e g CME Defaults tab FA Account Market where the account is allowed Defaults XT Product Group fe rade Permissions tab Select Gate l way window Indicates whether each run Master Slave TT User Setup Servers ning server is a Master server or
73. To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 2 Check the Expanded Gateway Exchange Trader View option 132 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Each entry expanded into separate rows new Member 41 Group 2 Trader 4 Gateway 4 Alias Exch Member Exch Group Exch Trader Users filter w filter w filter w filter v filter w filter filter w filter v filter w filter CME2941 JSIMMS MFOO1Mike MFOO1Mike Total rows displayed 210 Rows selected 2 E Hide TTORDs T Hide Exchange Traders V Expanded Gateway Exchange Trader View Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit TT User Setup User Manual 133 Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics 134 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Creating Gateway Logins Creating a New Gateway Login Gateway logins are the MemberGroupTrader IDs used to log into TT Gateways You can assign unique account numbers and risk limits to each gateway login and you can assign multiple gateway logins to a single user To create a gateway login complete the following tasks Assigning the MemberGroupTrader ID on page 135 Disabling Start of Day Records on page 136 Assigning Gateways to Gateway Logins on page 137 for Exchange Trader IDs OR Map
74. Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration e X_ RISK Properties on page 57 e X STUDY FMDS on page 57 X_TRADER Properties The X_TRADER Properties tab has the following buttons Buttons Fields X_TRADER mode TT SIM login allowed Live non TT SIM login allowed Avoid orders that cross Description Determines whether X_TRADER starts up as X_TRADER or X_TRADER Pro Determines whether the user is allowed to log onto X_TRADER using TT SIM mode This option is checked by default Determines whether the user is allowed log onto X_TRADER using non TT SIM mode production This option is checked by default Determines whether the user can configure the Avoid orders that cross in X_TRADER If you leave the Avoid orders that cross option unchecked in TT User Setup which is the default the user can configure the Avoid orders that cross option in X_TRADER as needed If you check the Avoid orders that cross option the user cannot edit the Avoid orders that cross option You must also configure the default crossed order behavior Cancel rest ing or Reject new for the user Cancel rest ing sends a cancel request on the working order and places the new order Reject new rejects the new order TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 49 2 User Administration Buttons Fields Description Determines whether the user can configure the
75. User Defined 1 m a Z Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum User Defined 2 7 price on sell orders _ Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second User Defined 3 X User Defined 4 Bc Override credit for TT SIM TT SIM credit Unlimited User Defined 5 X User Defined 6 X View X_TRADER X_RISK fields v Save Save andAddNew E Ready 4 On the Main tab enter the following 1 2 3 4 Enter the X_ TRADER Login information This is the Username and Password the X TRADER user uses to log in Check the Active option to activate the user login Configure User Level Risk if needed Add Contact and User Defined Fields information if needed 5 From the X_TRADER X_RISK tab click the X_TRADER Properties tab and then select an X_TRADER mode 252 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Main Gateway Logins _TRADER _RFISK Product Group Permissions _TRADER Properties x TRADER Customer Defaults _AISK Properties _STUDY FMDS _TRADER mode x TRADER Pro w x TRADER x_TRADER Pro 6 Click Save 7 On the Gateway Logins tab click New The New Gateway Login window appears Note A gateway login consists in part of the MGT and corresponding gateways that a user logs into On the New Gateway Login window you can create the unique TTORD ID that John Doe will use when trading The steps belo
76. Users with mismatched Gateways Users with Direct Trader Logins that aren t fully compatible with some TTORD Order Books Order Books with mismatched Product Sync selection with automatic diagnostics OK 4 Select the diagnostic checks you want to run You can also match the Automatic Diagnostics set tings by clicking Sync selection with automatic diagnostics To set the Automatic Diagnostics refer to the Automatic Diagnostics on page 232 topic 5 Click OK Running Diagnostics Checks To run a diagnostic check 1 From the User Admin menu select Diagnostic Checks 2 To run the configured diagnostic checks click Run Refresh Diagnostic Checks 118 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 6 User Maintenance 3 To resolve an issue in the Diagnostics Checks window click on the blue highlighted text for the issue you want to resolve TT User Setup opens the window that is causing the error Click the blue highlighted text for the issue you wish to resolve 1 Gatewsy Log hes Gateway but no Product Luts for that Gateway 3IG119 ID IDL EUREXPF Diagnostic Checks Robes agt Check Corpse Gagrovic checks Missing Product Limits explan is 2 Gateway Log has Gateway Dut no Product Lemts for that Gateway EUREXDF 3 Gateway Logn has Gateway but no Product Lerts for that Gateway ASC 123 ASC 124
77. View Handling Cross Orders ID Ignore P amp L IP Address Associated Windows Users Selected Users GW Logins tab GW Login Prod uct Limits Accounts Account Groups User GWL Attributes Assign to Avail able Users User Groups FA Account Defaults FA tab User Groups Users Users Users Product Limits Window GW Logins tab GW Login Window TT User Setup Servers Envi ronment Server Status Description Gateway Login The unique Group ID used to identify an exchange trader or TTORD as part of their MGT User Identifies the group name for multiple exchange traders and or TTORDs and may reflect some aspect of those traders e g Energy Traders The group administrators assigned to a given group Determines if the user is allowed to enter Good Till Cancel and Good Till Date orders The user view that determines which fields are visible when creating or editing a user All X TRADER X RISK FIX Adapter Server FIX Adapter Client or TT User Setup Admin The default crossed order behavior A unique identifier of a prod uct limit that is reflected in the Audit Trail where it s used to distinguish product limit changes Determines if P amp L is used in margin credit and position calculations The IP Address of the machine where your server has been set up TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 335 19 Appendix Column
78. a gateway login Determines if group adminis trators can assign the gateway login directly to users without using a TTORD direct trad ers TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 331 19 Appendix Column Title Directional Price Range DMA Order Creation Edit Gateway Logins Email Exch Group Exch Member Exch Trader Exchange ID Exchange License EXE file Associated Windows Users Users Users Users GW Logins tab Gateway Logins User GWL Attributes GW Logins tab Gateway Logins User GWL Attributes GW Logins tab Gateway Logins User GWL Attributes Select Gateway Environment Server Status TT User Setup Servers Description When Price Controls are enabled this setting deter mines if the trader can only place buy and sell orders that are within the configured price band static or if the trader can place buy orders below the minimum price limit and above the maxi mum price limit directional Determines whether the user is allowed to create Direct Market Access DMA orders Identifies whether the admin istrator can manage gateway logins The email address used when generating a user s password The exchange trader s group ID mapped to the TTORD The exchange trader s mem ber ID mapped to the TTORD The exchange trader s trader ID mapped to the TTORD The Exchange ID listed in the AConfig file Monito
79. an individual user access the Gateway Logins tab on the Edit User window and check the Available to User checkbox To make the gateway available to multiple users access the User s Gateway Login Attributes window select the gateway s users click Edit and then check the Available to User checkbox Assigning Accounts You must assign one or more accounts to a gateway login in the following situations e The Add to Guardian risk feature is checked e You are creating a TTORD ID Note When entering orders a Trader using a TTORD must use one of the account numbers assigned to the TTORD TT recommends configuring the trader s customer defaults to help ensure that proper account numbers are used refer to Creating and Managing X TRADER Customer Defaults on page 73 for more information To assign an Account 1 From the Edit Gateway Login window click Assign Accounts The Assign Accounts to Exchange Trader ID window appears TT User Setup User Manual 141 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics ig Assign Accounts to TTORDJSO01001 Available Accounts Account l Description Account No Filter filter TT45678 002 002 1020304 1091982 1231232123 123533456 1877563 2 If accounts have already been created use the arrow buttons to transfer one or more accounts from the Available Accounts section to the Selected Accounts section Note Accounts are case sensitive
80. and then continue to the next procedure to apply X_RISK properties TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users Applying X_RISK Properties The X_RISK Properties determine whether to allow a user to use manual fill start of day record con tract session price and send message functionality in X_RISK 1 To apply X_RISK Properties From the X_TRADER X_RISK tab click the X_RISK Properties tab Gap New User babai Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK FIX Adapter TT User Setup Pemissions Outgoing Email Settings Product Group Pemissions X_TRADERS Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties x_STUDYS FMDS Contract Session Prices CSP access allowed Instant Messages IM access allowed Manual Fill MF access allowed Manual Fill MF access allowed Start of Day SOD access allowed Restrict X_RISK administrator to publishing MF SODs to Accounts within the User Groups listed below View Allfields gt Save and Add New Close Ready Note This feature works only with compatible versions of X_RISK 7 4 2 or later Check the desired options Refer to the X_RISK Help and the New User and Edit User Window Fields on page 41 topic for descriptions of each option Check the Contract Session Prices CSP access allowed Instant Messages IM access allowed Manual Fill MF access allowed and Start
81. can use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel Gateway Logins Window The options available from the Gateway Logins window context menu include Option New Function Accesses the New Gateway Login window which allows you to create a login by apply ing values such as Member Group and Trader ID TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 345 19 Appendix Option Function Accesses the Edit Gateway Login window Edit which allows you to change MGT gateway and account data Accesses the New Gateway Login window which allows you to create a gateway login Copy that has for example credit product limit and gateway information similar or identical to that of an existing gateway login Permanently removes the selected gateway Delete login Exports data to an HTML file which you can Export to HTML use to generate a report Exports data to a CSV file which you can use Export to CSV to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to Specify sort criteria determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns Show Hid
82. click the X_STUDY FMDS Settings tab X_STUDY FMDS Settings X_STUDY FMDS Allowed Primary FMDS Server IF address 192 168 123 123 Port 10200 Timeout secs 30 Secondary FMDS Server IP address Fort Cervice Timeout secs 3 Ensure the X_STUDY FMDS Allowed option is checked 234 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration 4 For the Primary FMDS Server section enter the IP address and Port of the FMDS Server You cannot save X_ STUDY FMDS settings unless the IP address field is populated 5 Inthe Service field type the service number The Service field is an additional qualifier used to differentiate multiple FMDS machines within a network This value must match the X_STUDY workstations Communications setting The default setting is 250 6 In the Timeout secs field type the number of seconds to wait to connect to each FMDS server Note Typically the default value can be used in the Port Service and Timeout fields 7 To set up a secondary FMDS server repeat steps 4 6 in the Secondary FMDS Server section 8 Click Save You have successfully configured your FMDS server s TT User Setup User Manual 235 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration 236 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Reports Displaying and Exporting Reports Use the Run Reports option to view reports of user s login a
83. copy a user record including the TTORD To copy an existing user record 1 Open a data grid window for example Users 2 Select the record that you want to copy and then click Copy You can also right click the record and select Copy from the context menu Locked Out Last Changed Last Change 42 Status Force Logoff filter Username 4 Display Name Group filter v filter No 2010 08 10 10 22 06 TISYSTEM 2012 09 07 15 58 50 TISYSTEM filter wv filter v filter v filter w filter v APOULOS Alexander Poulos Chicago Active No BSTEVENS Brian Stevens ABCTrading Active No CMARTINEZ Carlos Martinez Chicago 2010 09 17 11 37 26 TTSYSTEM m Total rows displayed 44 Rows selected 1 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit The Copy User Options window appears Any options that are not available for the currently selected user are disabled TT User Setup User Manual 65 Trading Technologies International Inc 66 2 User Administration Ea Copy User Options Copy Direct Trader Gateway Logins Copy Reuse TTORD Gateway Logins Reuse the same TTORDs Create anew TTORD and account with the same risk limits as TTORDJS 001 001 Member TTORDJS Group O01 Trader 002 A TTORD must have at least one account Account 1T111_bf Copy Customer Defaults The Copy User Options are as follows Copy Direct Trader Gateway Log
84. e Configure a maximum position limit of zero thereby limiting trading to spreads To add risk checking to an account group refer to the following topics e Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 e Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 180 Note To prevent a user from updating the account number on a fill make sure the Account changes on fills allowed option is unchecked the default setting for new users When applying account based risk checking TT does not recommend checking the Account changes on fills allowed option until the users are using X_TRADER 7 17 or later If users are not using X_TRADER 7 17 then account numbers on fills are not updated in all TT products this includes the gateways where account based risk checking is done This could lead to discrepancies between what is displayed in client applications and how risk is actually being calculated When the Account changes on fills allowed option is checked users who are using X_TRADER 7 17 or later can modify the account on a fill and this update will be processed as a part of account based risk on the gateways Note that no risk check actually takes place on the modification therefore changing the account could cause an account to go over its limits However any subsequent orders will be risk checked based on the modified fills To configure the Account changes on fills allowed option refer to the Appl
85. feature requires a specific X_TRADER 7 8 Trade Out allowed Determines whether the trader can exceed maximum order quan tity and or available credit limits to reduce risk for the specified contract 4 Click Save TT User Setup User Manual 169 Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration Note Use the Save and Add New functionality to add many similar limits The limit you created appears in the Product Limits section Defining Maximum Position The following describes the differences in maximum position depending on whether maximum position is related to a Future Option Spread or Strategy e Future Limits the maximum outright futures position to the value in the Maximum Position field In other words it limits the maximum position long or short that a trader may accumu late at the product level the sum total of all delivery months Traders that only trade calendar spreads for example will never reach this limit because their positions in one contract offset the positions in another contract e Spread A spread can be either an Intra Product spread e g all legs belong to the same prod uct or an Inter Product spread e g legs will belong to multiple products e Intra Product Spread Limits the maximum contract level position for each delivery month to the value in the Maximum Position field The Maximum Position field does not put a hard limit on the number of spreads that a trader may enter
86. files 22 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Option Reset Exchange Tree Currency Exchange Rates Add Remove Currencies Product Margins License Setup Migrate Users to New Gateway Function Resets the Guardian exchange tree for all Guardians in the environment This removes any exchanges and IP addresses where there are no running services Opens the Currency Exchange Rates win dow which allows you to edit the exchange rates listed in Guardian These exchange rates are used in P amp L and risk calculations Note If you use TT User Setup to edit the currency exchange rates do not edit currency rates with Guardian Opens the Currencies window which allows you to add currencies delete currencies and to set the primary currency Opens the Product Margins window which allows you to edit product margins for avail able products and publish the changes to Guardian Opens the License Setup window which allows you to view the current environment license file view other LMT files and to pub lish the license to Guardian Opens the Migrate Users to New Gateway window that allows you to migrate users to a new gateway based on how they are config ured for a current gateway You can select whether or not to copy the source gateway s Gateway Login FIX client and automatic and mandatory login settings e Use the Reports menu to access
87. filter Y filter X filter X filter v fi r Y filt Y filter v filte TTORDAB 001 001 CME A D54031 TEO 000 v abc001001 l kA TTORDAB 001 001 Eurex A D54032 TEO 001 v abc001001 kA 4 m r Total rows displayed 2 Rows selected 0 View FIX Adapter Client fields M AddNew Cose Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 3 On the New User or Edit User window click Save 4 Continue to the next section Assigning a TT FIX Adapter Server to a FIX Adapter Client user To assign the TT FIX Adapter Servers to which a FIX Adapter Client user can connect 1 On the New User or Edit User window click the FIX Adapter tab If a version requirement message appears click OK 316 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions FIX Adapter Account Defaults FIX Adapter role FIX Client v C Staged order creation allowed C Enable debug logging for orders client or server V Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed C Enable debug logging for prices Available FIX Adapters This FIX client user can connect to the following FIX Adapters Username 4 Display Name Group gt Username Display Name Group v filte v f Iter vi CCOR ClearCo Order Router Server FIX Adapter CCOR ClearCo Drop Copy Server FIX Adapter CCDC Versions with an asterisk indicat
88. is checked by default Add to Guardian W Risk check E Trading allowed E Ignore PAL Credit Unlimited Curency USD E Ovenide credit for TT SIM Unlimited 2 Enter or edit data in the Risk Check Credit Currency Trading allowed Ignore P amp L and Risk Check fields as needed If traders using this gateway login need to have a different credit limit for TT SIM trading check the Override credit for TT SIM checkbox and enter the TT SIM credit limit into the TT SIM credit field 3 Inthe Product Limits section click New Product Limit The New Product Limit window appears TT User Setup User Manual 143 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics VO New Product Limit ea Use Product Limit for TT SIM only Gateway Login TTORDJS 001 001 Margin Gateway Eurex X Additional margin 0 Product type FUTURE Maximum order qty 2000 Podid r pm Maximum position Unlimited Maximum long short Unlimited v Trade Out allowed Save and Add New Close Ready 4 If this product limit applies only to TT SIM trading check the Use Product Limit for TT SIM only checkbox When creating TT SIM product limits you must enter a specific Product you cannot enter a wildcard 5 Select an available Gateway and Product type enter an applicable Product set the Margin and Additional Margin set the Maximum order quantity Maximum position and Max imum long s
89. it only limits the position for each contract of a product Note To allow trading of spreads or strategies you must also configure product limits for the products that comprise the spreads or strategies Note The rules for configuring all other product types are identical to the rules for configuring futures and spreads except that limits for energy product are configured in lots Copying from existing product limits 170 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration To copy existing product limits to a gateway login 1 From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins 2 From the Gateway Logins window click the gateway login you want to edit and then click Edit Edit Gateway Login TTORDCD 001 001 econ mee Gateway Login Info Group Permissions Member TTORDCD Exchange Traders Remove Map to Exchange Traders Accounts Remove Assign Accounts Group 001 Gateway 41 Member 2 Group 4 Trader 44 Comment Account s 41 Description Trader 001 BTec AUUS LOW WABTT 1877563 CBOT A UM09 ZM3 CM3 CBOT B 8C222 LL3 JL3 Set Password CBOT E NDN37 Trg MT9 Alias CBOT G B5002 SVG GVG CME CM123 TT2 T2 V Enable SODs Eurex AZ44 BPS JPS 4 m gt Add to Guardian Product Limits New Product Limit Edit Copy Delete Corton Bese Gateway 41 ProductType 2 Product 42 TT SIM Only Margin Addl Margin Max Order Qty Max Position iW Risk Check filte
90. limits disable when Risk Check is unchecked If traders using this gateway login need a different credit limit for TT SIM trading check the Override credit for TT SIM and enter the TT SIM credit limit into the TT SIM credit field Click Save Note You must assign an account if either of the following is true The Add to Guardian option is checked or the Gateway Login is a TTORD and DisableProductLimitPublishingMode is on TT User Setup User Manual 167 Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration Creating Product Limits for Gateway Logins You set up and change product limits for specific gateway logins using the New Product Limit and Edit Product Limit windows You can access these windows through the Gateway Logins window the Gateway Logins tab on the Edit User window or by selecting Product Limits from the User Admin menu Note You can also create product limits per account or account group For more information refer to the Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 topic This section describes creating product limits from the Gateway Logins window To create a new product limit from the Gateway Logins window 1 From the Gateway Logins window select a gateway login and then click Edit 2 Inthe Product Limits section of the Gateway Login Info tab click New Product Limit Note To copy one of the product limits listed in the Product Limits table select the produ
91. lt All User Groups gt X_TRADER Must be Greater than or Equal to 7 9 4 0 Total rows displayed 2 Rows selected 0 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 2 Click New The New Version Rule window appears Lid New Version Rule Applies to Users X lt All Users gt x Application Select Operator Must be Greater than or Equal to z Version Or else Reject Login z Message Save and dd New Close 3 From the Applies To list select the user or user group to whom a rule applies or select All Users or All User Groups 4 From the Application list select the application to which you want the rules to apply 5 From the Operator list choose from the following e Must be between e Must be equal to e Must be greater than or equal to TT User Setup User Manual 211 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration e Must be less than or equal to 6 In the Version field input a version in the following format 1 1 1 1 Note If the selected application is managed by TT Update select a TT Client version from the drop down menu in the Version field 7 Inthe Or Else field select one of the following e Select Reject a Login if the user s login will be rejected with a message that indicates why the login is rejected Note If the selected application is managed by TT Update users will be required to upgrade or downg
92. needed use the Replace Account Numbers button to assign new account numbers to Main Gateway Logins _TRADER x_RISK Product Group Permissions X_TRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults _RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS Customer 42 Sel Market 4 ProductType 4 filter Replace Account Numbers Cog Product amp 4 Account Acct First lt DEFAULT gt Vi Restrict Eq filter v filter fi filter FUTURE DEFAULT OPTION the customer defaults Refer to Creating and Managing X_TRADER Customer Defaults on page 73 if needed The Gateway Login tab is populated with any copied gateway logins TT User Setup User Manual 67 Trading Technologies International Inc Main Gateway Logins x_TRADER x_RISK Product Group Permissions C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways Member filter ow al Trader amp 3 filter 17 Exch Member filter v Group amp 2 filter 4 Gateway 4 filter v TTORDJS 002 002 CME CM123 TTORDJS 002 002 CME A CME TTORDJS 002 002 Eurex AZ44 TTORDJS 002 002 Eurex D54032 TTORDJS 002 002 Eurex B D54048 TTORDJS 002 002 KE_IPE ICE012 Edit the gateway logins as needed TT2 001 BPS TEO TEB 001 Exch Gro filter 4 2 User Administration Exch Trader filter 1 TT2 AM filt
93. of Day SOD access allowed options to enable CSP IM MF and or SOD access in X_RISK as needed If Manual Fill MF access allowed or Start of Day SOD access allowed is checked you can check the Restrict X_RISK administrator to publishing option to restrict the administrator to publishing to accounts in specified user groups Click Save and then continue to the next topic Creating and Managing X_TRADER Customer Defaults on page 73 Creating and Managing X_ TRADER Customer Defaults This section describes the following Customer Defaults Overview on page 74 How Customer Defaults Appear in X_TRADER on page 74 Creating a Customer Default on page 75 Replacing an Account Number on page 77 TT User Setup User Manual 73 Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users Customer Defaults Overview Use the X_TRADER Customer Defaults window to create order templates X_TRADER applies to orders By providing X_TRADER users with customer defaults you limit the amount of data the trad ers have to enter to place a trade thereby making the trading process faster and easier for the traders You can create multiple customer default templates for each trader and you can prevent traders from changing their own customer defaults You can access the X_TRADER customer defaults from the X_TRADER user s X_TRADER X_RISK tab or by selecting X_TRADER Customer Defaults from the
94. of differences that exist between TT User Setup and Guardian data prior to publishing You can use the information provided to reconcile these dif ferences The Guardian User Setup Differences Details window consists of three panes one providing specific account and gateway login information another showing gateway and exchange trader data and a third illustrating established product limits The image below shows how differences are displayed and describes some sample differences ID TTORDFA 001 001 Data User Setup 002 USD False On False e Guardian 002 Exchange Traders Gateway Member Group Trader CME CME 001 001 The highlighted row indicates that the ID 7 TTORDFA 001 he Setup CMEA CME 001 001 001 is mapped to uardian CME CME 00 exchange trader trader is mapped Product Limits Data 2000 0 True User Setup CMEA ig FUTURE 0 t t 2000 0 CMEA 0 Guardian True To access the Differences Details window From the File menu select Publish to Guardian Or On the toolbar click the Publish to Guardian icon Accounts Credit Currency Allow Trading Risk Check Ignore P amp L Alias hii P The highlighted Credit column indicates that the same ID TTORDFA 001 001 is assigned a different credit limit in TT User Setup and Guardian The middle pane specifies the Gateway Logi
95. one or more exchange traders MGTs from the Available Exchange Traders sec tion to the Selected Exchange Traders section and then click Done Note If the exchange trader does not exist click Create to create it After you save the new exchange trader it is automatically added to the Selected Exchange Traders sec tion For more information refer to the Mapping a TTORD to an Exchange Trader on page 138 topic 3 When prompted to change the TTORD to use the new exchange trader MGT click Yes to configure the TTORD to use the new exchange trader MGT or click No to configure the TTORD to use the original exchange trader MGT TT User Setup If aTTORDis already mapped to a Gateway you selected with a different Exchange Trader MGT do you want to change the TTORD to use the new Exchange Trader MGT 4 Ifyou did not select TTORDs 1 From the Select Gateway window select one or more gateways and then click Select For more information refer to the Assigning Gateways to Gateway Logins on page 137 topic Note If you add a new market to the TT User Setup environment you must restart the TT User Setup server before the new market is available from the Select Gateway win dow 2 When prompted to assign new gateways to users that are assigned one of the selected MGTs click Yesto assign the user s to the new gateway click No if you do not want to assign the user to the new gateway TT User Setup 2 J If aMember
96. orders with undefined accounts allowed if applicable Description Determines if this user has a different credit limit for TT SIM trading Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited When Override credit for TT SIM is checked the user s credit limit while trading on TT SIM is set to the value in the TT SIM credit field If Override credit for TT SIM is not checked the user s credit limit applies to both TT SIM and non TT SIM trading Determines if orders submitted by this user will be rejected if they are sent with an account that is not defined in TT User Setup When Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed is checked the user can submit an order with any account number unless restricted by customer defaults or their TTORD If Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed is not checked then TT Gateways will reject orders from this user that are sent with an account that is not defined in TT User Setup TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 45 2 User Administration Fields Description Determines if this user should be allowed to update the account number on a fill When Account changes on fills allowed is checked the user can change the account number on a fill If the users customer defaults are restricted then only accounts that are pre defined in the customer defaults are available Note When applying account based risk checking TT does not r
97. server applications that the customer has paid to use Most TT software except TT s Guardian applica tion requires license files These license files are as follows e TTLICENSE LMT referred to as the LMT file This file is the actual license file that must be loaded into the TT trading environment in order to run TT software Only one LMT file con trols the entire TT system However this file must be updated whenever the customer installs new products or renews his license with TT TT encrypts this license file All licenses in the LMT file include an expiration date after which you can no longer use the software e TT1300SW dll The dll file contains the keys used to decrypt the TTLICENSE LMT file Customers must review and renew their licenses on a quarterly basis You can use TT User Setup to monitor the number of licensed applications and their associated IP addresses that are logged into the system and to load license files This functionality was previously provided only by Guardian This topic contains the following sections Viewing Licenses p To view a TT license 1 Log onto TT User Setup as a Super Administrator 2 From the Server Admin menu select License Setup The License Setup window appears TT User Setup User Manual 219 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration TT Product v filter TT_FIX_ADAPTER TT_FIX_ADAPTER X_TRADER X_TRADER X_TRADER X_RISK_PLUS X_TRADER Qt
98. unlimited credit Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited In the Currency field enter the currency of the configured credit limit To risk check this user using the P amp L risk algorithm check the Use P amp L risk algorithm option This also sets the P L based on setting in X_TRADER to Risk Algorithm and makes the P L based on setting unedtable To use the Last Traded Price for risk checking uncheck the Use P amp L risk algorithm option the P L based on setting in X_ TRADER remains editable To configure how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks check the Pre vent orders that are more than X ticks checkbox and enter the number of ticks from 1 to 100000 If you only want to enforce this setting for buy orders above the limit and sell orders below the market check the Only enforce checkbox For more information about pre trade price controls refer to Setting Pre Trade Price Controls on page 187 To prevent more than a specific number of orders per second check the Per TT Gateway pre vent more than X orders checkbox and enter the number of orders per second For more information about pre trade order throughput controls refer to Setting Order Throughput Con trols on page 191 If the user needs a different credit limit for TT SIM trading check Override credit for TT SIM and enter the TT SIM credit limit into the TT SIM credit field Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited 10 Click Save
99. user AB MIKE uses the TTORDAB 002 001 MGT Because none of these MGTs have been created you must add new gateway log ins 1 Click New to open the New Gateway login where you can enter gateway login informa tion as follows Gateway Login Into Group Permissions Member TTORDAB Group Trader 001 Gateway Login Info Group Permissions Member TTORDAB Gra Trader 002 Gateway Login Info Group Permissions Member TTORDAB Group Trader O01 314 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials After creating one gateway login you can use the Save and Add New button on the New Gateway Login window or the Copy button on the Gateway Logins window to quickly create another similar gateway login Because AB BOB and AB BILL use the same Member and Group they will share an order book For a detailed description of the various types of logins used in a TT environment refer to the TT user Login and Risk Administration Reference Guide 2 Click Map to Exchange Traders to open the Map Exchange Traders to window where you can select the CME A and Eurex A Exchange traders 3 Use the transfer arrow buttons gt lt gt gt lt lt to move the CME A and Eurex A Exchange Traders from the Available Exchange Traders table to the Selected Exchange Traders table If the exchange traders do not exist click Create and create them Selected Exchange Tr
100. values as needed e To use the value in TT User Setup click Use this margin for the TT User Setup row Or if you want to use the value in TT User Setup for all conflicts in this market click Use TT User Setup value to resolve all lt gateway gt conflicts e To use the value in Guardian click Use this margin for the Guardian row Or if you want to use the value in TT User Setup for all conflicts in this market click Use Guard ian value to resolve all lt gateway gt conflicts Example In the above example the CONF FDAX and other products have different margins on EUREX EUREX A and EUREX B To resolve the conflicts you could select the appropri ate Use this margin for each product Alternatively if you always want to use the EUREX B margin you could select Use Guardian Eurex B margin values to resolve all Eurex conflicts just once To undo changes click Undo or Undo All When you are finished resolving conflicts click Done TT User Setup returns to the Product Margins window Click Save and Publish Note Although the Guardian product tables are updated the Guardian GUI on the TT User Setup Server will not display the new settings from TT User Setup until the Guardian service is restarted TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Viewing and Publishing Licenses TT licenses and bills its products using license files which define the number and type of TT client and
101. want to edit You can also press the Shift key _ _ Gah Users Sse New User View X_TRADER X_RISK fields v Edit Copy Delete Refresh Username 41 Display Name Group 42 Status Force Logoff Locked Out Last Changed Last Change filter filter v filter wv filter filter v filter v filter v filter AMURPHY Alan Murphy ABCTrading Active No 2012 09 07 15 58 50 TISYSTEM EE en E APOULOS Alexander Poulos a a Ce TTISYSTEM BSTEVENS Brian Stevens ABCTrading Active 2012 09 07 15 58 50 TISYSTEM CMARTINEZ Carlos Martinez Chicago Active 2010 09 17 11 37 26 TISYSTEM CROBINSON Christian Robinson Sydney ce 2010 09 17 10 34 24 TTSYSTEM DMILLER David Miller Chicago Active 2010 09 17 15 37 19 TISYSTEM m j Total rows displayed 44 Rows selected 4 7 Show inactive users Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 3 Click Edit 4 On the edit multiple logins warning message click OK A window appears that allows you to edit all the selected records In this example the Edit Multiple Users window appears This window contains the most commonly mass edited fields TT User Setup User Manual 29 Trading Technologies International Inc Main All User Properties X_STUDY FMDS E Password never expires E Limit the number of concurrent logins based on IP address 1 E Force logoff Last logged in
102. whenever the user s status has changed to locked You can unlock users from the Edit User window Note The Locked Out column on the Users window lists all the locked out users in your trading envi ronment p To set password locking rules 1 From the Server Admin menu select System Settings The System Settings window appears and defaults to the General tab Failed Login Rules C Automatically lock out users due to failed attempts or inactivity C Apply an additional failed login message to users 2 Check the Automatically lock out users due to failed attempts or inactivity option 228 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration 3 Inthe Number of failed login attempts before user status is set to LOCKED field select a number between 1 and 100 to designate how many incorrect passwords a user can enter before the user s status is set to locked Note The default value is 3 4 In the Days of inactivity allowed before user status is set to LOCKED field select a number between and 100 to designate the number of days of inactivity before a user s status is set to locked Note The default value is 30 5 Click Save You have successfully set password locking rules Customizing the Failed Login Attempt Message Ifa user login fails TT User setup prompts the user with a standard message From the Failed Login Rules section in the System Settings window you
103. words window To create a Password Administrator 1 From the User Admin menu select Users Set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields 3 Click New Note To give an existing user administrative privileges select the user from the Users window and click Edit You can then change the View to TT User Setup Admin fields 4 On the Main tab edit any Login Contact or User Defined fields as needed Click the TT User Setup Permissions tab 6 Select the Password Administrator option Nn TT User Setup User Manual 89 Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users Main TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access Group Administrator Can only manage the User Groups listed below Able to manage Gateway Logins Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins If unchecked can only create and edit TTORDSs Gateway Login Administrator Restrict Gateway Login Administrator to User Groups listed below Password Administrator Can only reset user passwords and unlock users Restrict Password Admin to User Groups listed below 7 To allow this administrator to manage all passwords in all available user groups uncheck the Restrict Password Admin to User Groups listed below option 8 To restrict this administrator to managing specific user groups check the Restrict Passw
104. you uncheck this option Group Administrators can only map the gateway login to a TTORD to use it indirectly Customizing the Gateway Logins Window The Gateway Logins window displays a list of Member Group and Trader IDs MGTs and associated gateways You assign users to these gateway logins which allows the user to log into TT applications such as X_TRADER with their user names and passwords The MGTs displayed can include direct trader logins TTORD logins and administrator logins To display gateway logins From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins The Gateway Logins window appears Gateway Logins Scan New Edt Copy Delete Refresh Add Gateways Exchange Traders Assign to Users Member 1 Group 2 Trader 4 Gateway 4 Alias Exch Member Exch Group Exch Trader Users Account s s filter v filter w filter v filter v filter filter v filter v filter v filter w filte ABC cD1 001 CME A ABC cD1 001 ABC cD1 002 CME A ABC cD1 002 ABC MGR VIEW ICE_IPE ABC MGR VIEW ABCCD EUREXPF A ABCCD a Total rows displayed 212 Rows selected 1 Hide TTORDs Hide Exchange Traders V Expanded Gateway Exchange Trader View Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit Note Use the Refresh button to refresh your window if the data becomes stale The Refresh feature is useful when for example multiple administrators are upda
105. 002 CME D54031 TEO 000 TTORDAB 001 002 Eurex 4 D54032 TEO 001 lt Total rows displayed 2 Rows selected 0 a T N E a O T ae 8 Click the FIX Adapter tab TT User Setup User Manual 103 Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions P Fl Adapter Account Defaults FIX Adapter role Client v C Staged order creation allowed C Enable de client or server Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed C Enable Available Fl Adapters This FIX client user can connect to the following Username 4 Display Name Group Username 4 Display Name filter v filter v filter v ccpc ClearCo Drop Copy Server CCOR ClearCo Order Router Server FIX Adapter CCOR Versions with an asterisk indicate a planned future release Future releases are subject to change Check the product s release notes for detail 9 Configure the Staged order routing settings as needed These settings are valid only when this FIX client connects to an order routing TT FIX Adapter server 1 To allow the user to create staged orders check the Staged order creation allowed option 2 To allow the user to create DMA orders check the Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed option 10 Click Save You have successfully set up a FIX Adapter client user After completing the Setting Up a TT FIX Adapter
106. 18 172 31 100 19 Chicago Chicago Chicago Chicago Ready 244 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports e Use the By Product License tab to determine how many licenses are available for each product J Legged in Users ae t fem By User By Gateway Connection By Product License Product Name l Licenses in License File Licenses Remaining filter v filter v filter _RISK X_TRADER X_TRADER Pro Total rows displayed 3 Ready e Use the By Product License Number of Markets tab to determine how many licenses are available for each license type For example you may have five 5 license X TRADER licenses and one 1 license X_TRADER license available I Logged in Users By User By Gateway Connection By Product License By Product License Number of Markets Product Name Yi Number of Markets 42 Licenses in License File Licenses Remaining Comments r P filter Vv filter filter filter v X_TRADER Pro All E 8 X_TRADER 8 5 X_TRADER 6 X_TRADER 1 X_TRADER Total rows displayed 5 Ready You have successfully viewed the connected users TT User Setup User Manual 245 Trading Technologies International Inc Viewing Server Messages 17 Reports The TT User Setup Server Master or Slave frequently updates its local database with the
107. 6 lt mi Total rows displayed 44 Rows selected 1 APOULOS Alexander Poulos Chicago Active No No Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 2 Highlight the row for BTAYLOR and click Copy The Copy User Options window appears Any options that are not available for the currently selected user are disabled For example BTAYLOR does not have any direct trader or admin gateway logins TT User Setup User Manual 270 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials T Copy User Options Copy Direct Trader Gateway Logins Copy Reuse TTORD Gateway Logins Reuse the same TTORD s Create anew TTORD and account with the same risk limits as TTORDJS 001 001 Member TTORDJS Group O01 Trader 002 A TTORD must have at least one account Account 1T111_bf Copy Customer Defaults 3 For this tutorial select the following options e Select Copy TTORD Gateway Logins e Select Create anew TTORD to copy TTORD Gateway Logins as a new TTORD e Enter a new Member TTORDJS Group 001 and Trader 002 Because Matt has the same Member and Group as Brenda they will share an order book e Enter an account number of TT111_b This is mandatory for TTORDs and must be an account that doesn t exist or is currently not assigned to another Gateway Login e Select Copy Customer Defaults 4 Click Continue Copy TT User Setup User Manual 271 Trading Technologies In
108. 743 ABC TTORDAB ABROWN ABC_AB ABC Alfred Brown ABC_BT ABC TTORDBT ABC BTAYLOR ABC Brenda Taylor JDOE ABC John Doe TT_TRADER44 ICE ACCOUNT Total rows displayed 91 Rows selected 1 Ready 2 From the Accounts window click New TT User Setup User Manual 154 Trading Technologies International Inc 9 Account Administration Overview TE New Account Ce S Account Info Group Pemissions Margin Limits Account Name Gateway 4 Enabled Currency Margin Limit v ilter w filter v filte v Account Description aG BTec usor 0 Apply product limits V Allow trading BTec A luso v 0 BTec B o uso jy 0 BTec C uso X 0 BTec D luso ol T O o E Show only configured or visible gateways Product Limits New Edit Copy Delete Gateway 41 ProductType 42 Product 42 Margin Addi Margin Max Order Qty Max Position LastChanged Last Chang MaxLong Short Creat filter v filter v filter filter w filter v filter v filte v filter v filter v filter v filter Account risk checking is only available in 7 16 8 gateways or later Save and Add New l Close Ready 3 Inthe New Account window enter the new account name into the Account name field and a description into the Account description field 4 Configure the product limits as described in the Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 topic When you
109. 8 TMXG10800ZE5 2222 4C4002 Admin DIRECT California ETIS PR_N_S_P_NS TMXG20800ZD8 TTGXVACA001 DIRECT MX_NO_SHARE TTG Chicago ETI13 ETI4 NO_SHARE TMXG20800ZD8 TRAXVSIMO01 123456789012 12345678901 London ETIS PR_DILSHARE PR_DIRECT TMXG10800Z48 TTGXYTSTO01 123456789012 12345678901 4 mw p Total rows displayed 4 Rows selected 0 Ready Note You can also access the User Groups window by clicking Select Group on the Edit User window 2 From the User Groups window click New TT User Setup User Manual 197 Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration Mew User Group Mame E Order passing 3 In the New User Group window enter the new user group name into the Name field 4 Click Order passing The Order passing fields appear in the New User Group window New User Group fo oo Name Singapore Z Order passing J Show account on passed orders All User Groups Can only pass orders to the checked User Groups lt General gt California Chicago London Clear All Save Close Ready 5 Click an available User Group to pass orders with the new User Group 198 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration Select as many User Groups as necessary Click All User Groups to select all the available groups The Show account on passed orders option is checked by def
110. AD MXXX100 or TTORDTSXXXMGR must have Trading Allowed option checked to delete orders even though they are unable to trade 2 To use the P amp L risk algorithm to risk check this user check the Use P amp L risk algo rithm option the P L based on setting in X_TRADER defaults to Risk Algorithm and is uneditable To use the Last Traded Price for risk checking uncheck the Use P amp L risk algorithm option the P L based on setting in X_TRADER remains editable 3 To configure how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks check the Prevent orders that are more than X ticks checkbox and enter the number of ticks If you only want to enforce this setting for buy orders above the limit and sell orders below the market check the Only enforce checkbox For more information about pre trade price controls refer to Setting Pre Trade Price Controls on page 187 4 To prevent more than a specific number of orders per second check the Per TT Gate way prevent more than checkbox and enter the number of orders per second For more information about pre trade order throughput controls refer to Setting Order Throughput Controls on page 191 5 To seta different user profile credit limit for TT SIM trading check the Override credit for TT SIM checkbox and then enter a new credit limit in the TT SIM credit field Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited TT User Setup User Manual 71 Trading Technologies Internatio
111. Account or Account Group The Select Account or Account Group window appears m Select Account or Account Group Please select an account or account group to continue Cancel 5 Select an account or account group or click New to create a new account or account group The selected product limits are assigned to the applicable account account group Copying Account Based Product Limits to Additional Gateways You can copy one or more account account group based product limits to additional gateways To copy product limits to additional Gateway Logins 1 From the User Admin menu select Product Limits The Product Limits window appears 182 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration 2 Select the Account Account Group Limits tab 3 Highlight one or more product limit rows Account Account Group Limits Account Group Account Gateway 41 ProdType Product 7 TT SIM Only Margin AddiMrgn MaxOrdQty Ma filter v filter NoFilter filter v filter w filter filter v filter filter v flte Total rows displayed 7 Rows selected 4 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 4 Click Mass Copy to Other Gateway The Select Gateway window appears 5 Highlight a gateway to which the product limits will be copied and then click Select TT User Setup copies
112. Adapter server uses to log into the TT Gateways TT FIX Adapter server logs into each TT Gateway once and acts on behalf of all FIX Adapter client users Note The TT FIX Adapter Server must be able to connect to the Gateways to which a related FIX Client is able to connect and it must be able to view the orders and fills of any FIX Client connect ing to the FIX Adapter For a detailed description of the various types of logins used in a TT environment refer to the TT User Login and Risk Administration Reference Guide p To set up a TT FIX Adapter Server 1 From the TT User Setup Control Panel open the User Admin menu and click Users The Users window appears 2 From the New User View list select FIX Adapter Server fields New User View FIX Adapter Server fields 89 gt 3 Click New The New User window appears TT User Setup User Manual 97 Trading Technologies International Inc 98 Main Gateway Logins I Fix Adapter Product Group Permissions 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users 4 On the Main tab enter the FIX Adapter Server s Login Contact information and User Defined fields as needed The Username and Display fields are typically the name of the FIX Adapter Server The Password is the password that TT User Setup uses to authenticate the FIX Adapter Server after startup For detailed descriptions of the remaining fields refer to the New User and Edit User Window Fields on page 41 topic
113. Admin window select Account Groups to manage product limits for an account group 2 From the Account Groups window create or edit an account group If you have assigned accounts to an account group you can also edit that group by selecting any assigned account in the Accounts window and clicking Edit Account Group The Account Group window appears E Edit Account Group Group1 B Account Group Info Associated Accounts Margin Limits 1020304 Group Name Group1 1091982 Gateway 1 Enabled Currency Margin Limit Group Description Group1 nite bil a uar likan hd 5 BTec Apply product limits v Allow trading BTec A Blec B BTec C BTec D Product Limits Edit Copy Delete Gateway 41 ProductType 4 Product 42 TT SIM Only Margin Addl Margin Addl Margin Max Order Qt Max Order Qty Max Position On Max Position Max Long v filte v filte v filte v filter v filte filte filter v filte v filter v filte v filte BTec FUTURE No No 0 No 0 No 0 No 4 w Add New Close Ready 3 Inthe Product Limits section click New Note To copy one of the product limits listed in the Product Limits table select the product limit and then click Copy TT User Setup User Manual 177 Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration The New Product Limit window appears Q New Product Limit Account group Group 1 Margin
114. Assume there are multiple users in your system placing orders for a customer DMiller and that the account number associated with DMiller is 1091982 In this tutorial you will learn to update the default account number being used by several of your users when entering orders for DMILLER gt To simultaneously update the account number being used by several users 1 From the User Admin menu select X_TRADER Customer Defaults The Customer Defaults window appears Note All customer default rows with lt DEFAULT gt as the Customer are displayed with a blue background 2 Filter the Customer column by DMILLER G Customer Defaults Soe x Username DisplayName Group User Status Customer 4 Sel Market 4 Gatew ProductType Product filter filter v filter v filter v dmiller v v filter filter filter AMURPHY Alan Murphy Chicago DMILLER t ANOWAK Adam Nowak Chicago i DMILLER DMILLER David Miller Chicago DMILLER LANGELICO Linda Angelico Chicago i DMILLER m Total rows displayed 4 Rows selected 0 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit _ 3 Highlight all the rows with DMILLER in the Customer field 4 Click Edit Note If an edit warning message appears click OK to proceed The Edit Multiple Customer Defaults window appears 282 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Selected Usemame values dife
115. CVD ADL Autotrader TT Trainer Back Office Bridge TTNET All other referenced companies individuals and trademarks retain their rights All trademarks are the property of their respective owners The unauthorized use of any trademark displayed in this document is strictly prohibited Copyright 2004 2014 Trading Technologies International Inc All rights reserved Table of Contents User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users 2 022 22 ee eee ee eee 69 Creating and Editing X_TRADER or X_RISK Users 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 69 Applying Basic User Properties oa 4c oh Se eaen en ea tad eyed eee deeded Meee ee 69 Applying X TRADER Properties occ cicdsad x caasine se tan de dees dace taped awewanes 72 Applying X RISK Propenies o cesrsesedcrrses oes dee da uuega EEE ekaa E E Ben 73 Creating and Managing X_TRADER Customer Defaults 0 00 00 e ee eee 73 Configuring X STUDY ond PMDS 2 2sccccksetbeesteeeeee thee ead R r EEN Eek 80 Creating a New Gateway Login through the Users Window 0000s eee eee 82 Generating a Gateway Login for all Gateways 2 0 cece teens 83 Assigning Gateway Logins to a User Through the Users Window 0 5 83 Allowing or Blocking Product Groups 0 0 0 000 ccc cnn eee eens 84 User Administration Administrative Users 0 000 eee 85 Creating and Editing Administrative Users 00 0 cece cee eee eee nee 85 Creating a
116. Client Logins to fail gt To run the Diagnostic Check 1 From the TT User Setup Control Panel open the User Admin menu and click Diagnostic Checks The Diagnostic Checks window appears 2 Click Configure diagnostic checks 3 From the Configure Diagnostics window check any FIX Adapter related options L M and N and then click OK 306 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials ID Diagnostic Name Enabled Runs Category v filter filter w filte w filter v filter v Gateway Logins missing Accounts Yes Gateway Logins Explain Missing Product Limits l Yes Gateway Logins Explain Order Books with mismatched Credit Currency Yes Order Book Explain Order Books with mismatched Product Limits r Yes Order Book Explain TTORDs mapped to invalid Exchange Traders Yes Gateway Logins Explain j Gateway Logins missing passwords Yes Gateway Logins Explain in Users with Customer Default Markets s missing gi Yes Gateway Logins corresponding Gateway Login Markets Users with TTORD Accounts missing Yes Gateway Logins corresponding Customer Default Accounts _ J Users with Customer Default Accounts missing Gateway L Logins from User s TTORDs Accounts improperly shared between unrelated Gateway Logins Order Books Users with multiple available to user flags Logins checked fo
117. Clients 296 Creating TT FIX Adapter Servers s244iuvudsadandogetesavdbetdenanddabwaalhas 297 Creating TT FIX Adapter Client Users 0 cece eee eee eens 301 How to Set Up an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter Server and Corresponding FIX Adapter Clients 308 Creating TT FIX Adapter Servers 24 cesdee ieee ees bake eke ekesatesn cneeiee 308 Creating TT FIX Adapter Client users 4 444a0s lt diveeeos sas enasd e540 esaes ea dud 312 How to Set up a User for Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE 00 00 00 000 319 Creating TT SIM Credit Limits and Product Limits 0 0 0 e ce eee eee eee 322 Allowing a User to Log onto X_ TRADER using TT SIM mode 322 Configuring TT SIM Credit Limits 424202445 ecandadteeaweteddekeeh es eeeaeks 323 Configuring TT SIM Product Limits s ananuna nanea 324 PN oTo D A e E E E E E E A E E E E TEE 327 Field Descriptions seers cerier ye Gx EE EREE RN E A es OR ee 327 TT User Setup User Manual vii Trading Technologies International Inc 1 TT Gateway and the Exchange Context Men s iaie ch keh thas Re EEEE ened Rear nndeaewanndt dada Wee 344 Us rs WIMIOW any cay didn ae dwae o oa ee dE eae ha aR dee dae se 344 Gateway Logins Window ic sendasauebaeaees wea dh bare et eiae Heate ta aes 345 Product Limits WINdOW 2440444 4 4cdaa nbd en di e 4 04 He EE RSE ARR E 346 X_TRADER Customer Defaults Window 0 00 eens 347 Product Group Permissions Window 00 cece c
118. Credit for Sim TT SIM Credit per MGT Last Changed Last Changed By Created Date 1S In the Visible Columns section click the column you want to hide 4 Click the lt transfer button to move the visible column to the Hidden Columns section Note You can transfer all columns by clicking the lt lt transfer button 5 Use the Move Up Move Down and Move to Top buttons to arrange the columns in the order you prefer Note Use the Restore Default Column Order button to revert to the original column order 6 Click Close 36 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Generating an HTML or CSV Report from any Window Right click in any data grid window to display a context menu that allows you to export to HTML and CSV files These options allow you to view data in either an Internet browser or a spreadsheet applica tion to generate a report or to save that data for future viewing The content of the report depends on the sorting or filtering currently applied The following procedure describes generating an HTML or CSV report from the Users window be To generate an HTML or CSV report from the Users window 1 Open an applicable TT User Setup window e g the Users window 2 Right click anywhere in the grid display The context menu appears 3 Click either the Export to HTML or Export to CSV option The Windows Save As dialog box appears Note Any fi
119. Customer 42 Sel Market 4 Gateway Product amp 4 ProductType 45 Account Acct Give Up FFT2 FETA CD Er filter v filter S filter S filter S filter filter A fi W filter 9 filter filter DEFAULT Al Total rows displayed 1 Rows selected 0 C Restrict user from editing their local customer defaults View X_TRADER X_RISK fields jave AddNew Close Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 5 Click New The New Customer Default window appears 280 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Ee New Customer Default Selected Lsemame BTAYLOR Customer Gateway FO Product Account tecate Give up FFT2 FFTS 6 Inthe Customer field enter a unique identifier e g CUST1 7 Enter additional data in the applicable fields as needed 8 Check the Selected option to enable the customer default 9 Click Save and Add New 10 Repeat Steps 6 9 until multiple Customers have been created 11 Click Save You have successfully set up customer default records for multiple customers How to Update Customer Defaults Across Multiple Users Simul taneously TT User Setup User Manual 281 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials
120. DER 7 9 0 X_ RISK 7 5 X_TRADER API 7 7 0 TT API 7 2 0 and ICE Gateway 7 14 1 ICE Compliance Reports Added the ICE Compliance report to the Reports menu renamed to Ice Product Group Report in 7 4 1 The report lists users with ICE credentials exchange trader MGTs users with blocked ICE product groups ICE live Gateways ICE Gateway con nections and the versions of recently used TT products Administrators generate and send the report to ICE to show that only the allowed users can access market data for the specified prod uct groups For more information refer to the Generating an ICE Product Groups Report topic TT API allowed Added the TT API allowed option to the user settings Check this option to give the user permission to access the TT API TT API allowed is unchecked by default and is only applicable to TTNET customers Staged order and DMA order permissions Added staged order and Direct Market Access DMA order settings for X_TRADER and FIX Adapter client users Administrators can allow or prevent staged order creation staged order management and DMA order creation Staged order and DMA order permissions are compatible with X_TRADER 7 9 FIX Adapter 7 7 and Synthetic SE 7 2 For more information refer to the New User and Edit User Window Fields and FIX Adapter client role tab descriptions in the New User and Edit User Window Fields topic TT User Setup User Manual 11 Trading Technologies International
121. Edit Note When creating a user select a specific view from the New User View drop down list The view determines which tabs are on the New User window For more information about this fea ture refer to the Using Views topic 2 Do one of the following e Click New e Right click the data grid and then click New e Select a user and then click Copy or right click a user and select Copy from the context menu Refer to the Copying a Record topic if needed The New User window appears with the Main tab selected Copying a Record Copied records are pre filled with most or all of the data from the original You must change one or more values to make the record unique When copying a user you have the option to copy Direct Trader gateway logins Admin gateway logins TTORD gateway logins customer defaults and account defaults You copy gateway logins product lim its customer defaults and account defaults and you can also copy product limits from one gateway or gateway login to another To copy a gateway login product limit customer default or account default record 1 Open a data grid window For example Gateway Logins 2 Select the record that you want to copy and click Copy You can also right click the record and select Copy from the context menu 26 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started 3 Click Copy 4 Enter or change any fields as needed and then click
122. FIX Adapter Order Books with Users with mismatched Gateways Yes Order Book Users with Direct Trader Logins that aren t fully compatible with some TTORD Order Books Yes Order Book Select All Order Books with mismatched Product Unselect All Yes Order Book Sync selection with automatic diagnostics OK 4 From the Diagnostics Checks window click the Run Refresh Diagnostic Checks button Any issues will be listed by issue type and will includes a summary of the issue For a detailed explanation of an issue type click explain this A Resolve any issues discovered through the diagnostic check 6 To run other diagnostic checks re open the Configure Diagnostics window and select your typ ical diagnostic checks or click Sync selection with automatic diagnostics to select only the checks that are configured to run automatically After the diagnostic checks are selected click OK and then click Run Refresh Diagnostic Checks When all the issues are resolved you are finished with this tutorial 318 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials How to Set up a User for Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Configuring a user to use Autospreader SE and Synthetic SE servers is almost identical to configuring a user to trade on any other TT Gateway e Ifa trader logs into all TT Gateways with the same TTORD gateway login you can map t
123. FT3 TIF Type filter v ly filter x filter 0 filter x filter filter v Als filter v filter x filter v Y filter s DEFAULT M FUTURE ACT11 Al Limit wear elon Joes fen a M a O o DEFAULT M CME CME B FUTURE ACT333 Ad GTD Limit DEFAULT E NYSE_Liffe FUTURE ACT555 Al GTD Limit Total rows displayed 6 Rows selected 1 C Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults View X_TRADER X_RISK fields zj Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 11 On the Edit User window click Save TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 279 18 Tutorials You have successfully set up customer default records Example 2 Set up unique customer defaults for a broker who trades for several customers To set up unique customer defaults for a broker who trades for several customers 1 From the User Admin menu select Users The Users window appears 2 Highlight the row of the user for whom you want to create customer defaults 3 Click Edit The Edit User window appears 4 From the X_TRADER X_RISK tab click the X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab oar AY O dit Use Main Gateway Logins _TRADER _RISK Product Group Permissions _TRADER Properties _TRADER Customer Defaults x RISK Properties x_STUDY FMDS Edt Copy Delete f l Copy from User v
124. FUTURE Maximum order qty 2000 Product e am Maximum position Unlimited Maximum long short Unlimited V Trade Out allowed Geena Ge Ready Note Because John s TTORD is mapped to CME you should set up product limits that apply to the CME gateway As such John can trade all Futures on CME and is subject to the limits illus trated above 21 On the New Product Limit window apply any applicable limits and then click Save All newly created data appears in the New Gateway Login window TT User Setup User Manual 257 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Gateway Login Info Group Pemissions Member TTORDJS Exchange Traders Group 001 Trader 001 Set Password Alias CBOT Disable Auto Calculate SOD 2 Group 42 Trader LOW Remove Map to Exchange Traders 44 Commer Account s WABTT 1877563 ZM3 CM3 LL3 JL3 TT9 7 Add to Guardian New Product Limit Edit Delete Copy from Existing Product Type 2 Product 42 TT SIM Only Margin Addl Margin Max Order Qty Max Position V Risk Check filter filter ow filter filter filter v filter v filter v V Trading allowed FUTURE No 0 100 Unlimited P amp L FUTURE No 0 100 Unlimited SPREAD No 0 100 Unlimited Credit 5000 FUTURE No o 1000 100 SPREAD No 0 2000 Unlimited Conoy FUTU
125. Gateway Product type Product Additional margin 0 FUTURE Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price v Allow trading Show all gateways Save and Add New l Close Ready 4 Select or enter a value in the applicable fields as needed 178 Product limit fields include the following Account Group Specifies the account group to which the limits apply Gateway Specifies the gateway to which the limits apply Check the Show all gateways option to populate the Gateway drop down with all gateways Product type Specifies whether this limit applies to an option future spread etc Product Specifies the product e g FGBL ODAX etc to which the limits apply An asterisk indicates that the limit applies to all products of the specified product type unless an additional product limit exists with a specific product For example Assume you have two product limits configured for the CME A Gateway for one limit the product is all products with a maximum position of 10 and for the other limit the product is ES with a maximum position of 5 When trading ES the account is limited to a maximum position of 5 and when trading all other products on the CME A Gateway the maximum position limit is 10 Prevent orders that are more than X ticks from the market price Determines how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks You can
126. Group Trader is assigned to a User do you want to assign the new Gateways to the User also You have successfully assigned the selected gateways TT User Setup User Manual 151 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics 152 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Account Administration Account Administration Overview Typically an order sent to the exchange includes an account number Account numbers are usually entered into the account field in X_TRADER for example In TT User Setup risk administrators can predefine accounts Once defined administrators can e Add accounts to customer defaults e g to predetermine which accounts will be applied to which orders e Assign accounts to traders Gateway Logins e Add accounts to account groups e Configure risk limits for accounts account groups Note Account based risk checking is independent of any risk checking that may be configured for the user or Member Group Trader MGT Note When accounts are added to an account group the account group s risk settings are used instead of the account s risk settings For more information about account groups refer to the Account Admin istration Overview on page 153 topic To create and configure accounts refer to the following topics e Creating Accounts on page 154 e Assigning One or More Accounts to an Account Group on page 156 e A
127. IX Adapter Server you can create either an Order Routing server type or a Drop Copy server type Fields Description Indicates that this user is a FIX Adapter server or FIX Adapter client For more information FIX Adapter role about FIX Adapter server and client users refer to the TT FIX Adapter and TT User Setup Overview on page 95 topic Order routing server Drop copy server Sets the FIX Adapter Server type Available FIX client users Lists the available FIX client users The following FIX clients can connect to this Lists the clients that the FIX adapter will con FIX Adapter nect to the Gateways on behalf of FIX Adapter client role The FIX Adapter tab fields vary depending on the selected role client or server When you set the FIX Adapter role to FIX Adapter Client you can allow or prevent staged orders enable debugging and assign the client a FIX Adapter server 58 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Fields FIX Adapter role Staged order creation allowed Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed Enable debug logging for orders Enable debug logging for prices ing FIX Adapters The FIX client user can connect to the follow Description Select FIX Adapter Server or FIX Adapter Client For more information about FIX Adapter server and client users refer to the TT FIX Adapter and TT User Setup Overview on pa
128. IX Adapter client user AB requires a copy of all fills for all traders with a Member ID of TTORDAB For this user you could either list each MGT individually or simply use TTORDAB XXX VIEW TT FIX Adapter client user YZ requires a copy of all fills for all traders with a Member ID of TTORDYZ For this user you could either list each MGT individually or simply use TTORDYZ XXX VIEW TT FIX Adapter client user CCBO requires a copy of all fills for all traders For this user you could either list each MGT individually or simply use TTADM XXX VIEW To assign these credentials to each of the FIX Adapter client users 1 On the New User or Edit User window click the Gateway Logins tab 2 For our example client user AB uses the TTORDAB XXX VIEW MGT and Client user YZ uses the TTORDYZ XXX VIEW MGT Because neither MGT has been created you must add new gateway logins 1 Click New to open the New Gateway login where you can enter gateway login informa tion as follows Gateway Login Info Group Permissions i Member TTORDAB Trader VIEW Gateway Login Into Group Permissions Mernber TTORD YZ Trader VIEW 2 Click Add Gateways to open the Select Gateway window where you can select the CME A Eurex A and LIFFE C Gateways TT User Setup User Manual 303 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials For a detailed description of the various types of logins used in a TT environment refer to the TT User Login and R
129. Margin Conflicts topics e Viewing Logged in Users The logged in users report has been expanded to display a list of logged in users based on gateway connection product license and product license per number of markets Viewing the logged in users report allows you to determine how your licenses are currently being used and how many licenses you have available For more information refer to the Displaying Logged in Users topic e Migrating Users to a New Gateway TT User Setup now includes a tool to migrate users from one gateway to another This is useful when you are adding another flavor of a gateway to your environment i e adding a CME B Gateway as a backup in an environment that contains a CME A Gateway or if a gateway is rebranded i e migrating users that connect to a CBOT A Gateway to a CME A Gateway For more information refer to the Migrating Users to a New Gateway topic e Collect Log Files When collecting Log files you can now select the IP address from a list of usernames For more information refer to the Collecting Log Files topic 7 4 1 Enhancements e Adding gateways to multiple gateway logins Added a Mass Add Gateways button to the Gateway Logins window This allows you to add gateways to multiple gateway logins at once For more information refer to the Assigning Gateways to Multiple Gateway Logins topic e Copying multiple product limits to a gateway Added a Mass Copy to Other Gateway but
130. Number Changes Comments ERM222 amp ERX222 b CMESS3_a CMESI3_b TT111_a TT111_b 8 Click Apply Changes The account numbers are replaced 9 On the Main tab assign Matt a new Username and Display Name edit any other applicable fields and click Save You have successfully copied a user How to Assign Existing Product Limits to Other Gateway Login IDs Simultaneously In this tutorial you will learn how to assign one or more of John Doe s product limits to several other gateway logins simultaneously To assign product limits to several gateway logins simultaneously 274 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 1 From the User Admin menu select Product Limits The Product Limits window appears 2 Select the Gateway Login Limits tab and then filter the Users column by JDOE For a detailed description on filtering functionality refer to the Applying Filters on page 30 topic 3 Highlight the product limits you want to assign Gateway Login Links Member 42 Group 43 Trader Users 41 User Groups 44 Gateway 4 Prod Type 46 Product 7 TT SIM Only v filter v filter v filter aoe filter filter BTAYLOR JDOE Chicago BTAYLOR JDOE IDOE 4 Chicago Chicago Total rows displayed 13 Rows selected 1 v filter filtern w filter Ready To edit multiple records just select them and cli
131. Product groups that are marked allowed may not actually be allowed if the TT gateway is not configured to subscribe to those products When you generate the report TT User Setup creates two zip files one encrypted and one unencrypted Both zip files contain identical bin and csv files Typically you send both versions of the file to ICE Note If you want the ICE Product Group report to list the product permissions per customer then you must associate each user with a customer To group users by customer on the user s Main tab enter the customer name into the Organization field 248 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports Contact State Province 2 Ema Phone number gt To generate an ICE Product Groups report 1 From the Reports menu select ICE Product Groups Report 2 When prompted to create the ICE product groups report file click Yes TT User Setup generates the ttus_ice_product_group lt timestamp gt zip and ttus_ice_pro duct_group lt timestamp gt zip server zip files and copies them to the tt logfiles folder TT User Setup User Manual 249 Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports 250 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Tutorials How to Setup a New User Who Will Trade Using a TTORD Gateway Login In this tutorial you will learn how to setup a new X_TRADER user John Doe Using the unique TTORD ID you will cre
132. Qik TECHNOLOGIES aN TT User Setup amp User Manual VERSION 7 X DOCUMENT VERSION 7 17 0 DV1 3 5 14 LEGAL This document and all related computer programs example programs and all TT source code are the exclusive property of Trading Technologies International Inc TT and are protected by licensing agreements copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized possession reproduction duplication or dissemination of this document or any portion of it is illegal and may result in severe civil and criminal penalties Unauthorized reproduction of any TT software or proprietary information may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Information in this document is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of TT All trademarks displayed in this document are subject to the trademark rights of TT or are used under agreement by TT These trademarks include but are not limited to service brand names slogans and logos and emblems including but not limited to Trading Technologies the Trading Technologies Logo TT X_TRADER X_RISK MD Trader Autospreader X_STUDY TT_TRADER TT
133. RE No 0 2000 Unlimited Ovenide credit for TT SIM S Unlimited 5 w e Ready Note For a detailed description of product limit functionality refer to the product limit topics in the Risk Management section 22 In the Guardian data section check the Trading allowed option to turn on trading for this 258 TTORD Note When the Trading allowed option is not checked all orders placed by this MGT are rejected TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Add to Guardian Risk check E Trading allowed E Ignore PAL Currency USD r E Ovenide credit for TT SIM SIM credit Unlimited 23 On the New Gateway Login window click Save Note The newly created gateway login data appears in the Gateway Login tab on the Edit User window 24 From the X_TRADER X_RISK tab click the X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab and enter any applicable customer default data Keep in mind that a TTORD may have only one customer default account to trade with Note To ensure that John enters orders on the correct account in the lt Default gt row verify the Account field contains John s correct account number Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK FIX Adapter TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings X_TRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS Edit Copy Delete Copy from User 4 Customer 42 Sel Market 4
134. RISK tab click the X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab X_TRADER Properties _TRADER Customer Defaults x RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS Customer Edit Copy Delete eplace int Numb Copy from User a2 Sel Market 4 Gateway Product 44 Product Type 4 Account Acct Give Up FFT2 FFT3 filter v M filter M filter M filter S filter filter VW fi S filter 9 filter 0 f filter 7 DEFAULT Total rows w R A M displayed 1 Rows selected 0 C Restrict user from editing their local customer defaults View X_TRADER X_RISK fields Save AdiNew Close Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 5 Highlight the lt DEFAULT gt customer row and click Edit 278 The Edit Customer Default window appears BTAYLOR lt DEFAULT gt Product P Account TTll1a TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 6 10 In the Account field enter an account identifier e g ACT111 Or To select an existing account click the ellipsis button and then pick an account from the Select Account window In the Market field make a selection from the list Note When creating multiple custo
135. SE2 001 e TTASE SE1 001 e TTASE SEI 002 e TTASE SE2 001 e etc After you have determined your Autospreader SE and Synthetic SE gateway login naming convention you can configure a user that either has an existing TTORD or does not have an existing TTORD to connect to the Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Note A trader who does not use a TTORD gateway login for Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE can see the working orders of any traders that do use TTORDs for Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE provided TT User Setup User Manual 319 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials the TTORD is mapped to an exchange trader ID whose Member and Group IDs match the Member and Group IDs of the original trader gt To add an Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE gateway login to a user with an existing TTORD 1 From the Users tab select a user that logs into Gateways using a TTORD and then click Edit 2 From the Edit User window select the Gateway Logins tab select a TTORD gateway login and then click Edit E Edit Gateway Login TTORDIS 001 001 Guwo Loon hfe eae Member TTORDJS Exchange Traders Remove Map to Exchange Traders l Group 001 T 001 Gateway 4 Member 42 Group 4 Trader a4 Commer a BTec AUUS LDVY WABTT CBOT A UMOog ZM3 CM3 CBOT B 8C222 LL3 JL3 Set Password CBOT E NDN37 TT9 Alias CBOT CBOT G 55002 CME CM123 E Disable Auto Calculate SOD AZ44 3 From the Gateway Login Inf
136. Save You have successfully created a new record by copying an existing record To copy a user record Refer to Copying Users To copy a product limit to a gateway or gateway login Refer to Copying Product Limits to Additional Gateways or Gateway Logins Editing a Record This procedure describes how to edit an existing gateway login record from the Gateway Logins win dow The same techniques can be used to edit records in the Users Product Limits Customer Defaults Account Default List and Version Rules windows a To edit a Gateway Login 1 From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins Add Gateways Exchange Traders l Assign to Users J Member 1 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway 4 Alias Exch Member filter w filter w filter w filter v filter w filter v filter CME A cD1 002 MGR VIEW UBW 001 ICE_IPE ABC EUREXPF A m Total rows displayed 212 Rows selected 1 E Hide TTORDs E Hide Exchange Traders Exch Group Exch Trader filter CME A ABC cD1 002 VIEW ABCCD 001 Users Account s al v filter w filter s ABC cD1 001 ABC cD1 001 V Expanded Gateway Exchange Trader View x Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 27 1 Getting Started Note Use the Refresh button to refresh your window if the da
137. Server on page 96 topic continue to the Setting Up an Account Default on page 104 topic and then to the Assigning TT FIX Adapter Client s to a FIX Adapter Server on page 110 topic Setting Up an Account Default This section provides a brief overview of account defaults how to create an account default record and how the TT FIX Adapter Server uses a FIX Adapter client user s account default key values populate default values before submitting an order to the TT Gateway Account Default Overview Account defaults are a set of rules that a TT FIX Adapter uses to provide a default account type clear ing account or free form data when it is omitted from an order The account defaults created in TT user Setup contain two types of data e Keys that the TT FIX Adapter server uses to match incoming orders to particular rules e Default values that TT FIX Adapter server adds to outgoing orders and fills when needed The following is a list of values available in the New Account Defaults or Edit Account Defaults win dow 104 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Field username Account Market Gateway Product type Account type Clearing Account FFT2 FFT3 Description The name of the FIX Adapter client user In the TT FIX Adapter Configura tion Tool FACT username was known as RemoteCom pld The customer accou
138. Show Hide Arrange Columns Show Hide Arrange columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is Find Control Panel useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel Product Group Permissions Window The options available from the Product Group Permissions window context menu include Option Function Exports data to an HTML file which you can Export to HTML use to generate a report Exports data to an CSV file which you can Export to CSV use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to Specify sort criteria determine the order in which data is dis played 348 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Option Show Hide Arrange columns Find Control Panel Function Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel User s Gateway Login Attributes Window The options available from the User s Gateway Login Attributes window context menu include Option Edit Export to HTML Export to CSV Specify sort criteria Show Hide Arrange columns Find Control Panel Function Accesses the Edit User Gateway Login Attributes window which allows you to change values such as default account cle
139. The old accounts are unassigned but not deleted and then the new accounts are created if needed and assigned to the selected customer defaults gt To replace an account number in a customer default 1 From the Customer Defaults window click Replace Account Numbers The Replace Account Numbers window appears TT User Setup User Manual 77 Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users m Replace Account Numbers lol a Replace the Account Numbers of the selected rows Step 1 Remove characters The first 1 characters The last 2 All characters before this All characters after this Step 2 Add characters O At start At end Characters to add bl 2 Configure the account replacement rules to determine how the existing account numbers will be 78 replaced e Inthe Step Isection select the characters to remove if any You can remove the first n characters the last n characters or all characters before or after a specified set of charac ters e Inthe Step 2 section enter the characters to add if any You can add characters to the start or end of the account Example When creating a new user by copying an existing user account refer to Copying Users on page 64 the account numbers in the customer defaults are also copied TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users
140. User Admin menu Both options are similar except that you can create and edit customer defaults for multiple users from the Customer Defaults window P a Edit User BTAYLOR 2 a Main _ Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions XTRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS New Edit Copy Delete Replace Account Numbers Copy from User Z Customer 42 Sel Market 4 Gateway Product Type 4 Product 44 Account Acct Give Up FFT2 FFT3 TIF Type filter x x filter M filter x filter v filter filter v ff x filter S filter x filte file v filter s DEFAULT gt M a FUTURE 0 ACT11 AA GTD Limit DEFAULT gt V CME CME B FUTURE ACT333 Ad GTD Limit DEFAULT NYSE_Liffe FUTURE ACTS55 At GTD Limit Total rows displayed 6 Rows selected 1 C Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults View X_TRADER X_RISK fields Add New Cose Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit How Customer Defaults Appear in X_TRADER A TT User Setup administrator can configure customer defaults for traders using X_TRADER 7 6 or later X_TRADER receives the customer defaults which the trader may be required to use depending on the Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults setting e When you check the Restrict user from editing their local Cus
141. Users 308 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials The Users window appears 2 From the New User View list select FIX Adapter Server fields New User View FIX Adapter Server fields 3 Click New The New user window appears 4 On the Main tab enter data in the following fields Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Login Contact Username CCORI Country UNITED STATES v Display name ClearCo Order Router Server Address 202 Jackson f User group FIX Adapter CCOR City Chicago State Province IL v Zip 60606 Email CCOR ClearCo com Active Phone number 312 555 5555 A Username An identifier for the TT FIX Adapter Server limited to 11 characters Display name A more detailed description of the TT FIX Adapter Server not limited to 11 characters User group An identifier used to categorize users e g Chicago For a detailed description on user groups refer to the TT user Setup user Guide Password Confirm password The password associated with this username which is used to authenticate TT FIX Adapter Servers Country The location of the TT FIX Adapter Server machine Zip The Zip code in which the TT FIX Adapter Server machine is located Zip is neces sary only if the Country selected is the United States The following figure shows the Login and Contact sections of Main tab for the new FIX Adapter Server CCOR
142. X Adapter client users In our example e TT FIX Adapter client user AB BOB will route orders as TTORDAB 001 001 and will need to see all orders fills for this MGT e TT FIX Adapter client user AB BILL will route orders as TTORDAB 001 002 and will need to see all orders fills for this MGT 310 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials TT FIX Adapter client user AB MIKE will route orders as TTORDAB 002 001 and will need to see all orders fills for this MGT The credentials that have permissions to view all of these orders and fills is TTORDAB XXX MGR You could also use a higher level MGT such as TTADM XXX MGR for the TT Gateway logins how ever TT does not recommend this approach because of its impact on performance TT FIX Adapter could spend a considerable amount of time processing order and fill updates for which the FIX clients have neither interest nor permission to see 1 To assign credentials to the FIX Adapter Server user On the New User or Edit User window for the CCDC user click the Gateway Logins tab 2 Ifthe gateway login to which you want to map does not exist click New Nn The New Gateway Login window appears If the gateway login already exists click the Assign Existing Logins button and select the appropriate MGT s On the Gateway Login Info tab enter a Member Group and Trader The following figure shows a new gateway login TTORDAB XXX MGR for the new
143. X client user to log in gt To set up a FIX Adapter client user 1 From the TT User Setup Control Panel open the User Admin menu and click Users The Users window appears 2 From the New User View list select FIX Adapter Client fields New User View FIX Adapter Client fields 3 Click New The New User window appears 100 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users 4 On the Main tab enter the FIX Adapter client user s Login Contact information User Level Risk and User Defined fields as needed The Username is the RemoteCompld and the Pass word is the password used to authenticate the Client on the FIX Adapter Server The following table describes options that allow or prevent connectivity in specific instances Field When orders will be rejected The TT FIX Adapter cannot connect to a FIX client with an expired password Because FIX Adapter client users cannot update an expired password using the same procedure as an X_TRADER user TT recom mends that you prevent password expiration by leaving the Password never expires option checked Password never expires If the Active option is unchecked the FIX cli Active ent is considered inactive and therefor can not log into TT FIX Adapter If the Force logoff option is checked the TT FIX Adapter will disconnect the FIX client The FIX client cannot log back in until the Force logoff
144. a Slave server 336 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title Max Login Allowed Max Long Short Max Ord Qty Max Orders Sec Max Pos Member MEF SOD Group Restrictions Associated Windows Users Product Limits Window Product Limits Window XT CD tab The maximum rate of orders allowed per TT Gateway This value overrides the user level Per TT Gateway pre vent more than X orders per second setting The value entered in the Prevent more than X orders per second overrides the User Level setting field displays in Max Orders Sec You can edit the maximum orders per second in this col umn per TT Gateway for the selected user Product Limits Window GW Logins tab GW Login Window Product Limits Win dow Accounts Window User GWL Attributes Users Description Specifies the limit on the number of concurrent logins allowed Specifies the limits on a long or short position A limit on the maximum order size for the selected trader product Max Orders Sec A limit on the position for the selected trader product to the specified number of con tracts The unique Member ID used to identify an exchange trader or TTORD as part of their MGT When XR MF Access and or XR SOD Access is yes this specifies if the user is limited to accounts in specified user groups when publishing man ual fills and or Start of Day records
145. ach FIX Adapter client sends a TT FIX Adapter server an order that contains a market of CME and a product type of NRG the clients will receive different results as fol lows TT user Setup includes the following account default entries for FIX Adapter Client user ABC Priority Account Market rod Acct Clearing PRT FFT3 Type Type Acct 1 CME NRG Gl 999 2 Al TT User Setup User Manual 109 Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users For FIX Adapter Client user XYZ TT user Setup includes the same account defaults but in reverse order as shown eer Prod Acct Clearing Priority Account Market Type Type Ave FFT2 FFT3 2 ji CME NRG G1 999 Result When TT FIX Adapter Server receives the message from FIX Adapter Client user ABC it finds a match in the first account defaults listed so it routes the order to the TT Gateway with Account Type G1 and Give Up 999 When TT FIX Adapter Server receives the same message from FIX Adapter cli ent user XYZ it matches the first row Even though the second account defaults entry represents a more precise match TT FIX Adapter server stops looking after it finds the first match Consequently when TT FIX Adapter server receives this message it routes it to the TT Gateway with Account Type Al Note For more account default order matching and routing examples refer to the Understanding Account Defaults sectio
146. aders Gateway 1 Member 2 Group 4 Trader CME 4 054031 TEQ jod Eurex D54032 TEQ lt Ui 4 Click Done 5 On the New Gateway Login window click the Assign Accounts button The Assign Accounts window appears 5 J Assign Accounts Col eE Available Accounts Selected Accounts Account 4 Description Account l Description o Filte v filte abc001001 abc001001 002 002 1020304 1091982 1231232123 123533456 1877563 TT User Setup User Manual 315 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 6 Use the transfer arrow buttons gt lt gt gt lt lt to move the account s from the Available Accounts table to the Selected Accounts table If the account does not exist click Cre ate Accounts to create it The Selected Accounts are the account numbers that the FIX client must use to place orders using this TTORD 7 Click Done 8 From the Gateway Login Info tab set the credit limits as needed and then click Save The following figure shows how the newly created gateway logins display in the New User or Edit User window amp Edit User AB BOB Amn Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Pemissions Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all Gateways New Edit Remove l Assign Existing Logins Product Limits Member 4 Group 42 Trader 42 Gateway 4 ExchMember ExchGroup Exch Trader Availto FIX Client Account s Operator ID Mand filt Y
147. ality offered by the TT FIX Adapter Server For more information on how order routing functionality is used by a TT FIX Adapter Server refer to the Configure Order Routing chapter in the TT FIX Adapter System Administration Manual Version 7 6 e Drop Copy The Drop Copy configuration type allows FIX Adapter client users to use all the functionality offered by the TT FIX Adapter Server except for routing orders For more information on how a TT FIX Adapter Server uses drop copy functionality refer to the Configure Drop Copy chap ter in the TT FIX Adapter System Administration Manual Version 7 6 The following table describes how drop copy gateway logins determine viewing privileges 96 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Gateway Login Viewing Privileges Indicates the orders and fills for all TTADM XXX VIEW FIX Adapter client user s gateway logins are visible to the TT FIX Adapter Server Indicates the orders and fills for all FIX Adapter client user s gateway logins with lt Member ID gt KXX VIEW the same Member ID are visible to the TT FIX Adapter Server Indicates the orders and fills for all FIX Adapter client user s gateway logins with the same Member ID and Group ID are visible to the TT FIX Adapter Server lt Member ID gt lt Group ID gt VIEW Additionally you must designate the credentials called gateway logins that the FIX
148. all product groups are allowed by default When a new product group or market is added it is allowed for all users by default The administrator must manually block the product groups for the appropriate users 84 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc User Administration Administrative Users Creating and Editing Administrative Users TT User Setup supports the following administrative users who have varying levels of permissions to create manage and view users None Reserved for a user who cannot log into TT User Setup This is the default setting Super Administrator Provides complete access to TT User Setup functionality A user with Super Administrator permissions has no restrictions in TT User Setup Refer to Creating a Super Administrator on page 85 Note Super Administrator permissions is the equivalent of having TT User Setup Access in a pre 7 2 version of TT User Setup Group Administrator Provides permission to view edit and create users gateway logins and accounts that exist in one of the user groups the administrator is designated to manage A Group Administrator can manage multiple user groups but can exist in a single user group only Refer to Creating a Group Administrator on page 86 Note An optional setting is available that limits a Group Administrator to creating TTORDs only Gateway Login Administrator Provides permission to manage one or more gateway logins A
149. allow traders to sell above this range and buy below it by checking the Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders option Margin Displays the margin that is currently configured for the specified product Additional margin Specifies a percentage above or below the margin that a trader must have to trade the contract In other words additional margin increases or decreases the margin requirement when calculating risk limits Maximum order qty Specifies a limit on the maximum individual order size that can be entered for a specified product To apply a maximum order quantity check the Maxi mum order qty option and enter a value Maximum position Specifies a position limit for a given product maximum position can have various meanings depending on whether it s related to a Future Option Spread TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration 6 7 or Strategy For details refer to the Defining Maximum Position section of this topic To apply a maximum position check the Maximum position option and enter a value e Maximum long short Limits the worst case total of long or short contracts per product For more detailed information about using this limit refer to the Defining Maximum Long Short section of this topic To apply a limit check the Maximum long short option and enter a value e Allow trading Specifies whether t
150. allowed to access all products for that market To manually allow or block product groups TT User Setup User Manual 119 Trading Technologies International Inc 6 User Maintenance 1 From the User Admin menu select Product Group Permissions Note You can also access the product group permission for a single user by selecting the Prod uct Groups tab from the New User or Edit User windows T H Product Group preca mE Aow Block Leam more Username Display Name User Group User Status Market 42 ProductGroup Allowed filter v filter v filten v filter v filter filter filter Alfred Brown Chicago j a CA Futures S Alfred Brown Chicago Active ICE_IPE CCFE Alfred Brown Chicago Active ICE_IPE Fin Index Data Alfred Brown Chicago Active ICE_IPE Heat Rate Spread Alfred Brown Chicago Active ICE_IPE OTC Gas Alfred Brown Chicago Active ICE_IPE OTC Oil Alfred Brown Chicago Active ICE_IPE OTC Power Alfred Brown Chicago Active ICE_IPE UK Futures Alfred Brown Chicago ICE_IPE US Futures Total rows displayed 1100 Rows selected 2 Save Cancel Ready Bc sessese 7 m 1 2 Filter or sort the Product Group Permissions window as needed to locate the product group s you want to allow or block 3 Select the product group s and click Allow or Block If you select only one product you can also check or uncheck t
151. an In X_ TRADER and X_RISK 7 11 and later the currency display option is configured within X_TRADER X_RISK To add a currency 1 From the Server Admin menu select Add Remove Currencies The Currencies window appears r eg Currencies Currency Published filter Y filter v Total rows displayed 27 Ready 2 Click New Last Changed filter Y 2011 04 05 09 54 45 2011 04 05 09 54 45 2011 04 05 09 54 45 2011 04 05 09 54 45 2011 04 05 09 54 45 Rows selected 0 The New Currency window appears 214 ee C Primary curency USD v Last Changed By v TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration E New Currency lol ao Ez Curency For example USD Cee 3 Enter the 3 letter designation for the new currency and then click Save The new currency appears in the currencies table as Unpublished 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed to add more currencies 5 When you are finished adding currencies click Publish Currencies to publish the currencies to Guardian You have successfully added currencies gt To delete a currency From the Currencies window select the currency to delete Click Delete When prompted to permanently delete the currency click OK Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed to delete more currencies When you are finished deleting currencies click Publish Currencies to publish the currency ch
152. ange Example TT User Setup User Manual 189 Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking Enabling and Setting the Pre trade Price Controls To enable and set the pre trade price controls From the User Admin menu select Users 2 From the Users window click a user row and then click Edit The Edit User window appears and defaults to the Main tab The User Level Risk section con tains the pre trade price controls User Level Risk Trading allowed Credit PELI Currency USD E Use P amp Lrisk algorithm E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders E Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second E Ovenide credit for TT SIM Unlimited 3 To configure how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks check the Pre vent orders that are more than X ticks from the market price checkbox and enter the num ber of ticks If you only want to enforce this setting for buy orders above the market and sell orders below the market check the Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a min imum price on sell orders checkbox 4 Click Save TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking Setting Order Throughput Controls The order throughput control feature allows an administrator to configure the number of orders per sec
153. anges to Guardian Pu e ad a You have successfully deleted currencies To change the primary currency 1 From the Currencies window select the primary currency from the Primary currency drop down list 2 Click Publish Currencies to publish the currency changes to Guardian You have successfully set the primary currency Editing Product Margins TT User Setup User Manual 215 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration The Product Margins window displays a list of products for each market as well as information related to those products such as Product Type and Margin When Super Administrators edit and then publish margin values for a given product the changes are published to each gateway flavor within the market that lists the product When TT User Setup detects multiple gateways with different margins for the same products TT User Setup adds a comment to the Comments Conflicts column and also makes an entry in the Product Table Conflicts window The Super Administrator can view and clear the conflicts Refer to the View ing and Clearing Product Margin Conflicts on page 217 topic gt To edit the product margins 1 From the Server Admin menu select Product Margins The Product Margins window appears E Product Margins Ses Edit View All Margin Conflicts Market 2 Product Type 4 Product 4 Margin Published Comments Conflicts 1 A filter
154. appears 2 Select the General tab X_STUDYS FMDS Settings Enforce maximum concurrent logins per user based on P address 1 Seconds that a user must wait between successful login attempts 0 100 This time delay gives Guardservers a chance to syne ensuring that a user cannot use more concurrent logins than they are allowed by quickly logging in from multiple IP addresses In most environments 12 seconds is sufficient Failed Login Rules Automatically lock out users due to failed attempts or inactivity umber of failed login attempts before user status is set to lays of inactivity allowed before user status is set to LOCKE lt Any tet e gt g For assistance please contact Trader Support at 1 555 555 HELP or email help example com gt TT User Setup User Manual 289 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials In the Failed Login Attempts section check the Apply an additional failed login message to users option to enable the functionality Inthe corresponding free form text box edit the default message or create an entirely new mes sage Click Save and then click Close Note TT User Setup displays the additional failed login message after a failed login attempt How to Use Wildcard Characters in Filters In this tutorial you will learn how to use wildcard characters to filter the Gateway Login window s Gateway column for all A flavored gateways This allows you t locate specific
155. apter will reject any orders that are Prevent orders that are more than X ticks submitted with a price that is outside the away from the market price defined price band Additionally it will reject orders if it is unable to successfully establish a price subscription for the instrument Per TT Gateway prevent more than X orders The TT Gateway will reject all orders that per second exceed the orders per second limitation 6 Click the Gateway Logins tab 7 Ifthe gateway login to which you want to map does not exist click New and create a new gate way login For detailed instructions refer to the Creating a New Gateway Login topic Otherwise if the gateway login already exists click the Assign Existing Logins button and select the appropriate MGT s For detailed instructions refer to the Assigning Gateways to Gateway Logins on page 137 topic Make sure to check the Avail to FIX Client option if the FIX client will have access to the gate way login after logging in Main Gateway Logins Fix Adapter Product Group Permissions C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways Edit Remove Assign Existing Logins Product Limits Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway 4 ExchMember ExchGroup Exch Trader Availto FIX Client Manda filter vi filter v filter Vv filter x filter i filter filter Vv filter v TTORDAB 001
156. ar ing member and preferred IP Exports data to an HTML file which you can use to generate a report Exports data to an CSV file which you can use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel Accounts Window The options available from the Accounts window context menu include Option New Function Accesses the New Account window which allows you to create an account by applying values such as account number and account description TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 349 19 Appendix Option Function Accesses the Edit Account window which Edit allows you to change account number and account description values Delete Permanently removes the selected account Exports data to an HTML file which you can Export to HTML use to generate a report Exports data to an CSV file which you can Export to CSV use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to Specify sort criteria determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns Show Hide Arrange columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Br
157. are ready for the product limits to be applied check the Apply product limits option No account or account group risk checking will take place until this option is enabled 5 To allow users with this account to trade check the Allow trading option To reject trades sub mitted with this account number uncheck the Allow trading option Note Users logging in with Gateway Logins that end in MGR e g TTADM XXX MGR can delete orders regardless of whether or not Allow Trading is checked for a given account 6 Configure any gateway specific margin limits as described in the Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 180 topic 7 Ifneeded you can permission an account for use within one or more specific user groups 1 Click the Group Permissions tab TT User Setup User Manual 155 Trading Technologies International Inc 9 Account Administration Overview J Edit Account ACT11 l Account Info Group Permissions Available User Groups Account permitted in the following User Groups User Group 1 gt User Group 4 Users with Account Gateway Logins with Account filter A Chicago BTAYLOR lt General gt London Hew York Singapore Sydney Ready 2 Use the transfer buttons lt lt lt gt gt gt to select users from the Available User Groups list and add them to the Account permitted in the following User Groups list 3 Ifthe group does not exist click Crea
158. argin Limit filter Account Description v filter w filter w filter v BTec BTec A BTec B BTec C BTec D Apply product limits Addl Margin Max Order Qty Max Position Gateway 41 ProductType 42 Product 42 Margin Show only configured or visible gateways Last Changed Last Chang u o rT p0 aA A Max Long Short Creal filter w filter filter v filter v filter filter v filter v v v filter v filter v filter v filter Account risk checking is only available in 7 16 8 gateways or later 18 On the New Account window enter the Account name and Account description and then click Save You can also enter configure account based risk from the New Account window 256 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials refer to the Account Administration Overview on page 153 topic if needed 19 On the Assign accounts window click Done Note You can set up John s account numbers as order defaults when setting his customer defaults 20 On the New Gateway Login window in the Guardian data section either uncheck the Risk Check setting or click the New Product Limit button and set up products for John to trade Arar C Use Product Limit for TT SIM only Gateway Login TTORDJS 001 001 Margin Gateway Eurex x Additional margin 0 Producttype
159. art of Day records When Auto Gen SOD Positions is no gateways will not generate Start of Day records for the configured Gateway Login Determines if you can log into your assigned gateway using your assigned MGT TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 329 19 Appendix Column Title Available to FIX Client Avail to FIX Client Available to User Avail to User City Clearing Account see Give up Clearing Members Associated Windows Assign to Available Users User GWL Attributes GW Logins tab GW Logins tab User GWL Attributes Assign to Avail able Users Users GW Logins tab Selected Users User GWL Attributes Assign to Available Users GW Logins tab GW Login Description Indicates whether a FIX Cli ent has access to a given gate way login after performing a universal login Indicates whether a user has access to a given gateway login after performing a uni versal login Optional contact data for a particular user Designates a member firm of a clearing house through which trades are settled Displays an error description when a product being saved Comments Window Product Limits Win a does not exist in the product dow table Country Uers Optional contact data for a particular user Identifies whether this admin Create Non TTORD Users istrator can create Direct Trader Gateway logins Created Date Users The date the user was c
160. ase ae g Hace a hardy did gl aia ap seal aie ad e alee baa eas 114 Fotcine a User Logoff iu h ct cade ee PRAGA RES Ri ARTE KAS RERERA RAR ERER 115 Activating and Deactivating Users 44 044 6 eared esiea heeded seat dew awiansetwaa Sed 116 Configuring and Running Diagnostic Checks 00 0 c cece eee eee ene 116 Allowing or Blocking Product Groups for Specific Markets 00 0000 eee 119 Updating the Supported Product Groups List 0 0000 ccc eens 120 Gateway Login Administration Basics 0 0 00 cece ees 121 Gateway Logins Overview jc44 44 45 lt 04d dada SUA CEA Re rale de beaded d ERR ERE EERE 121 Assign to Available Users Window Field Descriptions 000 0c eee eee 121 Available Users list nonan eae eas oa EAS eax Sao ds awe a4 Re ape aR 121 Selected sere stoarre ei ue cetek eee esiea eai e EERE EIEE i paa 121 Lopin AttribUtES 23 csceu nd domloe st iani iai e a e aa E a a E E A a 121 iv TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Table of Contents Gateway Login Window Field Descriptions 00 0c cece ee eee eee 123 Customizing the Gateway Logins Window 0 000 c cece eee ene 131 Creating Gateway LOGINS saci c0ckceiecendewd eee eee ee ene eee wd eee ee 135 Creating a New Gateway Login 346 sca cage pad ebd cea es bao es Pe ER ES Maw peda SAEs 135 Assigning the MemberGroupTrader ID 0 00 000 c cece 135 Disabling Start of Da
161. ate John can log into and trade on several TT gateways In addition this tuto rial will illustrate how to setup John with pre trade risk limits order defaults account numbers etc p To setup a user to trade several markets using X_TRADER and a non registered trader login 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 From the Users window set the New User View to X_TRADER X RISK fields 3 Click New The New User window appears TT User Setup User Manual 251 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER x_RISK Product Group Permissions Login Contact Usemame JDOE Country United States x Display name John Doe Address 1800 W Addison User group Chicago Select Group City Chicago Password aeneae State Province Ilinois m Confirm password ee Zp 60613 Email jdoe email com W Active aor Phone number 312 555 5555 Password never expires Organization z Locked out Cust in ICE Product Gi rr V Limit the number of concurrent logins based on IP address LAD entre User Level Risk Force logoff 7 Trading allowed V GTC GTDate orders allowed 7 TT API allowed Godt V Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed f applicable a V Account changes on fills allowed E Use P amp L risk algorithm User Defined Fields E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market
162. ault to allow accounts to be shown on the working orders passed in X_TRADER Uncheck this option to hide assigned accounts from the other user groups 6 Click Save The following warning message appears The message is a reminder to configure each selected User Group for order passing Lid TT User Setup o Esl Users can only pass orders to User Groups that can pass orders back Make sure to configure each checked User Group to pass orders to Singapore Do not show this warning again OK Newly created user groups appear in the User Groups window Note When a Group Administrator or Gateway Login Administrator creates a new user group that user group is added automatically to the list of groups the administrator can manage You have successfully created a new user group for order passing Assigning Users to a User Group Use the New User or Edit User window to assign users to a user group Users can exist in only one user group at any given time However multiple users can belong to the same user group To assign existing users to a user group 1 From the User Admin menu select Users and then select one or more users to assign to a user group 2 Click Edit 3 On the Main tab of the New User or Edit User window click the User group field s Select Group button TT User Setup User Manual 199 Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration User Group t Assigned Users fi
163. ay logins check the Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins option When the option is unchecked the administrator cannot create or edit Direct Trader gateway logins but can create and edit TTORDs 9 At the bottom of the window the Available User Groups list displays the user groups that you can assign to the administrator to manage More than one administrator can manage the same group 10 Using the transfer arrow buttons gt gt gt lt lt lt move one or more user groups from the Avail able User Groups list to the Can only manage the following User Group list 11 After adding groups to the list check the Default s option to assign any users gateway logins or accounts created by this administrator to the checked user groups Note You must select at least one user group as the Default user group Can only manage the following User Groups User Group 4 Default s Users Chicago AMURPHY ANOVVSK APOULOS BST FIX Adapter CC El AB BILL AB BOB 4B MIKE CCOR For example if a user group named Chicago is selected as a Default when the group adminis trator creates a gateway login it will be automatically assigned to the Chicago user group TT User Setup User Manual 87 Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users 12 Click Save 13 Skip to the Configuring the Outgoing Email Settings on page 93 topic You successfully created a Group Administra
164. base updates are logged auto matically in the UserSetupDbUpdates ini file and include a daily record that is viewable in a standard Internet browser Updates are categorized based on the date and time of the update the type of update e g update user email account the username and IP address of the user that made the update and the application in which the update was performed The Audit Trail window displays a list of available log files and shows the date the files were created and the size of the log files To display a logfile via the Audit Trail window 1 From the Reports menu select Audit Trail TT User Setup User Manual 241 Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports View Audit Trail File 2010 09 17 T4903 2010 09 16 arig 2 From the Audit Trail window click View Audit Trail File The TT User Setup Database Updates file appears in your Internet browser 242 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports TT User Setup DB Updates Date time Update Command UserID IP Address neces 17 Audit Trail Msg TTSYSTEM Administrator 192 169 8 199 TTUserSetup exe Column Value msg TTSYSTEM logged into TTUserSetup a aa Insert Mat TTSYSTEM Administrator 192 168 9 199 TTUserSetup exe Column Value mat_member CME mgt_group 002 moat_trader 002 mgt_description magt_credit 0 mgt_currency USD mgt_allow_trading 0 mat_ignore_pl 0 ma
165. ca tions New User Edit User Main tab Account Group New or Edit Account Group New or Edit Product Limit Minimum Version Supported X_TRADER 7 7 6 FIX Adapter 7 8 X_TRADER 7 12 Algo SE 7 3 Autospeader SE 7 3 Synthetic SE 7 3 FIX Adapter 7 8 1 X_TRADER 7 8 FIX Adapter 7 6 X_TRADER 7 8 FIX Adapter 7 6 X_TRADER 7 8 FIX Adapter 7 6 X_TRADER 7 11 FIX Adapter 7 7 1 X_TRADER 7 12 Algo SE 7 3 Autospeader SE 7 3 Synthetic SE 7 3 FIX Adapter 7 8 1 356 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Field Feature Location Sem version Supported Per TT Gateway pre Prevent more than X New User Edit User TT Gateways 7 16 1 v nt mote than X orders per second Main tab orders per second Allow an order to be Submitting orders sined ya at New User Edit User with undefined account number that Mantab TT Gateways 7 16 8 accounts allowed if is not defined in TT applicable User Setup Aoa raden o New User Edit User Account changeson YP date the account Main tab X TRADER 7 12 2 fills allowed number on a fill X RISK 7 12 2 a a ae for eee an for New User Edit User HFS 7 X Il Gat ae ll Gat yO Gateway Logins tab X_TRADER 7 X all Gateways all Gateways TT API 7 2 X_ RISK 7 10 Determines whether or not the gateways ii i _ assigned to this gate pe Auto salg way login should New Gateway Losin TT Gateways 7 16 8 eee automatically gener neo ate Start of Day records i
166. can assign them to this new user group by clicking Assign Gateway Logins and then selecting the avail able gateway logins The third party administrator will also be able to create new gateway logins as needed 6 Continue to the next section Creating the Third party Gateway Login Administrator on page 268 Pe SS Creating the Third party Gateway Login Administrator To create an administrator that can only manage gateway logins 268 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials From the User Admin menu select Users In the Users window set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields and then click New 3 On the Main tab of the New User window enter the appropriate Login data including Username and any additional data in the applicable fields 4 Onthe TT User Setup Permissions tab select the Gateway Login Administration option Leave Restrict Gateway Login Administrator to User Groups listed below checked 5 Move the third party group you created in the previous section to the Can only manage Gate way Logins in the following User Groups section 6 Click Save and then click Close NO Re When the third party gateway login administrator logs in TT User Setup displays only the gate way logins that you assigned to the third party gateway login group The gateway login adminis trator can create new gateway logins as long as they do not conflict with your current gateway log
167. can configure a custom message that appears after the standard message To activate and customize the failed login attempt message 1 From the Server Admin menu select System Settings On the System Settings window click the General tab 3 In the Failed Login Rules section check the Apply an additional failed login message to users option Failed Login Rules C Automatically lock out users due to failed attempts or inactivity C Apply an additional failed login message to users 4 In the text box edit the default message or create a new message 5 Click Save Note The message in the text box appears after a failed login attempt TT User Setup User Manual 229 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Configuring Password Rules Use the Password Rules to configure password complexity password reuse and password expiration rules The Password Complexity section defines the level of password complexity required for all users changing their password In addition you may incorporate password reuse restrictions Note Password complexity changes are enforced the next time the user changes their pass word TT User Setup initiates a password change when password expiration rules take effect when a user manually changes their password or when the administrator manually resets the user s password The Password Reuse section defines the number of unique passwords required before allowing a log
168. ccount number on a fill check the Account changes on fills allowed option Note When applying account based risk checking TT does not recommend checking the Account changes on fills allowed option until this user is using X_TRADER 7 17 or later If a user with a pre 7 17 version of X_TRADER is allowed to change an account on a fill the account number on the fill will not be updated in all TT products including the gateways where account based risk checking is done This could lead to discrepancies between what is dis played in client applications and how risk is actually being calculated Note When the Account changes on fills allowed option is checked users with X_TRADER 7 17 or later can modify the account on a fill and this update will be processed as a part of account based risk on the gateways Note that no risk check actually takes place on the modifi cation therefore changing the account could cause an account to go over its limits However any subsequent orders will be risk checked based on the modified fills 10 Enter any User Defined fields as needed 11 In the User Level Risk section 1 Leave the Trading allowed option checked if the X_TRADER user should be able to trade Additionally set a Credit limit and the Currency Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited Note The Trading Allowed option must be checked for any user that will add modify or delete orders This means that non tradable administrator logins e g TT
169. chnologies International Inc 15 Publishing to Guardian e ID TTORD or Exchange Trader data which provides specific account and gateway login infor mation e Gateway Logins Exchange Traders The Gateways or Exchange Traders to which the ID is mapped e Product Limits which show the limits established through TT User Setup for the applicable TTORD or Exchange Trader A TTORD or Exchange Trader record appears in the Guardian User Setup Differences Details win dow when any of the following conditions apply e The ID is in TT User Setup but not in Guardian e The ID is in Guardian but not in TT User Setup e The ID is in both TT User Setup and Guardian but there are data differences e The record is in both TT User Setup and Guardian but the Add to Guardian option is unchecked in TT User Setup To access the Differences Details window 1 From the File menu select Publish to Guardian 2 Select a single differences row and then click View Differences Details Alternatively you can double click the row The following image shows how differences are displayed and describes some sample differences Data User Setup 002 002 Accounts Credit caiene Ale Trading isk Check gnet PEL Aias i The highlighted Credit colurnn USD Fake On alse indicates that the same ID z TTORDFA 001 001 is assigned a different credit limit in TT User Setup and Guardian Guardian Member G
170. ck Edit 4 Click Mass Copy to Other Gateway Logins The Select Gateway Logins window appears 5 Highlight several MGTs to which you want the product limits applied and click Select Member Group Trader Alias Accounts filter v filter w filter w filter TTORDAB TTORDJD 001 JDOE JDOE2 TTORDJD 001 TTORDJS 001 001 John Doe TTORDJS John Doe 6 Ifan overwrite message appears click Yes to continue TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc filter abc001001 ABC DEF ABC A CME333_a ERX2 TT111_d 275 18 Tutorials John s product limits are applied to the MGTs you selected accordingly Note Assigning additional product limits helps to differentiate multiple MGTs How to Change Multiple Product Limit Values Simultaneously In this tutorial you will learn how to use the Product Limits window to change several product limit values at the same time In the example you will learn to update the maximum order quantity for multi ple traders placing CBOT Futures orders on a specific gateway flavor gt To change multiple product limit values simultaneously 1 From the User Admin menu select Product Limits The Product Limits window appears 2 Click the Gateway column title to filter rows alphabetically For a detailed description of filter ing functionality refer to the Applying Filters on page 30 topic 3 While pressing th
171. click the Gateway Logins tab Ifthe gateway login to which you want to map does not exist click New No The New Gateway Login window appears If the gateway login already exists click the Assign Existing Logins button and select the appropriate MGT s 3 On the Gateway Login Info tab enter a Member Group and Trader The following figure shows a new gateway login TTADM XXX VIEW for the new TT FIX Adapter server user CCDC eee Gateway Login Info Group Permissions Member TTADM Trader VIEW For a detailed description of the various types of logins used in a TT environment refer to the TT User Login and Risk Administration Reference Guide 4 Click the Add Gateways button The Select Gateway window appears A TT FIX Adapter Server must be configured to connect to the TT Gateways from which the associated FIX Adapter client users require fills 5 Hold down the Ctrl key click CME A Eurex A and LIFFE C gateway options and click the Select button 6 Onthe New Gateway Login window click the Save button If a message that this gateway login is tied to multiple gateways appears click OK TT User Setup returns to the Gateway Login tab of the New User or Edit User window 300 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways Edit Remove Assign Existing Logins View Edit Product Limits Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4
172. configuring user groups to pass orders refer to the User Group Administration topic Also this release supports TT Update which provides software updates to supported TT applications currently X_TRADER 7 17 10 X_RISK 7 17 10 TT User Setup 7 4 40 and TT User Setup 7 17 20 and higher This eliminates the need for customers to repackage client software when new ver sions of the supported applications are released Once end users have installed TT Update on their X_TRADER or X_RISK workstations TT User Setup administrators can create version rules that determine which TT software updates are available to their users Once TT User Setup administrators have installed TT Update on their TT User Setup client workstations TT Update also automatically updates TT User Setup clients to a version that matches the TT User Setup server For more information about TT Update refer to the TT Update Help in the online Help Library For information about setting Version Rules refer to Using Version Control Rules 7 4 12 Enhancements This release adds the ability to override the user level Orders per second limit which applies to all gate ways with settings that can be configured for individual gateways To override the user level Per TT Gateway prevent more than X orders per second setting open the Users Gateway Login Attributes window edit a Gateway Login attribute and set Prevent more than X orders per second to a value that applies to th
173. contains multiple legs the check is applied to each individual leg e The price check does not apply to NYSE Liffe Block orders sent via X_Block e The price check applies to exchange prices only not to implied price functionality Example Static Price Range Control In this example an administrator has configured a user with a price control of 4 ticks and has also speci fied that the range is not directional If the current last traded price is 2 0 then the user will only be able to place an order that is above 0 0 the low point of the price band and below 4 0 the high point of the price band All other orders will be rejected by the software 188 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking Last bians ia 2 0 Price Range 4 ticks Static Price Range Example Example Directional Price Range Control In this example an administrator has configured a user with a price control of 4 ticks and has also speci fied that the range is directional If the current last traded price is 2 0 then the user will only be able to place a buy order that is below 4 0 the high point of the price band or a sell order that is above 0 0 the low point of the price band All other orders will be rejected by the software Last Price 2 0 ce Buy Price Range 4 ticks and below Last Price 2 0 vV Sell Price Range 4 ticks and above Directional Price R
174. ct Note To allow trading of spreads or strategies you must also configure product limits for the products that comprise the spreads or strategies Note The rules for configuring all other product types are identical to the rules for configuring futures and spreads except that limits for energy product are configured in lots Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups Margin limits allow you to configure credit limits per account or account group that apply to individual TT Gateways Because P amp L per account can span all exchanges account based margin limits ignore P amp L Additionally margin limits apply even if product limits are not applied This allows you to create margin limits without creating product limits Margin Example Account ABC has a 7 000 margin limit If the margin for 1 ES contract is 3500 and Trader_1 buys 1 ES contract in account ABC the available credit in account ABC would be 3500 If Trader_2 then buys 1 ES contract in the same account the available credit in account ABC would be 0 No additional ES contracts can be bought in account ABC and up to four can be sold You can set up and change margin limits for a single account or for an account group If an account belongs to an account group only the account group settings are used This section describes creating margin limits from the Account Group window You can also create margin limits from the Accounts window To create a new margi
175. ct limit and then click Copy To copy one of the product limits that are available to the Gateways listed in the Gateways section click Copy from Existing and then select the product limit to Copy The New Product Limit window appears O New Product Limit soe ox Use Product Limit for TT SIM only Gateway Login TTORDJS 001 001 Margin Gateway Eurex hd Additional margin 0 Product type FUTURE Maximum order aty 2000 Product Maximum position Unlimited Maximum long short Unlimited v Trade Out allowed Save and Add New Close Ready 168 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration Note Product Limits created via the Product Limits window are available only to the users who are assigned to the MGT ID gateway login 3 Select or enter a value in the applicable fields as needed Product limit fields include the following Gateway Specifies the gateway to which the limits apply Product type Specifies whether this limit applies to an option future spread etc Product Specifies the product e g FGBL ODAX etc to which the limits apply An asterisk indicates that the limit applies to all products of the specified product type unless an additional product limit exists with a specific product For example Assume you have two product limits configured for the CME A Gateway for one limit the product is all products with a max
176. ction Opens the Publish to Guardian window which allows you to publish risk data and order routing to Guardian Note The publish icon changes from a gray and green icon to a yellow and green icon when TT User Setup and Guardian are out of sync This occurs when a change is made to TT User Setup or Guardian but not both You must publish the changes to bring TT User Setup and Guardian back in synch Note If DisableProductLimitPublishing Mode is on then only order routing data is published to Guardian refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual for more information about the DisableProductLimit PublishingMode parameter Opens the Diagnostic Checks window which lists potential set up issues Opens the Reports window from which you can run various user and system reports Opens the Audit Trail window which tracks updates made to the database EA TT User Setup TTSYSTEM User Admin TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc ol a ServerAdmin Reports Help 19 1 Getting Started Use the Menu bar to access various TT User Setup functions and windows Note TT User Setup permits only one primary window to be open at any given time For example if you have a Users window open and you want to access the Gateway Logins window you must first close the Users window TT User Setup disables certain Control Panel and Menu options when a pri mary window is open
177. d into a given gateway Indicates whether the user is allowed to deploy strategies to an Algo SE Server This setting is only valid when the Gateway is an Algo SE Server Algo Deployment Allowed Indicates whether the user is allowed to share algorithms with other users on Algo SE serv Algo Sharing Allowed ers This setting is only valid when the Gate way is an Algo SE Server and when the Algo deployment allowed option is checked Specifies the default account type as defined Default Account by the exchange A1 A9 G1 G2 M1 M3 P1 P3 or U1 U3 Specifies the Operator ID that is used to iden x operator ID tify the trader or operator to the exchange The maximum rate of orders allowed per TT Gateway This value overrides the user level Per TT Gateway prevent more than X orders per second setting The value entered in the Prevent more than X orders per sec Max Orders Sec ond overrides the User Level setting field displays in Max Orders Sec You can edit the maximum orders per second in this column per TT Gateway for the selected user These fields are available as columns in the Gateway Logins table Use the Show Hide Arrange col umns option to view any hidden columns X_TRADER X_RISK The X_TRADER X_RISK tab applies to X_TRADER and X_RISK users It contains the following sub tabs e X TRADER Properties on page 49 e X TRADER Customer Defaults on page 52 48 TT User Setup User Manual
178. d locking rules refer to the Configuring Password Locking Rules on page 228 topic A Super Administrator Group Administrator or Password Administrator can unlock users either in all available user groups or in a restricted number of user groups To unlock a user 1 From the User Admin menu select Unlock Users Reset Passwords The Unlock Users Reset Passwords window appears 2 Click the row of the user you want to unlock 114 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 6 User Maintenance 3 Click Unlock You have successfully unlocked a user Forcing a User Logoff TT User Setup allows you to force a logged in X_TRADER user s application to shut down immedi ately and restrict that user from logging back in until the Force logoff option is unchecked When a user is forced to logoff that user s license s become available to other users You can force a user logoff from the Edit User window or from the Logged in Users report The Force logoff option disabled when editing multiple users gt To force a user logoff using the Edit User window 1 From the Users window click the user you want to log off and then click Edit 2 On the Main tab in the Login section check the Force logoff option Force logoff Last logged in 2010 08 02 11 06 55 3 When the warning message appears click OK to close any instance of X_TRADER to which the user is logged in or click Cancel to leave the Forc
179. dd Gateways Exchange Traders 3 From the Add Gateways Exchange Traders to TTORDs window select The selected TTORDs are already assigned to the correct exchange traders but I want to add a new gateway and then click Continue The Add New Gateway to TTORDs Based on Existing Gateway window appears Add New Gateway to TTORDs Based on Existing Gateway Select a source gateway The Exchange Traders for this gateway will be reused when assigning TTORDs to the target gateway the gateway you select on the right l Market Exchange Traders filter filter v D54031 TEO 000 D54032 TEO 001 Cancel 4 Select the Gateway s to add to the TTORD and then click OK 5 When prompted to change the TTORD to use the new exchange trader MGT click Yes if the TTORD should be configured to use the new exchange trader MGT or click No if the TTORD should continue to use the original exchange trader MGT 140 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics TT User Setup 2 If aTTORDis already mapped to a Gateway you selected with a different Exchange Trader MGT do you want to change the TTORD to use the new Exchange Trader MGT You have successfully added a gateway to an existing TTORD Note Added gateways are configured with the Available to User setting unchecked by default users cannot trade on the new gateways To make the gateway available to
180. dding Account Level Risk Checking on page 175 e Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 e Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 180 ig p j J Accounts Lo amp 8 New Edit Account Delete Assign to Account Group Account 2 Account Group Member Trader Account Description Y filter filter filter grp8743 ABC TTORDAB ABROWN ABC Alfred Brown ABC TTORDBT BTAYLOR ABC Brenda Taylor ABC TTORDJD JDOE ABC John Doe TT_TRADER44 ICE ACCOUNT Total rows displayed 91 Rows selected 1 Ready Note The Accounts window is a standard data grid except that you cannot copy or mass edit accounts Refer to the Data Grid Functionality on page 25 topic if needed TT User Setup User Manual 153 Trading Technologies International Inc 9 Account Administration Overview Creating Accounts Create accounts from the Accounts window You can also assign product and margin limits to an account or disable trading for an account Note To assign an account to an account group refer to the Assigning One or More Accounts to an Account Group on page 156 topic To create a new account 1 From the User Admin menu select Accounts E Accounts co e Iles Assign to Account Group Account Description Account 2 Account Group Member Group filter filter J filter filter 1091982 grp8
181. ding Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration Note When a Group Administrator or Gateway Login Administrator creates a new user group that user group is added automatically to the list of groups the administrator can manage You have successfully created a new user group Creating User Groups for Order Passing Order passing allows a user group e g execution traders to pass visibility and management of open working orders to another user group Using X_TRADER 7 17 10 or higher the order originator always has full visibility of the current order status and sees all order updates and partial fills that occur while the order is being watched by another user group The two user groups do not need to share their order books the passing action just adds temporary visibility and management of the order to the other group Note Only Super Administrators can configure order passing for a user group A Group Administrator can create user groups but cannot edit or delete them or configure them for order passing However they can view the order passing settings To create a new user group for order passing 1 From the User Admin menu select User Groups TE User Groups CoCa meal User Group Assigned Users Assigned Gateway Logins Assigned Accounts filter w filter w filter w filter lt General gt ADMIN DIRECT ETM ETI10 ETI41 TMXG10800Z4
182. dministrator to User Groups listed below option A list of the available user groups appears 88 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users Available User Groups Can only manage Gateway Logins in the following User Groups User Group 41 Users User Group l Default s Users M filter Chicago AMURPHY ANOVYAK APOULOS BS lt General gt TTSYSTEM FIX Adapter CCDC oO ABROAN CCBO CCDC YZANDER Hew York AGOLD JKLINE LJOHN Rosemont 9 From the Available User Groups list click to select the user group that you want assigned to the Gateway Login Administrator If the group does not exist click the Create button and add it Note Press the Ctrl key to select multiple groups from the list 10 Using the transfer arrow buttons gt gt gt lt lt lt move one or more user group from the Avail able User Groups list to the Can only manage Gateway Logins in the following User Groups list 11 After you have added groups to the Can only manage Gateway Logins in the following User Groups list check the Default s option to assign this group to any gateway logins created by this administrator 12 Click Save Creating a Password Administrator A Password Administrator can Unlocking Users and Resetting a User Password for some user groups or all user groups A Password Administrator can only access the Unlock Users Reset Pass
183. e enable the permission to create direct trader gateway logins and edit the user group of multiple users To set up a group administrator 1 From the User Admin menu select Users Inthe Users window set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields 3 Click New The New User window appears 4 On the Main tab enter the appropriate Login data including Username e g AMURPHY and any additional data in the applicable fields TT User Setup User Manual 291 Trading Technologies International Inc jz 18 Tutorials New User Gateway Logins _TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions Login Username AMURPHY Display name Alan Murphy User group Chicago Select Group Password Confirm password Generate Password Active 5 Click Save 6 Click the TT User Setup Permissions tab and select the Group Administration option Main TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings 292 None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access Group Administrator Can only manage the User Groups listed below Able to manage Gateway Logins Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins If unchecked can only create and edit TTORDSs Ensure the Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins option is selected If the group that this administrator will manage is not in the Available User Groups list click Create The New User G
184. e i database trom siave Warning Message Warning Detected that Slave server went down at ip 172 V Scroll automatically to most recent message Show only Wamings and Errors Ready v UserSetupServer 3076 UserSetupServer 3076 UserSetupServer 3076 _ Login Attempt ver 3076 UserSetupServer 3076 UserSetupServer 4104 UserSetupServer 4104 UserSetupServer 4104 UserSetupServer 3076 Hours of message history to keep for display Note The Server Messages window appears automatically whenever an error is received TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports The Server Messages window displays only messages that occur while the client is running Refer to the server log files in the tt logfiles directory for current and previous log messages 2 To stop the Server Messages window from scrolling automatically to the most recent message at the bottom uncheck the Scroll automatically to most recent message option To display only warnings and errors check the Show only Warnings and Errors checkbox 4 To configure the number of hours of messages the Server Messages window displays set the Hours of message history to keep for display field ta Displaying Running Servers TT User Setup allows you to view all TT User Setup servers currently running This list of servers appears in the TT User Setup Servers window For each trading environment you TT recommends that you install mult
185. e Arrange columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is Find Control Panel useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel Product Limits Window The options available from the Product Limits window context menu include Option Function Accesses the New Product Limit window which allows you to create a product limit by applying values such as Product Additional margin and Maximum order quantity New Accesses the Edit Product Limit window Edit which allows you to change gateway product margin quantity and position values 346 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Option Copy Delete Export to HTML Export to CSV Specify sort criteria Show Hide Arrange columns Find Control Panel Function Accesses the New Product Limit window which allows you to create a product limit that has for example gateway product and prod uct type information similar or identical to that of an existing gateway login Permanently removes the selected product limit Exports data to an HTML file which you can use to generate a report Exports data to an CSV file which you can use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns dialog box for you to select wh
186. e Ctrl key click all the product limit rows for a flavor specific gateway e g Eurex By mega Ame Gateway Login Limits Account Group Limits l New Edt Cop l Delete Mass Copy to Other Gateway l Mass Copy to Other Gateway Logins 42 User Groups Member 2 Group 44 Trader 45 Gateway 41 ProdType Product 7 TTSIMOnly v filter v filter v filter v filter ilter v filter v filter v filter v filter LIORNSON iow Vort TORONY boa Jen e e e mae Jae rons on 0 ere re C MLEE Chicago TTORDJS 001 002 Eurex FUTURE PROUX Chicago TTORDJS 007 007 Eurex FUTURE ema _ TTORDNY FUTURE se Total rows displayed 150 Rows selected 3 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 4 Click Edit 5 On the edit multiple limits warning click OK The Edit Multiple Product Limits window appears 276 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Edit Multiple Product Limits kod a Use Product Limit for TT SIM only Gateway Login TTORDJS 001 001 Margin Gateway Eurex v y Additional margin lt values differ gt Product type lt values differ gt x Maximum order qty 100 7 Pedi P 7 Maximum position lt values differ gt values differ XT 7 8 V Trade Out allowed Ready Note Columns containing various values will di
187. e Help Center Displays the version and copyright informa Abou ETS Setup tion for TT User Setup 24 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Data Grid Functionality TT User Setup uses data grids to display collections of records For example the users that the logged in administrator can view are displayed in the data grid that appears on the Users window Gap Users o gt e New New User View X TRADER X_RISK fields gt Edit Copy Delete Refresh Username 4 Display Name Group 41 Status Force Logoff Locked Out Last Changed Last Change filter v filter filter v filter w filter v filter v filter v filter ANOWAK Adam Nowak Chicago Active No 2010 09 10 08 54 37 TTSYSTEM APOULOS Alexander Poulos Chicago Active No 2010 08 10 10 22 06 TISYSTEM BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor Chicago Active No 2012 05 29 12 01 25 TTSYSTEM CMARTINEZ Carlos Martinez Chicago Active No 2010 09 17 11 37 26 TISYSTEM DMILLER David Miller Chicago Active No 2010 09 17 15 37 19 TISYSTEM v lt m Total rows displayed 44 Rows selected 1 V Show inactive users Ready To edit multiple records just selectthem and click Edit From most data grids you can complete the following tasks Creating Editing and Deleting Records Editing and Deleting Multiple Records Mass Editing Applying Filters Sorting by a Column Showin
188. e a New User Edit User X_TRADER mode X TRADER or X_TRADER Proper X TRADER 7 6 0 X TRADER Pro EL TT User Setup User Manual 357 Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Field Avoid orders that cross Quoting RFQ allowed Wholesale trades allowed Staged order creation allowed Staged order manage ment allowed Direct Market Access DMA order cre ation allowed Feature Allows the user to toggle the Avoid Orders That Cross option in X TRADER Allows the user to toggle the Quoting option in X_TRADER Allows the user to toggle the Wholesale option in X TRADER Allows the user to create staged orders Allows the user to claim and work staged orders Allows the user to create DMA orders Allows the user to Location New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User X_TRADER Proper ties tab New User Edit User Minimum Version Supported X TRADER 7 7 0 X TRADER 7 8 0 X TRADER 7 8 0 X TRADER 7 11 Synthetic SE 7 2 X TRADER 7 11 Synthetic SE 7 2 X TRADER 7 11 Machine gun orders toggle the Machine X TRADER Proper X TRADER 7 11 allowed Gun option in tes tab X TRADER 358 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International
189. e a planned future release Future releases are subject to change Check the product s release notes for details 2 Use the transfer arrow buttons gt lt gt gt lt lt to select the FIX Adapter Server users to which each client can connect For our example move the CCOR Server from the Available Fix Adapters list to the This FIX Client user can connect to the following FIX Adapter Servers list 3 If checked the Enabling Debug Logging for Orders and Enabling Debug Logging for Prices options prompt the selected TT FIX Adapter Server to generate verbose debugging information Because a significant increase in the log file size will affect performance only check these options when troubleshooting 4 Save and close the Users window 5 Repeat this procedure for each FIX Adapter Client user 6 Continue to the next section Running the TT user Setup Diagnostic Checks Use the Diagnostics Check utility after adding or modifying users to confirm that all of the data in TT user Setup is consistent and valid Invalid data can cause FIX Adapter Client Logins to fail To run the Diagnostic Check 1 From the TT user Setup Control Panel open the User Admin menu and click Diagnostic Checks The Diagnostic Checks window appears 2 Click Configure diagnostic check 3 From the Configure Diagnostics window check any FIX Adapter related options L M and N and then click OK TT User Setup User Manual 317 Trading Technologie
190. e following e From the User Admin menu select Product Limits e From the Edit User window select the Gateway Logins tab and click View Edit Prod uct Limits The Product Limits window appears Note Accessing limits through the Edit User window displays only product limits that corre spond with a TTORD or Exchange Trader that have been assigned to that user 2 Highlight one or more product limit rows 3 Click Mass Copy to Other Gateway The Select Gateway window appears 4 Highlight a gateway to which the product limits will be copied and then click Select TT User Setup copies each selected product limit to the selected gateway TT User Setup User Manual 173 Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration 174 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Account and Account Group Risk Administra tion Adding Account Level Risk Checking At the account level you can configure product specific position limits product specific order size lim its and TT Gateway specific margin limits The user and gateway login s risk settings still apply but orders submitted with an account will also be checked against the limits of the account Note When an account is added to an account group any account based risk settings are removed and the account group s risk settings are enforced instead To manage risk for an account group refer to Adding Account Group Level Risk Checking on pa
191. e logoff feature unchecked 4 On the Edit User window click Save You have successfully logged off a user The user is unable to log on until you uncheck the Force logoff option gt To force a user logoff using the Logged in Users report 1 From the Reports menu select Logged in Users The Logged in Users window appears 2 To refresh the window click Refresh On the By User tab select a logged in user and then click Force Logoff 4 When the warning message appears click OK to close any instance of X_TRADER to which the user is logged in U TT User Setup User Manual 115 Trading Technologies International Inc 6 User Maintenance You have successfully logged off a user The user is unable to log on until you uncheck the Force logoff option on the Edit User window Activating and Deactivating Users Inactive users cannot log in using their usernames but their information remains available gt To activate or deactivate a user 1 From the New User or Edit User window check the Active option to activate the user or uncheck the Active option to deactivate the user Active 2 Click Save You have successfully activated or deactivated a user To display inactive users 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 Check the Show inactive users option You have successfully displayed inactive users Configuring and Running Diagnostic Checks TT User Setup allows you to run diagnostic checks t
192. e not cur rently assigned to the user gt 1 Access the Gateway Logins tab for an X_TRADER user and then click Assign Existing Log ins To assign Gateway Logins to a selected user The Assign Gateway Logins window appears listing the gateway logins currently not assigned to the selected user t Assign Gateway Logins nc C fsa Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway a4 Users Addto Guardian Group Permissions Comments filter filter filter I filter v filter filter MA filter filter 8C222 LL3 JL3 CBOT B MKOH Singapore ABCCD UBA 001 EUREXPF amp London ABCCD UMK 001 Eurex EMASON KAMIR London AUUS LDV BTec Chicago Az44 BPS Eurex Chicago London Singap B5002 SYG CBOT G Singapore lt Total rows displayed 91 Rows selected 0 Hide TTORDs Hide Exchange Traders Cancel Ready m o edit multiple records just selectthem and click Edit Note To display only exchange traders check the Hide TTORDs option 2 Select one or more rows and then click Assign Note Click New to create a new gateway login You can assign any logins you create to the user The login is assigned to the selected user s 3 Click Save Allowing or Blocking Product Groups You can allow or block any of the listed product groups for this user For more information refer to the Allowing or Blocking Product Groups for a FIX Adapter User on page 112 topic Note When a new user is created
193. e shows how the newly created gateway logins display in the New User or Edit User window 304 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways Edit Remove Assign Existing Logins View Edit Product Limits Member 41 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway 4 AvailtoUser Exch Trader Account s Addto Guardian Credit per MGT filter filter filter 4 filter filter filter filter M ffilter s filter TTADM KAX VIEVY CME A No TTADM XXX VIEVY Eurex A No TTADM XXX VIEVY LIFFE C No lt Ti Total rows displayed 3 Rows selected 0 Be Otel 5 Continue to the next section Assigning a TT FIX Adapter Server to a FIX Adapter Client User To assign the TT FIX Adapter servers to which a FIX Adapter client user can connect 1 On the New User or Edit User window click the FIX Adapter tab If a version requirement message appears click OK Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions 5 FIx Adapter Account Defaults FIX Adapter role Client v Staged order creation allowed C Enable del client or server Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed C Enable Available FIX Adapters This FIX client user can connect to the following
194. e user groups associated with any users mapped to those gateway logins consequently you only need to assign groups to gateway logins for users that do not have gateway logins assigned The rules for inheriting user group permissions include the following When a user is mapped to a gateway login the gateway login automatically inherits the user s user group User groups inherited by a gateway login change if the parent is changed For example when a user s user group changes the inherited user group for the user s gateway login also changes A Direct Trader gateway login is automatically assigned any user group of a TTORD to which it is mapped For example if an account 123 is assigned to a gateway login TTORDTT001001 and the gateway login is mapped to a user JDOE who belongs to a user group XT Traders the account 123 and gate way login TTORDTT001001 become part of the user group XT Traders A Group Administrator who can manage the XT Traders user group can also manage the JDOE user the 123 account and gateway login TTORDTT001001 You can either assign Groups to a gateway login or you can assign gateway logins to a group Assigning User Groups to a Gateway Login To assign a user group to a gateway login manually 1 From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins 2 Select a gateway login row and then click Edit The Edit Gateway Login window appears with the Gateway Login Info tab selected 3 Click the Group Per
195. each selected product limit to the selected gateway in the appropriate account TT User Setup User Manual 183 Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration 184 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc User Level Risk Checking Adding User Level Risk Checking You can configure risk settings on a per user basis in addition to the risk settings configured for individ ual gateway logins This allows you to set overall credit and currency settings that apply to all the user s trades using any or all of the gateway logins The gateway login s risk settings still apply but the trader will have an additional overall credit restriction Note User level risk checking requires X_TRADER 7 8 or later or FIX Adapter 7 6 or later The user level risk checking fields and options include Credit Specifies the sum of money available at the start of a trading session which can be affected by a trader s margin and P amp L Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited Currency Specifies the currency for the Credit field e g USD United States Dollar Trading allowed Determines whether a user can trade Use P amp L risk algorithm Determines whether or not to use the P amp L risk algorithm to risk check this user The P L based on setting in X_TRADER defaults to Risk Algorithm and is uneditable If the Use P amp L risk algorithm is not checked risk checking uses the Last T
196. eate more than one account default with the same key values and TT FIX Adapter server uses the match with the highest priority To define the order in which TT FIX Adapter server prioritizes account defaults follow the procedure below To prioritize account defaults 1 On the New User or Edit User window select the FIX Adapter tab and then select the Account Defaults tab 2 Highlight the row of the account default you d like to give the highest priority 3 From the buttons on the window s right click Move to Top Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions FIX Adapter Account Defaults f New Edit f Copy Delete Copy from user 41 Account 42 Market Product Type Account Ty Clearing Acct FFT2 filte filter e ilter v filter x filter filter 1 TT45678 Move to Bottom Total rows displayed 3 Rows selected 1 C Restrict user from overriding Account Defaults View FIX Adapter Client fields l Add New The highlighted row becomes the first row displayed is assigned a number one in the first col umn and is given top matching priority 4 To prioritize additional rows click the row and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons You have successfully prioritized account defaults Example Account Defaults Order Matching Assume an administrator configures two FIX Adapter Client users with the same set of account defaults but in a different order If e
197. ece ett e eee n en ees 348 User s Gateway Login Attributes Window 0 cece 349 Accounts WIMdOW voere bended ne adhd nk RH ARAMA ERA OR EERE 349 User Groups WINdOW a2 ake gah a Helse oe Vee eaee Nea eee ER eeae Meee eee 350 FIX Adapter Account Defaults nannan nnana anane 351 Unlock Users Reset Passwords Window 0 c cece eee etn eee n tenes 352 Audit Trail Environment Server Status Reports TT User Setup Servers and View Connect ed Clients WINdOWS facia he ea pean eR DARA A ate he Ree SKA ae ene ea 353 Shortcut Keys oddee wicked obs eb oad teed eee edb oademddss erento dansates 353 Pie Meni cate hg wee ean ve peo en se 353 User Admin Men 5 444066 e244 48 etratt HERE AGRE EREEEE SAREE RAKE 354 Server Admin Menu o on anann nananana aoe eed dee de eed asa pated weeds 354 Reports Menu is cai hp d a eG iira EnEn EREE ENNER EERE EREKE R MRR RS 355 Help Men 54 4 cvcaveig es cate dias iewddies Cad C SS AGES cee e ea e 355 TT User Setup Feature and TT Product Compatibility 0 0000 0000 eee 356 TT User Setup User Manual viii Trading Technologies International Inc Getting Started What s New in TT User Setup 7 X 7 4 40 Enhancements This release adds support for the Order Passing feature which allows members of one user group to pass one or more orders to members of another user group For more information about Order Passing in X_ TRADER refer to the X_ TRADER Help For information about
198. ecommend checking the Account changes on fills allowed option until this user is using X_TRADER 7 17 or later If a user with a pre 7 17 version of X_TRADER is allowed to change an account Account changes on fills allowed on a fill the account number on the fill will not be updated in all TT products including the gateways where account based risk check ing is done This could lead to discrepancies between what is displayed in client applica tions and how risk is actually being calcu lated Note When the Account changes on fills allowed option is checked users with X_TRADER 7 17 or later can modify the account on a fill and this update will be pro cessed as a part of account based risk on the gateways Note that no risk check actually takes place on the modification therefore changing the account could cause an account to go over its limits However any subsequent orders will be risk checked based on the mod ified fills Gateway Logins 46 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Use the Gateway Logins tab to assign gateway logins or to view or edit product limits This tab appears for X_TRADER X_RISK and FIX Adapter users Buttons Fields New Edit Remove Assign Existing Logins View Edit Product Limits Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gate ways Avail to User Avail to FIX Client Auto Login Description Creates a new gateway lo
199. eld is used for risk checking For more information refer to the TT User Login and Risk Administration Refer ence Guide Max Position The sum of all the long contracts and the sum Max Long Short of all the short contracts on a given product Whether the trader can exceed the maximum order quantity and available credit limits to reduce his or her risk for the specified con tract Trade Out allowed The date of the most recent update to a given Last Changed product limit The username of the administrator who most B By recently updated the given product limit CreatedDate The date the product limit was created A unique identifier for a product limit The ID is used in the Audit Trail to distinguish prod ID uct limit changes It can help identify a prod uct limit after the product name for example is changed Group Permissions The Group Permissions tab allows you to assign the user groups that are permitted for this gateway login Use the transfer buttons gt lt lt lt to add users to the Gateway Login permitted in the follow ing User Groups section You can also click Create to create a new user group 130 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics To allow a group administrator to edit and directly assign this gateway login check the Group Admins can assign this Gateway Login directly to users without using a TTORD option If
200. elect FIX Adapter Server fields as the View View FIX Adapter Server fields When you create or edit a user the New User or Edit User window includes the following tabs FIX Adapter FIX Adapter role FIX Adapter Server client or server FIX Adapter Client Fields To create a FIX Adapter Client user select FIX Adapter Client fields as the View 40 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration View FIX Adapter Client fields When you create or edit a user the New User or Edit User window includes the following tabs FIX Adapter Account Defaults FX Adapter rai client or server TT User Setup Admin Fields To create a Super Administrator Group Administrator Gateway Login Administrator Password Administrator or view only user select TT User Setup Admin fields as the View View TT User Setup Admin fields When you create or edit a user the New User or Edit User window includes the following tabs TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings New User and Edit User Window Fields This topic describes all of the New User and Edit User window tabs buttons and fields The available tabs and associated windows include the following TT User Setup User Manual 41 Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration e Main on page 42 e Gateway Logins on page 46 e X TRADER X_RISK on page
201. email was received 8 Click Save 94 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc User Administration FIX Adapter TT FIX Adapter and TT User Setup Overview As of TT User Setup 7 3 1 administrators use TT User Setup rather than the FIX Adapter Configuration Tool FACT to manage both TT FIX Adapter Servers and FIX Adapter Clients TT FIX Adapter Server Users You configure TT FIX Adapter Servers as users in TT User Setup You also define which gateway log ins FIX Adapter Server users use to connect to the TT Gateways Note Gateway logins are the MGTs risk limits and accounts You can configure TT FIX Adapter Servers as either Order Routing TT FIX Adapters or Drop Copy TT FIX Adapters TT FIX Adapter Client Users You configure FIX Adapter client users as users in TT User Setup You also configure which TT FIX Adapters they may connect to and which gateway logins they use to connect the TT FIX Adapt ers Migrating from the FIX Adapter Configuration Tool FACT to TT User Setup The following table describes the most important functionality removed from FACT Field Gateways Gateway Login Parameters Rollover Times FIX Sessions Session Login Order Routing Credentials Where it was in FACT Global Gateway Connection Settings or Individual Gate way Connection Settings Individual Gateway Settings Individual FLX Sessions Individual FIX Sessions in Order Routing co
202. en t fully compatible with some TTORD Order Book Order Ranke Gateway Logins Gateway Logins Gateway Logins Gateway Logins Gateway Logins FXAdapter aaa aR g FIX Adapter S FIX Adapter m Select All Unselect All 3 Select the diagnostics that TT User Setup will automatically detect and report 4 Click Save Enabling and Configuring X_STUDY and FMDS System Settings X_STUDY uses the FMDS server to obtain historical data to display in a chart for a given contract The X _STUDY FMDS settings available in TT User Setup allow you to designate or change the FMDS server to which one or more user s X_ STUDY s connects In addition you can set up a second ary FMDS server to which X_ STUDY connects if the primary server is down X_STUDY and FMDS must be enabled and configured at a system level before it can be enabled and configured at a user level To enable and configure X_ STUDY and FMDS for a user refer to the Con figuring X_ STUDY and FMDS on page 80 topic in the User Administration section TT User Setup User Manual 233 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Note This option is only available for X_TRADER version 7 7 3 or later and X_STUDY 7 0 3 or later gt To enable X_STUDY FMDS functionality for this TT User Setup system 1 From the Server Admin menu select System Settings 2 On the System Settings window
203. ent and previous log messages 2 To stop the Server Messages window from scrolling automatically to the most recent message at the bottom uncheck the Scroll automatically to most recent message option To display only warnings and errors check the Show only Warnings and Errors checkbox 4 To configure the number of hours of messages the Server Messages window displays set the Hours of message history to keep for display field i System Settings Introducing System Settings Use the System Settings window to configure server properties like e Concurrent Logins Limits the number of times a single username can be logged in concur rently e Password Locking Prevents users from logging in after certain limits are surpassed i e incor rect login attempts or days of inactivity An administrator can configure a message for a user whose login attempt fails for any reason e Password Rules Defines the level of password complexity required for all users changing their password the number of unique passwords required before reusing a prior password and the length of time a password is valid 226 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration e Automatic Diagnostics Determines which potential problems TT User Setup Diagnostic Checks automatically searches for e X STUDY and FMDS Settings Allows an administrator to enable or disable X_STUDY and its related FMDS settings Note
204. er s customer accounts often use groups Traders who do not want to share an order book use a unique Group Specifies the user specific identifier for the individual trader Exchanges might have spe cific requirements regarding the Trader ID EG portion as well For example on CME a Trader ID can be used to uniquely identify each trader within a firm Accounts Use the Accounts section to assign or remove accounts The Accounts section has the following fields TT User Setup User Manual 127 Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Description The account number that a trader uses when entering orders An account number is required for orders submitted with Account s TTORD gateway logins You can also assign an account number to a trader s customer default s refer to Creating and Managing X_TRADER Customer Defaults on page 73 An optional description of the account num Description escriptio ber When you click Assign Accounts the Assign Accounts to Gateway Login window appears From this window you can select available accounts by moving an account to the Selected Accounts list or you can Create a new account Product Limits The Product Limits section contains the following fields Field Description The server a user logs into and trades on using Gateway an assigned gateway login e g CME A The name of the product that the
205. er filter v filter filter 4091982 arp8743 t ABC_AB ABC ABROWN ABC Alfred Brown ABC_BT ABC BTAYLOR ABC Brenda Taylor ABC JDOE ABC John Doe TT_TRADER44 ICE ACCOUNT Total rows displayed 91 Rows selected 1 Ready 2 From the Accounts window select one or more accounts to assign to a group and then click Assign to Account Group This option is also available from the right click menu You are about to assign one or more accounts to an account group In doing so any existing risk parameters associated with these accounts will be lost and they will inherit the risk parameters of the selected account group hcan Go oa A Ne Ready 3 From the Assign Account Group window select an account group and then click OK If the account group does not exist click New and create an account group refer to the Creating Account Groups on page 160 topic if needed The accounts will lose any existing risk configu ration and inherit the risk parameters of the assigned groups 4 To remove an account from an account group select one or more accounts and then select Remove from account group Note To assign risk limits to the account group refer to the Adding Account Group Level Risk Check ing on page 176 Note To determine which accounts are assigned to a group you can either filter the Account Group column in the Accounts window or open the Edit Account Group window and view the list of Associ
206. er Groups window appears TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials User Group Assigned Users Assigned Gateway Logins Assigned Accounts filter v filter filter v filter lt General gt TTSYSTEM Chicago AB BOB ABCSYSTEM ABROWN ABCCD1001 AUUSLDWWABTT 001 1091981 1091982 12 London EMASON KAMIR MPATEL WROSE ABCCDUBW001 ABCCDUMK001 12345 ABCCD a ABCCD b New York AGOLD JKLINE LJOHNSON MB ABCCD1001 ABCCD1002 CM123 00099487 2435234534 AA Singapore MKOH MLIM STAN 8C222LL3JL3 AZ44BP5JP5 B50 8C222 a abc123 Abc1234 CROBINSON JLEE JSIMMS NWA ABCCD1002 CME001001 D5400 AACME15 CBOT2222 CM TT r Total rows displayed 13 Rows selected 0 Ready 18 Click the Chicago user group and click Assign Gateway Logins The Assign Gateway Logins to User Group Chicago window appears Note The Assign Gateway Logins section shows that you inherit any gateway logins mapped to the users you added to the user group This rule also applies to accounts Member Group Trader 3 Directly Assignable to Users Member 1 Group Trader 4 Directly Assignable to Users filter v filter w filter T ABC cD 001 No p AUUS LDW WABTT No AZ44 JP5 No 001 No 112 No 001 No 002 No 001 No 001 No 001 No 001 No 19 Assign additional gateway logins and click Save 20 To test the group administrator s
207. er Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials mel m P Gp New User Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK FIX Adapter TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings Product Group Permissions XTRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties x_STUDY FMDS Contract Session Prices CSP access allowed E Instant Messages IM access allowed Manual Fill MF access allowed Manual Fill MF access allowed Start of Day SOD access allowed Restrict X_RISK administrator to publishing MF SODs to Accounts within the User Groups listed below View Al fields Save and Add New Close 8 Click Save Note Selecting any of the X_RISK options allows Mark to monitor risk via X_RISK If you allow Mark to publish manual fills Manual Fill MF access allowed or start Of Day records Start of Day SOD access allowed you can restrict Mark to publishing only to accounts that exist in specified user groups by checking the Restrict X_RISK administrator to publishing option 9 Select the Gateway Logins tab 10 Click New The New Gateway Login window appears Note You may instead select to click the Assign Existing Logins button For a detailed descrip tion of that procedure refer to the Assigning Gateway Logins to a User Through the Users Window on page 83 topic 11 Enter a Member Group and Trader MGT
208. ersion 4 Licensed Markets Connected To Last Logged In AMURPHY ANOWAK APOULOS 172 31 217 84 172 31 216 140 172 31 218 205 7111 86 10 7 11 1 86 2 7111 86 6 X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro Total rows displayed 33 2011 08 22 13 53 09 2011 08 22 15 25 22 2011 08 16 15 40 03 Ready e Use the By Gateway tab to determine which users are connected to which gateways using which MGTs Client IP 42 Username 42 ProductName Version Gateway 4 Member 45 Group 46 Trader a7 Server IP User Group filter v filter filter vy filter w filter v filter v filter w filter X filter filter X 002 002 002 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 RADAMS RADAMS RADAMS AMURPHY AMURPHY AMURPHY AMURPHY AMURPHY AMURPHY X_TRADER X_TRADER X_TRADER X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro X_TRADER Pro 7111 86 74111 86 SSE TTSIM Xetra C BTec CBOT C CME C TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS TTORDTS 009 009 009 009 009 009 009 009 009 009 7111 86 7 111 886 7 11 4 86 7111 86 7111 86 7111 86 7111 86 7 11 1 86 Eurex B ICE_IPE C MONTREAL C AMURPHY SGX C Total rows displayed 0 Chicago Chicago Chicago 172 31 100 10 172 31 100 35 172 31 100 21 172 31 100 2 172 31 100 3 172 31 100 4 172 31 100 6 172 31 100 12 172 31 100
209. et Access DMA order cre ation allowed Feature Enables X_STUDY FMDS for the user when X_STUDY FMDS is enabled for the system Overrides the FMDS system settings with the FMDS user set tings Enables X_STUDY FMDS for the system Allows the FIX client to claim and work staged orders Allows the FIX client to create DMA orders Location New User Edit User X STUDY FMDS tab New User Edit User X STUDY FMDS tab System Settings X_STUDY FMDS Settings tab New User Edit User FIX Adapter tab cli ent role New User Edit User FIX Adapter tab cli ent role Minimum Version Supported X TRADER 7 7 3 X STUDY 7 3 0 X TRADER 7 7 3 X_STUDY 7 3 0 X TRADER 7 7 3 X STUDY 7 3 0 FIX Adapter 7 8 Synthetic SE 7 2 FIX Adapter 7 8 Synthetic SE 7 2 Adds debug mes Enable debug logging sages generated by nae cli FIX Adapter 7 6 for orders the Order Server to bal P note FIX Adapter the log files au 7 8 and later ignore this setting Adds debug mes Enable debug logging sages generated by piensa cli FIX Adapter 7 6 for prices the Price Server to P note FIX Adapter the log files ent role 7 8 and later ignore this setting 360 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Field Maximum long short Mandatory Login Time in force Order type Order restriction Feature Sets the maximum number of contracts the trader can be lo
210. eturns to the License Setup window 4 Click Publish this License 6 When TT User Setup alerts you that the license file was published click OK Migrating Users to a New Gateway TT User Setup includes a tool to migrate users from one gateway to another This is useful when you are adding another flavor of a gateway to your environment i e adding a CME B Gateway as a backup in an environment that contains a CME A Gateway or if a gateway is rebranded i e migrating users that connect to a CBOT A Gateway to a CME A Gateway When you migrate users all data related to the source gateway is copied for all the users that are mapped to the source gateway e Customer Defaults Any gateway specific customer defaults are copied and saved as a cus tomer default for the target gateway For example if the user had a customer default that applied to the source CME A Gateway then the customer default is copied and applied to the target CME Gateway Market specific customer defaults are unaltered Customer 42 Sel Market 4 Product Type 4 Product 44 Account Acct Give Up FFT2 TIF Type filter v i filter v filter F filter filter ff vi filter x filter x filter M file x filter S E C a DEFAULT gt CME ACT333 Ad GTD Limit e Product Limits Any product limits that apply to the source gateway are copied and saved as product limits that apply to the target gateway For example p
211. ew usernames and passwords and configure various contact information user login properties X_RISK permissions X_TRADER customer defaults product limits and product group permissions Administrators also assign usernames to gateway logins as needed Users then log into TT applications with this username Gateway Login Administration Gateway logins consist of Member Group and Trader IDs MGTs and the corresponding gateways These MGTs can be used to log into a gateway exchange Administrators assign usernames created in TT User Setup to gateway logins MGTs and associated gateways Users log into TT applications such as X_TRADER with the unique username and pass word created by the Administrator Risk administration allows you to set limits on maximum order quantity additional margin maximum position etc as well as establish parameters for credit ignoring P amp L allowing trading currency etc Account Account Group Administration Administrators create accounts which they can assign to an account group Per account or account group administrators can determine which products are tradable specify various limits on maximum order size and position per product and configure additional margin per product Tiered Administration TT User Setup supports several levels of Administrator permissions e Super Administrator Provides complete access to TT User Setup functionality e Group Administrator Provides permission to view
212. eways The Gateways section on the Gateway Login Info tab appears when the MGT entered is not a TTORD It lists the Gateways assigned to this gateway login To add additional Gateways click Add Gateways which opens the Select Gateway window and then select a Gateway to add Exchange Traders The Exchange Traders section on the Gateway Login Info tab appears when the MGT entered is a TTORD It lists the exchange traders mapped to and from this gateway login You can map exchange traders to this gateway login using the Map to Exchange Traders button From the Map to Exchange Traders window you can also Create new exchange traders 126 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Description Specifies the TT Server that typically con Gateway nects to a given exchange A trader connects to a Gateway to trade Specifies the broadest type of ID The Mem ber may identify one of the following e The exchange on which the user trades The firm with which the individual user is associated Member e A branch office Member content depends on exchange spe cific requirements as described in the Trader Login Requirements table in the 7T User Login and Risk Administration Reference Guide Identifies traders who share an order book i e traders with the same Member and Group can access orders from a common Group order book Brokers who manage each oth
213. formation refer to the Editing the Currency Exchange Rates topic Creating a gateway login that automatically applies to all gateways Added the Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways option to the User window s Gateway Logins tab Checking this option allows you to create a gateway login that can log into all available gate ways This is especially useful if setting up a Universal Login for Historical Fill Servers for example so that fills are always captured for all gateways For more information refer to the Generating a Gateway Login for all Gateways topic Configuring Product Group Permissions for CME Added product filtering for CME product groups CME product groups automatically appear on the Product Group Permissions tab and are allowed by default For more information refer to the Allowing or Blocking Product Groups topic 7 4 Enhancements Product Group Permissions Added Product Group Permissions settings that administrators use to allow or block user access to product groups in supported markets also referred to as Product Filtering For example an administrator can allow a trader to trade and access market data for ICE US Futures but prevent a trader from trading or accessing market data for OTC GAS products For more information refer to the Allowing or Blocking Product Groups topic Note The following TT software versions and later support Product Group Permissions FIX Adapter 7 6 1 X_ TRA
214. g Hiding and Arranging Columns Generating an HTML or CSV Report from any Window Creating Editing and Deleting Records Most of the TT User Setup windows allow you to create edit and delete records using similar methods This topic describes those basic methods Creating a New Record This procedure describes how to create a new user record from the Users window The same techniques can be used to create records in the Gateway Logins Product Limits Customer Defaults Account Default List and Version Rules windows To create a new record TT User Setup User Manual 25 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started 1 Open a data grid window for example Users i Users Fo lfatn New New User View X TRADER XRISK fields v Edt Copy Delete Refresh Username Display Name Group 41 Status Force Logoff Locked Out Last Changed Last Change filter v filter v filter v filter w filter v filter v filter filte ANOWAK Adam Nowak Chicago No 2010 09 10 08 54 37 TTSYSTEM APOULOS Alexander Poulos Chicago No 2010 08 10 10 22 06 TISYSTEM BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor Chicago No 2012 05 29 12 01 25 TISYSTEM CMARTINEZ Carlos Martinez Chicago i i 2010 09 17 11 37 26 TTSYSTEM David Miller Chicago i 2010 09 17 15 37 19 TTSYSTEM r Total rows displayed 44 Rows selected 1 V Show inactive users Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click
215. ge 176 Configuring product limits per account also allows you to perform the following tasks which are not available for Gateway Logins e Disable trading per product to easily prevent trading on one or more specific products without having to specifically define each individual product that is allowed to be traded e Configure a maximum position limit of zero thereby limiting trading to spreads To add risk checking to an account refer to the following topics e Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 e Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 180 Note To prevent a user from updating the account number on a fill make sure the Account changes on fills allowed option is unchecked the default setting for new users When applying account based risk checking TT does not recommend checking the Account changes on fills allowed option until the users are using X_TRADER 7 17 or later If users are not using X_TRADER 7 17 then account numbers on fills are not updated in all TT products this includes the gateways where account based risk checking is done This could lead to discrepancies between what is displayed in client applications and how risk is actually being calculated When the Account changes on fills allowed option is checked users who are using X_TRADER 7 17 or later can modify the account on a fill and this update will be processed as a part of account based risk o
216. ge 95 topic Determines whether the user is allowed create staged orders This option is unchecked by default Determines whether the user is allowed to claim and work staged orders This option is checked by default Adds debug messages generated by the Order Server Price Server to the log files Note Because the log file size may increase significantly and performance may be affected only enable these fields when trou bleshooting the connection between FIX Adapter and either Server Note TT FIX Adapter 7 8 and later ignores the Enable debug logging for orders setting The client can connect to these FIX Adapter servers Account Defaults The Account Defaults tab has the following buttons and fields TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 59 2 User Administration New Edit Copy Delete Buttons Fields Copy from User Restrict user from overriding Account Creates a new account default Refer the Set ting Up an Account Default on page 104 topic for more information Copies the selected account default Deletes the selected account default s Copies an existing account default from another user within your environment Description Forces the trader to use only these account Derails defaults The data grid has the following fields Description Type Priority Key The customer account num Account ber Enter an asterisk t
217. gin Refer the Cre ating a New Gateway Login through the Users Window on page 82 topic for more informa tion Removes the selected gateway login s Assigns existing gateway logins to the user Refer to the Assigning Gateway Logins to a User Through the Users Window on page 83 topic for more information Accesses all product limits for the given user Refer to the Creating Product Limits for Gateway Logins on page 168 topic Enables the Member Group Trader fields which allow you to configure an MGT that can log into all available gateways This is especially useful if setting up a Universal Login for something like Historical Fill Server for example This way you can ensure that HFS always logs into all gateways For more information about administrator gate way logins refer to the Administrator Log ins section of the TT User Login and Risk Administration guide Indicates whether a user has access to a given gateway login after performing a universal login Indicates whether a FIX Client has access to a given gateway login after performing a uni versal login Specifies if a user of a specific gateway login will be automatically logged into the associ ated gateways TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 47 2 User Administration Buttons Fields Description Specifies whether a user of a specific gateway Mandatory Login login will be automatically logge
218. gins based on IP address 1 E Force logoff Last logged in GTC GTDate orders allowed TT API allowed V Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed f applicable V Account changes on fills allowed 3 E g User Defined Fields User Defined 1 lt values differ gt v User Defined 2 X User Defined 3 X User Defined 4 v User Defined 5 X User Defined 6 I a a a E E Contact Country lt values differ gt E Address lt values differ gt City lt values differ gt State Province lt values differ gt Zip lt values differ gt T Email lt values differ gt Phone number lt values differ gt o Organization lt values differ gt yf Customer in ICE Product Groups Report User Level Risk V Trading allowed Credit 5000 El m Use P amp L risk algorithm Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price El Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second V E Overide credit for TT SIM TT SIM credt Unlimited E 13 14 15 16 17 294 From the User group field click Select Group The Select User Group window appears Highlight the Chicago option and click Select On the Edit Multiple Users window click Save and then Close Close the Users window From the User Admin menu select User Groups The Us
219. hat list potential set up issues based on the informa tion available in the TT User Setup database For example Gateway Logins missing Accounts and Missing Product Limits Configuring Diagnostics gt To configure the diagnostic checks 1 From the User Admin menu select Diagnostic Checks 2 Click the Click to run diagnostic checks link 116 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 6 User Maintenance Run Refresh Diagnostic Checks B Missing Product Limits explain this 1 Gateway Login has Gateway but no Product Limits for that Gateway TTORDCD 001 001 CBOT E G Users with Customer Default Markets missing corresponding Gateway Login Markets explain this 2 User has Customer Default for Market CBOT without corresponding CBOT Gateway Login BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor H Users with TTORD Accounts missing corresponding Customer Default Accounts explain this 3 User BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor Account TT45678 belonging to Gateway Login TTORDJS 001 001 is not associated with any Customer Default I Users with Customer Default Accounts missing from User s TTORDs explain this 4 User DMILLER David Miller has Customer Default with Account 1091982 that is not associated with a TTORD O Order Books with Users with mismatched Gateways explain this 5 Gateways differ for users in Order Book TTORDIJS 001 Ready s Note TT User Setup does not display records that inc
220. he trader s TTORD to Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE e Ifa trader uses an Exchange Trader gateway login or uses multiple TTORD gateway logins to connect to a set of TT Gateways you can assign new Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE gateway logins to the trader This tutorial will show you how to establish an Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE gateway login and then how to configure a user to connect to the Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE using that gateway login One procedure describes how to configure a user that has an existing TTORD and the other pro cedure describes how to configure a user that does not have an existing TTORD gt To establish an Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE gateway login As an administrator you create Autospreader SE and Synthetic SE gateway logins You can allow multi ple traders to share an order book by assigning gateway logins that have the same Member and Group IDs Note Traders who want to share view and modify orders working on an Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Server must log onto the same Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE with the same Member and Group IDs and log onto the same TT Gateway s with the same Member and Group IDs TT recommends establishing a naming convention so that you can quickly differentiate between gate way logins assigned by the exchange and synthetic gateway logins which can be made up for Auto spreader SE or Synthetic SE For example e TTSSE SE1 001 e TTSSE SE1 002 e TTSSE
221. he value is All The exchange to which this license applies If this field is blank the license applies to all exchanges for the product Used by server products to specify the IP address that the server product is allowed to run on 3 When you are finished viewing the licenses close this window Or to load and publish licenses continue to the next topic Loading and Publishing Licenses Before traders can use the TT Trading System you must install the appropriate license file Note A TT Gateway does not appear in Guardian until its license has been loaded Note If you replace a pre existing license file with a newer one i e you ve added new components to your network such as X_TRADER workstations TT recommends that you verify that the filename of the new license matches the filename of the old license file and the date of the license file is more recent than the old license file ie To load the license in TT User Setup 1 Copy the LMT dll and license text files to a folder that is accessible to this TT User Setup cli ent 2 Log onto TT User Setup as a Super Administrator 3 From the Server Admin menu select License Setup The License Setup window appears TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 221 16 Server Administration 4 Click Load License File navigate to the folder that contains the license files and then click Open TT User Setup r
222. he Allowed option Updating the Supported Product Groups List The TT User Setup software includes the available product groups at the time the software was released If a supported exchange adds or removes a product group or if TT adds support for a new market your TAM will send you a file that will update your list of supported product groups gt To manually allow or block product groups 1 Copy the file you received from your TAM to the tt config directory on each Master and Slave TT User server in your system 2 Restart the TT User Setup service 120 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Gateway Login Administration Basics Gateway Logins Overview Use the Gateway Logins window to create or edit gateway logins Gateway logins are the Member GroupTrader IDs used to log into TT Gateways Each can have their own account numbers and risk lim its and multiple gateway logins can be assigned to a single user To create or edit a gateway login refer to Creating a New Gateway Login on page 135 You can customize the Gateway Logins window by hiding TTORDs hiding exchange traders and expanding or collapsing the Gateway Exchange Trader view Refer to Customizing the Gateway Log ins Window on page 131 for more information From the Gateway Logins window you can also assign users to existing gateway logins Refer to the Assigning Users to a Gateway Login on page 144 topic Note T
223. he Gateway Logins window is a standard data grid with additional options that allow you to hide TTORDs hide Exchange Traders and expand or collapse the Gateway Exchange Trader view Refer to the Data Grid Functionality on page 25 topic if needed Assign to Available Users Window Field Descriptions To access the Assign to Available Users window click Assign to Users from the Gateway Logins window The Gateway Logins tab of the New User and Edit User windows contains the same fields This topic describes all of the Assign to Available Users window fields Available Users list The Username Display Name and Group fields contain read only values defined in the New User or Edit User window Selected Users list The Username Display Name Group and Gateway fields are read only values that are defined in the New User or Edit User window The Available To User Available To FIX Client Automatically Login Clearing Member Default Account Preferred IP Max Orders Sec and Operator ID fields are defined on the User s Gateway Login Attribute window but can be edited by selecting one or more users and editing the Login Attributes from this window Login Attributes The Login Attributes section has the following fields TT User Setup User Manual 121 Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Description Indicates whether a user can have access to a Available to User given gateway log
224. he IP address set ting for the primary and sec ondary FMDS server Specifies the port setting for the primary and secondary FMDS server Specifies the service setting for the primary and secondary FMDS server Specifies the timeout setting for the primary and secondary FMDS server TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 333 19 Appendix Column Title Force logoff Gateway Gateway Logins Generated Group see Group Generated Member see Member Generated Trader see Trader Give Up Clearing Account Associated Windows Users GW Logins tab XT FA Account Defaults tab FA Account Defaults GW Login Product Limits User GWL Attributes Select Gate way Assign to Available Users User Groups XT CD tab FA Account Defaults XT FA Account Defaults tab Description Whether or not the user has been forced to log off Specifies the gateway a user is able to log into and trade on using their assigned gateway login e g CME Note If a gateway alias is defined in aconfig the Gate way column displays lt gate way gt to represent the alias The gateway logins assigned to a given group Give Up Member The mem ber for whom a separate party completes a transaction 334 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title Group Group Permissions Group Admins GTC Allowed GUI
225. he Windows Dr Watson error log e Information about the local host e Login profile specific information on a local machine You have successfully collected log files Using Version Control Rules TT User Setup allows a Super Administrator non MultiBroker or TT Adminstrators MultiBroker to define rules for which versions of TT software can be used within a trading environment By using ver sion rules you can for example prevent potential issues related to logging in with X_TRADER appli cations that are too old For example to reject logins from X_TRADER versions prior to version 7 8 1 1 you would create a rule that specified that the X_TRADER application must be greater than or equal to 7 8 1 1 When creating rules consider the following e A user can have only one rule per application e Rules configured for a specific user take precedent over rules configured for all users To create a new version control rule 1 From the Server Admin menu select Version Rules 210 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Version Rules os ace Ea Applies To User 42 Applies To User Group Application l Operator Version Generated filter m filter m filter filter filter filter lt All Users gt lt All User Groups gt X_RISK Must be Greater than or Equal to 7 5 0 0 Yes lt All Users gt
226. he product in the product field can be traded Click Save Note Use the Save and Add New functionality to add many similar limits The limit you created appears in the Product Limits section To enable the product limits check the Apply product limits option Click Save Defining Maximum Position The following describes the differences in maximum position depending on whether maximum position is related to a Future Option Spread or Strategy Future Limits the maximum outright futures position to the value in the Maximum Position field In other words it limits the maximum position long or short that a trader may accumu late at the product level the sum total of all delivery months Traders that only trade calendar spreads for example will never reach this limit because their positions in one contract offset the positions in another contract Spread A spread can be either an Intra Product spread e g all legs belong to the same prod uct or an Inter Product spread e g legs will belong to multiple products e Intra Product Spread Limits the maximum contract level position for each delivery month to the value in the Maximum Position field The Maximum Position field does not put a hard limit on the number of spreads that a trader may enter it only limits the position for each contract of a product Inter Product Spread Does not use the Maximum Position field for risk checking To manage position risk on Inter Produc
227. hort and then check or uncheck the Trade Out allowed option Enter 0 to reset the Maximum order quantity Maximum position and Maximum long shortto unlimited 6 Click Save For more detailed information refer to the Configuring Gateway Login Risk on page 166 Creating Product Limits for Gateway Logins and Creating TT SIM Credit Limits and Prod uct Limits on page 322 topics Assigning Users to a Gateway Login You can assign one or more users to a specific gateway login from the Gateway Logins window While assigning the users you can also edit the Login Attributes for that login Note You can also assign one or more gateway logins to a single user from the New User or Edit User window Refer to the Assigning Gateway Logins to a User Through the Users Window on page 83 topic for more information To assign users to a gateway login 1 From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins and then click the gateway login you want to assign to one or more users 144 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics New Edt Copy Delete Refresh Add Gateways Exchange Traders Assign to Users Member 1 Group 2 Trader 4 Gateway f Alias Exch Member Exch Group Exch Trader Users Account s filter w filter w filter w filter v filter w filter filter w filter v filter w filter To
228. ice on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders checkbox TT User Setup User Manual 187 Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking e Static range uncheck the enforce option Buy and sell orders must be within the configured price band Orders submitted outside the defined price band will be rejected in all TT order rout ing applications e Directional range check the enforce option Buy orders must be below the maximum price and sell orders must be above the minimum price Orders submitted outside the defined price band or will be rejected in all TT order routing applications These pre trade price controls are also configurable on the New Product Limit window when configur ing Accounts and Account Groups Price Checking Overview The price check uses the last traded price as the market price as long as it falls between the bid and ask Otherwise the price check uses the midpoint of the bid and ask If the bid and ask are not both available then the price check will use the first available price from the ask bid settlement or close in that order The price check is performed as follows e The price check is performed on all real orders both new and changed at the time the orders are executed e The price check is not performed on synthetic or parent orders e For exchange traded spreads and or strategy orders the price check is applied based on the spread strategy price If the order
229. ich columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel X_TRADER Customer Defaults Window The options available from the X_TRADER Customer Defaults window context menu include Option New Edit Function Accesses the New Customer Default win dow which allows you to create a customer default by applying values such as username customer market and product Accesses the Edit Customer Default win dow which allows you to change Customer account and TIF values for example TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 347 19 Appendix Option Function Accesses the New Customer Default win dow which allows you to create a customer Copy default that has for example Market Product and account type information similar or iden tical to that of an existing customer default Permanently removes the selected customer Delete default Replaces one or more customer default Replace Account Numbers account numbers with similar account num bers based on selected pattern matching rules Exports data to an HTML file which you can Export to HTML use to generate a report Exports data to an CSV file which you can Export to CSV use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to Specify sort criteria determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the
230. icted from over riding Fix Adapter account defaults Identifies whether or not this user is restricted from over riding X_TRADER customer defaults Specifies whether Guardian related risk checking is enabled TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 339 19 Appendix Column Title Running Since Associated Windows TT User Setup Servers Description Specifies the date and time that a particular server was started Specifies if a customer aal AE ees default has been enabled Identifies an active server in Server Name Environment Server Status your environment e g Login Server Determines whether the user Staged Order Creation Users is allowed to create staged orders Determines whether the user Staged Order Mgmt Users is allowed to claim and work staged orders State cee Optional contact data for a particular user Stat Users Environment Server Indicates whether a user and Status FA Account Defaults or server is active Specifies the string that SMTP From Address Users appears in the From field of the email sent to the recipient Smi Host ines Specifies the email server used for sending email Smtp Port ex Specifies the port used for sending email SMTP Requires Authentica ike Enables SMTP server authen tion tication SMTP Use SSL Users Enables SSL Determines if the email recip SMTP Username Users ients username is included in the email The number
231. iew edit and create users gateway logins and accounts that exist in one of the user groups the administrator is designated to manage A Group Administrator can manage multiple user groups but can Group exist in a single user group only Administrator The Able to manage Gateway Logins and Able to Create Direct Trader Logins options allow to you grant these permissions to the Group Administrator Provides permission to manage one or more gateway logins A user with gateway login Administrator permissions cannot edit users but can assign gateway logins and gateway login attributes to users in a user group the administrator is designated to manage Addi tionally you can allow the gateway login administrator to manage only specific groups using the Restrict Gateway Login Adminis trator option Gateway Login Administrator Provides permission to unlock users and reset passwords for some user groups or all user Password groups depending on the restrictions applied Administrator You can allow the administrator to only man age specific groups using the Restrict Pass word Administrator option Provides permission to view any TT User Setup data window A user with View Only permissions cannot edit data in any accessible View Onl ae y window Additionally you can allow the administrator to only manage specific groups using the Restrict View Only user option 62 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies Inte
232. igned to both the CME and CME A gateways For a detailed description of assigning users refer to Assigning Users to a Gateway Login on page 144 To provide an alternative gateway to multiple users 1 From the User Admin menu select User s Gateway Login Attributes The User s Gateway Login Attributes window appears Filter the Gateway column by entering CME into the Gateway filter field Holding down the Ctrl key click the applicable user rows for which you want to make the asso ciated login unavailable Note Alternatively you could enter CME as the Gateway filter and then press the Ctrl and a keys to select all the CME Gateways f Users Gateway Login Attributes a Username Display Name User Group Gateway Member Group Trader Avail to User filter v filter v filter v CME v v filter v filter w filter 4 RobertAdams Chicago CME A RADAMS RADAMS RobertAdams Chicago CME A RMARTIN Richard Martin New York CME A TTORDNY 002 m Total rows displayed 46 Rows selected 2 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 4 Click Edit On the Edit multiple user Gateway Login records prompt click OK The Edit Multiple User Gateway Login Attributes window appears TT User Setup User Manual 148 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics T Edit Multiple User Gateway Login koee
233. igning User Groups to an Account 0 ccc cece cece eee nenees 203 Publishing to Guardian sciccweius tee teens ace sheteweb ie ett ee re wee e ieee Lec iw ee 205 Publishing to Guatdian 9 460 5 boo AREAS HES ERE r Er RAAT REE OA ERLE 205 Displaying Detailed Differences nonna ee ns Aa RR a A Ke ER RY RRS 206 Understanding Publish Warnings 4 2444 4244 0s 4005 44 404005 406s VRE Re eRw ES 208 Server Administration ic iivexciecteeein cede Sc nanna rnanan atte wae Sh oeur sd cet ue Kes 209 Collecting Log Files in cnt ortc ted ea bk Caer se et ee SR eRe ee EEE eRe RHEE 209 Using Version Control Rules xs lt 6 see annuau dae ke aetna eee ae Ae aS 210 Resetting the Guardian Exchange Tree 4 cc scchce ehea Ghana heed eee MERERE REA RweaW es 212 Editing the Currency Exchange Rates 26402520454 s04e0odatoasiodsesesGodatnaareds 212 Adding and Deleting Currencies p50 dasha dns unane nnana 214 Editing Product Margis svecerisutersdsir serrie criera g epei a EE e E i ie ii 215 Viewing and Clearing Product Margin Conflicts 0 ccc eee eee 217 Viewing and Publishing Licenses 26244428860 buns e nnee 219 Viewing Licenses n ununun nunan neran 219 Loading and Publishing Licenses 0 ccc ccc nee 221 Migrating Users to a New Gateway 0 0 eect n teens 222 Understanding Server Messages 6 05 icon dieses andiedaseeaddanes an sbtdabsamesims 225 Syst m Setting Sieen Kaede ene a EEPE TENPE eee Ke es baa aXe Re eee Ree 226
234. ilter the data grid displays only Eurex no fla vor Gateways Auto Filter The auto filter feature also automatically adjusts the content of a column as you enter or delete text in a filter As you begin typing your column begins to filter For example typing the letter B in the Gateway filter will show only gateways that begin with the letter B Every subsequent letter typed further filters the column Using Wildcards TT User Setup allows you to include wildcards with the filter text to further filter the display e matches multiple characters For example type A in a Gateway column filter to display only A flavored gateways as shown 32 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started FE Gateway Logins a2 Member Group Trader 4 Gateway Users Add to Gua filter v filter filter Y A Y filter Y filter TTORD 001 001 ANOWAK TTORD CHI 002 DMILLER 4 Ti Total rows displayed 88 Rows selected 0 Hide TTORDs Hide Exch Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 1 e matches a single character For example type B in a Group column filter to display groups such as ABC MB9 NB8 etc To view a brief description of the wildcards place your mouse pointer in a column header Sorting by a Column Use TT User Setup s column sorting function to control the display of data in various windows
235. imum position of 10 and for the other limit the product is ES with a maximum position of 5 When trading ES the account is limited to a maximum position of 5 and when trading all other products on the CME A Gateway the maximum position limit is 10 Margin Displays the margin that is currently configured for the specified product Additional margin Specifies a percentage above or below the margin that a trader must have to trade the contract In other words additional margin increases or decreases the margin requirement when calculating risk limits Maximum order qty Specifies a limit on the maximum individual order size that can be entered for a specified product To set the order quantity to unlimited enter 0 Maximum position Specifies a position limit for a given product maximum position can have various meanings depending on whether it s related to a Future Option Spread or Strategy For details refer to the Defining Maximum Position section of this topic To set the maximum position to unlimited enter 0 Note If you enter 0 in the Max Ord Qty or Max Pos fields the 0 is defined converted to and displayed as Unlimited Maximum long short Limits the worst case total of long or short contracts per product For more detailed information about using this limit refer to the Defining Maximum Long Short section of this topic To set the maximum long and short position to unlim ited enter 0 Note The Maximum long short
236. in X_RISK TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 337 19 Appendix Column Title Most Recent Heartbeat O C Orders Per Second Organization Other Users Operator ID Password Admins Phone Number Preferred IP Price Controls Enabled Associated Windows Environment Server Status XT CD tab Users Users GW Logins tab GW Logins tab User GWL Attributes Assign to Avail able Users User Groups Users GW Logins tab Selected Users User GWL Attributes Assign to Available Users Users Description Dynamically updated time a signal is submitted by the active servers in your envi ronment Designates whether the trader s position is Open or Closed Determines the allowed num ber of orders per second per TT Gateway This value is enforced when the Restrict Order Throughput option is checked Contact information for a user This field is required if you want the ICE Product Groups report to list the prod uct permissions per cus tomer Otherwise this field is optional Lists the users that share a particular gateway login Specifies the Operator ID that is used to identify the trader or operator to the exchange The password administrators assigned to a given group Optional contact data for a particular user Specifies the IP address of the gateway through which you want the user s first login attempt to be made Dete
237. in after performing a uni versal login Indicates whether a FIX Client user can have Available to FIX Client access to a given gateway login after perform ing a universal login Specifies whether a user of a specific gateway Automatically Login login will be automatically logged into a given gateway Indicates whether the user must log onto this Gateway when logging into TT applications Mandatory Login Check this option to prevent users from bypassing risk limits by not logging into a specific Gateway Indicates whether the user is allowed to deploy strategies to an Algo SE Server This setting is only valid when the Gateway is an Algo SE Server Algo deployment allowed Indicates whether the user is allowed to share algorithms with other users on Algo SE serv Algo sharing allowed ers This setting is only valid when the Gate way is an Algo SE Server and when the Algo deployment allowed option is checked Designates a member firm of a clearing house Clearing Member through which trades are settled Specifies the default account type as defined Default Account by the exchange A1 A9 G1 G2 M1 M3 P1 P3 or U1 U3 Specifies the IP address of the Gateway The Preferred IP preferred IP is used when there are multiple Gateways running with the same flavor name 122 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Description The maximum
238. in to reuse a password Note Password reuse restrictions are calculated from the last n times a user s password was changed not from when password reuse restrictions were enabled or edited The Password Expiration properties define the length of time a password is valid As an administrator you can require a user s password to expire after a fixed number of days However if you want to prevent a specific user s password from expiring check the Password never expires option on the Create New User or Edit User window Note Password expiration is calculated from the last time a user s password was changed not from when password expiration rules were enabled or edited To set password rules 1 230 From the Server Admin menu select System Settings The System Settings window appears and defaults to the Password Rules tab TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration E Enforce password complexity rules 6 linimum length 6 20 20 Passwords must contain at least one lowercase letter Password must contain at least one uppercase letter Passwords must contain at least one digit Passwords must contain at least one non alphanumerc character Password Reuse E Enforce password reuse restrictions Password Expiration Enforce password expiration rules 365 Days until password expires 1 365 3 Days pror to password expiration that wamings begin 0 5 Require user t
239. indow select the Gateway Logins tab and click View Edit Prod uct Limits The Product Limits window appears Note Accessing limits through the Edit User window displays only product limits that corre spond with a TTORD or Exchange Trader that have been assigned to that user 2 Highlight one or more product limit rows Q Product Limits eee Gateway Login Limits Account Group Limits miw Et Co Delete _Mass Copy to Other Gateway Mass Copy to Other Gateway Logins Users a User Groups Member as Group 44 Trader 49 aac al Prod Type a Product 47 TSIM Ony Z filte er v filte er Filter v filter X filter v filter v filter v v filter v Co CC fwe eree C C MLEE Chicago TTORDJS 001 002 Eurex FUTURE PROUX Chicago TTORDJS 007 Eurex FUTURE ae TTORDNY FUTURE a Total rows displayed 150 Rows selected 3 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 3 Click Mass Copy to Other Gateway Logins The Select Gateway Logins window appears 4 Highlight one or more Member Group Trader IDs to which you want the product limits assigned and then click Select The selected product limits are assigned to the applicable gateway logins 172 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration To copy product limits from one or more gateways to another gateway 1 Do one of th
240. ing you can create a new product limit and specify that it only applies to TT SIM trading If you do not create a TT SIM Only product limit TT User Setup will use the existing product limit settings for the instrument Allowing a User to Log onto X_TRADER using TT SIM mode To allow a user to log onto X_TRADER using TT SIM Mode open the user s profile in TT User Setup and check the TT SIM login allowed checkbox on the X_TRADER Properties tab 322 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Configuring TT SIM Credit Limits 1 To set a different gateway login credit limit for TT SIM trading 1 Create or edit a gateway login Refer to Creating a New Gateway Login on page 135 if needed 2 On the Gateway Login Info tab check the Override credit for TT SIM checkbox and then enter a new credit limit in the TT SIM credit field Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited we eee ee ee ee eee Add to Guardian Product Limits New Product Limit Edit Copy Delete j Gateway amp l Product 42 Product Type amp 3 Margin Addl Margin Max Order Qty Max Position Nore Risk Check C tn er er ef Trading allowed CME amp FUTURE 0 Unlimited Unlimited E Ignore P amp L Eurex amp FUTURE 0 5000 Unlimited 4 Currency USD he C Override credit for TT SIM 2 To set a different user profile credit limit for TT SIM trading 1 Create or edit a user profile Refer to Creat
241. ing Email Setting tab TT User Setup User Manual 93 Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users Main_ TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings V Enable outgoing email settings Required for TT User Setup Administrators who email passwords SMTP server host or IP address smtp example com SMTP port 25 25 is standard SMTP server requires authentication E Use SSL From email address no_reply example com Email subject Your new TT password Additional message text Here is your new X_TRADER password You will be forced to change it when you log in Include usemame in message Send Test Email View TT User Setup Admin fields v Save Add New Close l Ready 2 Check the Enable outgoing email settings option 3 Enter the SMTP server host or IP address and SMTP port typically port 25 4 Ifthe SMTP server requires authentication check the SMTP server requires authentication option and enter the Account name and Password 5 If your SMTP server requires SSL check the Use SSL option 6 Enter the From email address Email subject and Additional message text for the outgoing email messages and check the Include username in message option if needed 7 To test the email settings click Send Test Email and enter an email address that should receive the test email You should then verify that the test
242. ing and Editing X_TRADER or X_RISK Users on page 69 if needed 2 On the Main tab check the Override credit for TT SIM checkbox and then enter a new credit limit in the TT SIM credit field Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited TT User Setup User Manual 323 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials User Level Risk Trading allowed ane E Use P amp L risk algorithm E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price Only enforce a maxdmum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders E Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second Ovenide credit for TT SIM TT SIM credit Unlimited Note If this user willonly be able to trade in TT SIM mode uncheck the Live non TT SIM login allowedLove checkbox on the X_TRADER Properties tab Configuring TT SIM Product Limits To add a product limit that applies only to TT SIM trading 1 Create a new product limit Refer to Creating Product Limits for Gateway Logins on page 168 if needed 2 Check the Use Product Limit for TT SIM only checkbox Gateway Login TTORDJS 007 007 Margin Gateway CME X Additional margin O 00o Producttype FUTURE x Maximum orderaty Unlimited Product 36A Maximum position Unlimited Maximumlong shot Urine T78 V Trade Out allowed Gee Gemini Goen Ready 324 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tu
243. ings the control panel into focus This is Find Control Panel useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel User Groups Window The options available from the User Groups window context menu include Option Function Accesses the New User Group window New f which allows you to create a user group Accesses the Edit User Group window Edit which allows you to change the name of the user group Delete Permanently removes the selected user group Export to HTML Exports data to an HTML file which you can use to generate a report Exportto CSV Exports data to an CSV file which you can use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to Specify sort criteria determine the order in which data is dis played 350 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Option Show Hide Arrange columns Assign Gateway Logins Find Control Panel Function Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Opens the Assign Gateway Logins to User Group window which allows you to move multiple gateway logins to and from a given user group Brings the control panel into focus This is useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel FIX Adapter Account Defaults The options available from the Account Default List window context menu include Option New Edit Copy
244. ins If you are copying a user with direct trader gate way logins check this option to copy the direct trader gateway logins Copy Admin Gateway Logins If you are copying a user with admin gateway logins check this option to copy the admin gateway logins Copy TTORD Gateway Logins If you are copying a user with TTORD gateway log ins check this option to copy the TTORD gateway logins TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Note If the user is assigned multiple TTORDs you can copy the TTORDs as they are but the option to create a new TTORD with the same credit and product limited is dis abled To use the same TTORD select Copy TTORDs as they are To create a new TTORD that has the same credit and product limits select Cre ate a new TTORD with the same credit and Product Limits enter a new Member Group and Trader and then enter new or unused Account Copy Customer Defaults Copy the customer defaults to the new user Copy Account Defaults Copy the account defaults to the new user 3 Select the options as needed and then click Continue Copy 4 TT User Setup copies the user based on the selected options and opens the New User window On the Main tab enter Login information for the new user and edit any other user spe cific settings like Contact and User Level Risk settings The X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab is populated with any copied customer defaults If
245. ins The gateway logins that the gateway login administrator creates cannot be used until you assign them to a trader Assigning Users to the Third party Gateway Logins To assign users to the third party gateway logins you must log into TT User Setup as an administrator that can access both the third party user group and the traders user group s You can then access the Gateway Logins window and assign the gateway logins How to Create a New User by Copying an Existing User In this tutorial you will learn to create a new user Matt whose setup is similar to a user who has already been created Brenda While creating the new user you will incorporate TT User Setup s copy ing features to duplicate elements of Brenda s setup and apply them to Matt s setup gt To use the copy function to create a user who has a similar setup to an existing user 1 From the User Admin menu select Users The Users window appears TT User Setup User Manual 269 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials New New User View X TRADER X RISK fields v 42 Status Force Logoff Locked Out Last Changed Last Change filter v filter Username Display Name Group filter v filter v filter v filter w filter vy filtern v 2010 08 10 10 22 06 TTSYSTEM BSTEVENS Brian Stevens ABCTrading Active No 2012 09 07 15 58 50 TISYSTEM CMARTINEZ Carlos Martinez Chicago Active No 2010 09 17 11 37 2
246. ion Overview TT User Setup Administrators can configure Gateway Login level risk account and account group level risk and user level risk Gateway Login Level Risk You can configure Gateway Login level risk when creating or editing a Gateway Login and when creat ing or editing Product Limits for Gateway Logins Per Gateway Login you can configure e Whether or not Guardian risk checks orders sent e Whether or not the Gateway Login can be used to trade e Whether or not P amp L is used in available credit calculations e The the sum of money available at the start of a trading session and the currency allowed e Product specific position and order limits For more information refer to Configuring Gateway Login Risk on page 166 Creating Product Lim its for Gateway Logins on page 168 and Copying Product Limits to Additional Gateways or Gateway Logins on page 172 Account and Account Group Level Risk You can configure account and account group level risk when creating or editing and account or account group Per account or account group you can configure e Product specific position and order limits e TT Gateway specific margin limits For more information refer to Adding Account Level Risk Checking on page 175 Adding Account Group Level Risk Checking on page 176 Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 Creating Margin Limits for Accounts and Account Groups o
247. ions are determined by each exchange Refer to each exchange s market rules for additional information Indicates the type of position the user can establish with the order Open Close e Open Opening a position e Close Closing a position FIFO Handled in a first in first out manner TOCOM only Specifies the maximum quantity allowed per trade for the specified account This value is only used when Enforce max order qty is enabled Max order qty You can establish a high quantity that does not restrict normal trading yet still provides secu rity against an erroneous trade The Maxi mum Order Qty field in Guardian overrides this setting 56 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Fields Description Unavailable in X_TRADER 7 8 and later X_RISK Properties The X_RISK tab has the following fields Fields Description Determines whether the user can publish Con Contract Session Prices CSP access allowed tract Session Prices in X RISK Determines whether the user can send instant Instant Messages IM access allowed messages in X RISK Determines whether the user can publish man Manual Fill MF access allowed ual fills in X_RISK Determines whether the user can publish Start Start of Day SOD access allowed of Day records in X_RISK If Manual Fill MF access allowed or Start of Day SOD access allowed is checked
248. iple TT User Setup servers However only one of those servers can be designated as the Master server All other servers must be designated as Slaves which contain identical data to that of the Master and serve as a backup in case another server fails Using this window an administrator can more easily locate each TT User Setup server and also ensure there is only a single Master server running To view running servers 1 From the Reports menu select TT User Setup Servers The TT User Setup Servers window appears EG TT User Setup Servers kE Rescan Network for User Setup Servers PAddress Master Slave Version DB Location EXE file Time On Server Running Since v v v 4 v v v 192 168 8199 master 7 32 20 Cttidettilesus70_u Ctttt_user_setup T 2010 09 17 11 12 12 2010 09 17 08 56 39 192 168 8 191 slave 7 32 20 Cttdsttiesws70_u Ctttt_user_setupiT 2010 09 1711 1510 2010 08 17 06 59 55 2 To refresh the window click Rescan network for User Setup Servers 3 To exit the window click Close You have successfully viewed the running servers TT User Setup User Manual 247 Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports Viewing Server Status The Environment Server Status window shows server status information for the exchanges listed in the Guardian Exchange tree From this window you can sort and filter by exchange service or IP address to view the status of each server Access this window from the Report
249. iple records just select them and click Edit Note A single user cannot have more than one MGT login set to Available To User for identi cal gateways In the example above user RADAMS can only have one CME A row marked Available To User even if he has two different MGTs for CME A You have successfully provided multiple users access to an alternative gateway Assigning Gateways to Multiple Gateway Logins You can assign gateway s to multiple gateway login s from the Gateway Logins window This is use ful when the same gateways need to be added to more than one gateway login or when you must add a new Exchange Trader to multiple TTORD Gateway Logins Note The selected gateway logins must all be tradable TTORDs or all be exchange traders and non tradable TTORDs You cannot mass add gateways to a mixed selection of tradable TTORDs and exchange traders To assign gateways to multiple gateway logins 1 From the Gateway Logins window select one or more gateway logins make sure to select only TTORDs or only exchange traders 2 Click Add Gateways Exchange Traders 3 If you selected TTORDs 1 From the Add Gateways Exchange Traders to TTORDs window select I want to cre ate a new exchange trader or choose an existing one and then click Continue The Map Exchange Traders to window appears 150 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics 2 Move
250. is gateway This value overrides the user level setting You can also set this override from the User s Gateway Login tab and when assigning a gateway to a user For more details refer to Editing a User s Gateway Login Attributes and Assigning Users to a Gateway Login 7 4 11 Enhancements This release introduces additional price reasonability controls that allow a TT User Setup administrator to restrict how far off the market an order can be placed This is configurable per product and at an account or account group level 7 4 9 Enhancements As of TT User Setup 7 4 9 the Manual Fill MF access allowed and Start of Day SOD access allowed options are a single option called Manual Fill MF and Start of Day SOD access allowed TT User Setup User Manual 7 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started When upgrading to TT User Setup 7 4 9 or later TT User Setup automatically checks the new combined option for any users that had either of the old options checked 7 4 8 Enhancements e Account Groups TT User Setup administrators can now place multiple account numbers into a single account group for the purpose of risk checking TT Gateways check new orders against any configured limits for the account group based on the combined positions and working orders of each account in the group For more information about account groups refer to the Account Administration Overview topic e Account Based and
251. isk Administration Reference Guide 3 The FIX Adapter server user however uses the TTADM XXX VIEW MGT which we created in the Creating a FIX Adapter Server username on page 308 procedure Because the MGT exists we just need to assign the existing login to the FIX Adapter server user 1 Click Assign Existing Logins t Assign Gateway Logins fo e New Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway 4 Users Add to Guardian Group Permissions Comments filter filter v filters filter filter v filter CCDC filter TTADM XXX VIEW CME A CCBO CCDC No FIX Adapter CCDC TTADM XXX VIEW Eurex A CCBO CCDC No FIX Adapter CCDC TTADM XXX VIEW LIFFE C CCBO CCDC No FIX Adapter CCDC TTORDAB XXX VIEW CME amp ABROWN No FIX Adapter CCDC TTORDAB XXX VIEW Eurex 4 ABROV YN No FIX Adapter CCDC TTORDAB XXX VIEW LIFFE C ABROV YN No FIX Adapter CCDC TTORDYZ XXX VIEW CME A YZANDER No FIX Adapter CCDC TTORDYZ XXX VIEW Eurex 4 YZANDER No FIX Adapter CCDC TTORDYZ XXX VIEW LIFFE C YZANDER No FIX Adapter CCDC lt Total rows displayed Rows selected C Hide TTORDs Hide Exchange Traders Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 2 Select the three TTADM XXX VIEW MGTs use the Member filter to display only TTADM members if needed and then click Assign The Assign Gateway Login window appears 4 On the New User or Edit User window click Save The following figur
252. it only limits the position for each contract of a product e Inter Product Spread Does not use the Maximum Position field for risk checking To manage position risk on Inter Product Spreads you must enter both FUTURE and SPREAD type position limits for each of the products that comprise that Inter Product Spread For example if the limit is 5 an account can buy 5 calendar spreads because each con tract in the spread is limited to a long or short position of 5 This check would also apply to the futures contract being traded directly so in the previous example no more futures could be bought in the contract that is long 5 and no more cold be sold in the contract that is short 5 e Option Limits the maximum option position to the value in the Maximum Position field In other words limits the maximum position long or short that a trader may accumulate at the product level the sum total of all delivery months at all exercise prices For the purposes of risk checking calls and puts are treated as separate products For example buying a call and selling a put will not result in a flat position but instead will result in two separate positions that do not offset each other e Strategy Limits the maximum contract level position for each call or put of a specific strike price and delivery month to the value in the Maximum Position field The Maximum Position field does not put a hard limit on the number of strategies that a trader may enter
253. it users gt To create an X_TRADER or X_RISK user and apply the general user properties 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 Select X_TRADER X_RISK fields from the New User View drop down 3 Click New User 4 On the Main tab enter the user s Login and Contact information as needed Refer to the New User and Edit User Window Fields on page 41 topic for descriptions of each field TT User Setup User Manual 69 Trading Technologies International Inc Dn 70 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users New User n oe Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER x_RISK Product Group Permissions Login Contact Usemame JDOE Country United States A Display name John Doe Address 1800 W Addison wa B Oy Tap Password paiia State Province Ilinois X Confirm password Zp 60613 Email jdoe email com V Active Phone number 312 555 5555 E Password never expires Locked out V Limit the number of concurrent logins based on IP address 1 Max number allowed Organization X Customer in ICE Product Groups Report User Level Risk Force logoff F Trading allowed GTC GTDate orders allowed 7 TT API allowed oom _ V Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed f applicable oa Account changes on fills allowed E Use P amp L risk algorithm User Defined Fields E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price User Defined 1 oe b
254. it will connect to all available gateways You won t need to reconfigure your HFS each time a new gateway is added To create an administrator gateway login that will be used for all gateways 1 Access the Gateway Logins tab for an X_TRADER user 2 Check the Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all Gateways option The Gateway Logins table is replaced with the Member Group Trader fields g G New User o fen Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions J Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways Member TTADM Group PO Trader VIEW v View X _TRADER X RISK fields v Note When you use the Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways option TT User Setup removes any existing gateway logins for this user 3 Enter an administrator gateway login into the Member Group Trader fields e g TTADM XXX VIEW CME04 XXX MGR TTORDAB 001 VIEW etc For more information about adminis trator gateway logins refer to the Administrator Logins section in the TT User Login and Risk Administration guide Assigning Gateway Logins to a User Through the Users Window TT User Setup User Manual 83 Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users If a gateway login already exists you can assign it to the user The Assign Existing Logins button opens a Gateway Logins window that displays a list of all the gateway logins that exist but ar
255. ither in all available user Reset Password groups or in a restricted number of user groups Updates the Unlock Users Reset Passwords Refresh window to reflect any changes in the lock or password status Exports data to an HTML file which you can Export to HTML use to generate a report Exports data to an CSV file which you can Export to CSV use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to Specify sort criteria determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns Show Hide Arrange columns dialog box for you to select which columns to display Brings the control panel into focus This is Find Control Panel useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel 352 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Audit Trail Environment Server Status Reports TT User Setup Servers and View Connected Clients Windows The options available from each window s context menu include Option Export to HTML Export to CSV Specify sort criteria Show Hide Arrange columns Function Exports data to an HTML file which you can use to generate a report Exports data to a CSV file which you can use to generate a report Opens the Sort dialog box that you can use to determine the order in which data is dis played Accesses the Show Hide Arrange Columns dialog box for you to select which column
256. lays only login records with no data in the column Displays only those records that contain data in the column Displays only those records that contain all or part of the string you entered You can also enter the and wildcards to display par tial or exact matches Refer to Using Wildcards later in this section for more infor mation 3 For each column enter or select a filter A filtered column s drop down selection displays a yellow background TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 31 1 Getting Started Member 41 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway 44 Users Add to Guardian Group Pe filter v filter w filter cme v filter v yess v filter 002 002 CME A RADAMS YZAN Yes Chicago TTO 000 CME A JSIMMS Yes Sydney 000 CME A Yes 001 CME ANOWAK Yes Chicago 001 CME A ANOWAK Yes Chicago 002 CME DMILLER Chicago E Total rows displayed 51 Rows selected 1 E Hide TTORDs Hide Exchange Traders Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit Note Partial filter matches are considered a match For example the TTDEMO1 filter matches TTDE MO1 TTDEMO10 TTDEMO100 etc You have successfully applied a filter to a column Filtering by an Exact Match You use an filter symbol to indicate that the text that follows the symbol must filter by an exact match For example if you enter Eurex in a Gateway column f
257. li Determines whether the user can configure the Wholesale Trades option in X TRADER If XT Whole sale Trades is set to yes the user can turn X_TRADER s Wholesale Trades option on or off Otherwise the user cannot enable Wholesale Trades in X_ TRADER XT Wholesale Trades Users Optional contact data for a Zi Users p particular user Context Menus You use a context menu to access various TT User Setup functionality To access a context menu Right click anywhere in the related window Users Window 344 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix The options available from the Users window context menu include Option New Edit Copy Delete Export to HTML Export to CSV Specify sort criteria Show Hide Arrange columns Find Control Panel Function Accesses the New User window which allows you to create a user by applying values such as username display name password and user group Accesses the Edit User window which allows you to change login contact and mis cellaneous user defined data Accesses the New User window which allows you to create a user who has login location permissions or gateway login infor mation similar or identical to that of an exist ing user Permanently removes the selected user Exports data to an HTML file which you can use to generate a report Exports data to a CSV file which you
258. lter v filter Assigned Gateway Logins filter Assigned Accounts filter lt General gt Chicago London New York TTSYSTEM AB BOB ABCSYSTEM ABROWN EMASON KAMIR MPATEL WROSE AGOLD JKLINE LJOHNSON MB MKOH MLIM STAN CROBINSON JLEE JSIMMS NWA Singapore ABCCD1001 AUUSLDWWABTT ABCCDUBW001 ABCCDUMK001 ABCCD1001 ABCCD1002 CM123 8C222LL3JL3 AZ44BPSJP5 B50 ABCCD1002 CME001001 D5400 m Total rows displayed 13 Rows selected 0 001 1091981 1091982 12 12345 ABCCD a ABCCD b 00099487 2435234534 AA 8C222 a abc123 Abc1234 AACME15 CBOT2222 CM Ready 4 On the Select User Group window select a user group and then click Select 5 Click Save The selected user group appears in the Users window s Group column for the applicable user name New srw Group filter John Doe filter ABCTrading New York Sydney You have successfully assigned one or more users to a user group Assigning User Groups to Gateway Logins As with users gateway logins can be assigned to user groups If a gateway login is assigned to a user group any administrator of that user group can manage the gateway login 200 Force Logoff Go Locked Out v filter v TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration However gateway logins automatically inherit th
259. lters sorting or hidden columns applied to a window affect the content illustrated in a report 4 Select the destination for the html or csv report file and assign a file name The html file report opens automatically after saving 5 To display the CSV report double click the csv file The report displays in a spreadsheet application You have successfully exported HTML or CSV data and generated a report TT User Setup User Manual 37 Trading Technologies International Inc 38 1 Getting Started TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc User Administration Basics User Administration Basics From the Users window accessed from the User Admin menu you can create or edit all of the user types needed in TT User Setup This includes e Administrative users refer to Creating and Editing Administrative Users on page 85 e X TRADER or X RISK users refer to Creating and Editing X_TRADER or X_RISK Users on page 69 e FIX Adapter clients refer to Setting Up a FIX Adapter Client User on page 100 FIX Adapter servers refer to Setting Up a TT FIX Adapter Server on page 96 Note The Users window is a standard data grid with the exception of the New User View menu Refer to the Data Grid Functionality on page 25 and Using Views on page 39 topics For a list of all the fields on all the user administration windows refer to the New User and Edit User Window Field
260. lude users gateway logins or accounts the administrator type e g Group Administrator is not permitted to manage 3 Click Configure diagnostic checks TT User Setup User Manual 117 Trading Technologies International Inc 6 User Maintenance filter wv filter v filter Gateway Logins missing Accounts Missing Product Limits Order Books with mismatched Credit Currency Order Books with mismatched Product Limits TTORDs mapped to invalid Exchange Traders Gateway Logins missing passwords Users with Customer Default Markets missing corresponding Gateway Login Markets Users with TTORD Accounts missing corresponding Customer Default Accounts Users with Customer Default Accounts missing from User s TTORDs Gateway Logins Gateway Logins Order Book Order Book Gateway Logins Gateway Logins SiSifisisisis Gateway Logins E Gateway Logins Gateway Logins Accounts improperly shared between unrelated W Gateway Logins Order Books Users with multiple available to user flags FA Gateway Logins checked for same gateway FX Adapter client Users configured for gateways FIX Adapter that a FIX Adapter is not configured for FX Adapter Client Users with Gateway Logins FIX Adapter that are incompatible with an assigned FIX Adapter FX Adapter client Users with multiple available to f FIX Adapter fix client flags checked for same gateway Order Books with
261. ly displayed a report Exporting a Report as HTML or CSV You can export reports to HTML or CSV from the Reports window The content of the report depends on the sorting or filtering currently applied 238 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports gt To export a report as HTML 1 From the Reports menu select Run Reports The Reports window appears 2 From the Report drop down list select a report type 3 Click Run The type of report you selected appears E Reports Sr Report Users and their Gateway Logins x Run Export as HTML Export as CSV Username Gateway Exch Member Exch Group Exch Trader Displa filter v filter filter v filter filte v filter v ilte v filte v filter CMARTINEZ TTORDJS 004 004 ICE_IPE ICE012 001 002 Carlos CROBINSON NSE0391 001 001 NSE NSE0391 001 001 Christia CROBINSON TTORDAA 001 003 CME A ABC cD1 002 Christia CROBINSON TTORDAA 001 003 SSE A TTSSE cD1 002 Christia CROBINSON TTORDAA 001 003 TOCOM A XYZ cD1 002 Christia DMILLER TTORD CHI 002 CBOT CBOT1 SIM 001 David h DMILLER TTORD cape on 1 vid h 4 To save the report as HTML click Export as HTML or to save the report as CSV click Export as CSV The Windows Save As dialog box appears 5 Select the destination for your html or csv file and give the report a file name 6 Click Save The file saves to the location selected If
262. ly if the Country selected is the United States The following figure shows the Login and Contact sections of Main tab for the new FIX Adapter Server CCDC TT User Setup User Manual 297 Trading Technologies International Inc 298 arera Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions 18 Tutorials Login Username Display name User group Password Confirm password Active CCDC ClearCo Drop Copy FIX Adapter CCDC XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Password never expires Locked out Select Group Contact Country Address City State Province Zip Email Phone number Organization United States lt None gt Cusfomer ini CE Product G TT recommends that you leave the Password never expires option checked On the New User window click the FIX Adapter tab If a version requirement message appears click OK The FIX Adapter Role field automatically populates with FIX Adapter Server If FIX client users have been created they appear in the Available FIX client users or The following FIX client users can connect to this FIX Adapter table If FIX client users have not been created these tables are empty TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Main FIs Adapter Fis Adapter r
263. mer default records for the same Customer at least one key field Market Gateway Product Product Type must differ for each record When editing the initial lt DEFAULT gt record Selected is checked and uneditable the default customer default cannot be deselected or deleted For all other customer default records check the Selected option to enable the customer default On the Edit User field Selected is displayed as Sel The record s you select defines which defaults are applied to the trader For example the Account field defines which account number the trader uses Note For customer defaults created in TT User Setup Sel is the only field you can edit via X_TRADER All other TT User Setup created fields are grayed out On the Edit Customer Default window click Save and Add New Your customer default record appears in the Edit User window Repeat Steps 6 9 and create several more customer default records The image below shows an instance where several customer default records have been created for the lt DEFAULT gt customer P dah Edit User BTAYLOR babas Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions X_TRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS New Edit Copy Delete Replace Account Numbers Copy from User r Customer amp 2 Sel Market 4 Gateway Product Type 45 Product amp 4 Account Acct Give Up FFT2 F
264. mer default records that all have the same Customer name and trade Futures Product Types in the CME Market If the user trades on the CME A flavored Gateway the highlighted customer default row would be the best match and therefore only that record would be applied amp Edit User BTAYLOR ne Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions X_TRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties X_STUDYS FMDS New Edit Copy Delete Replace Account Numbers Copy from User Customer 42 Sel Market 4 Gateway Product Type 4 Product 4 Account Acct Give Up FFT2 FFT3 TIF Type filter v lv filter M filte x f ter v o v filter at fil v f ter v ff ter ffilter A file it filter a DEFAULT gt Sir FUTURE ACT11 GTD Limit DEF AULT e CME CME B FUTURE ACT333 GTD Limit DEFAULT E NYSE_Liffe FUTURE bs ACT555 Ad GTD Limit Total rows displayed 6 Rows selected 1 C Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults View X_TRADER X_RISK fields Add New Cose Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit When one user has multiple customer default records with different customer names X_TRADER allows the user to choose a customer before entering an order After the user chooses a customer X_TRADER chooses the best matching customer default per that customer For the most control over a t
265. missions tab 4 Use the transfer buttons lt lt lt gt gt gt to move selected user groups from the Available User Groups list to the Gateway Login permitted in the following User Groups list The Gateway Login permitted in the following User Groups section contains the following fields 5 User Group Displays the name of the user group 6 Users with Gateway Login Displays users in the given user group to whom the gateway login is assigned 7 TTORDs with Gateway Login Displays TTORDs in the given user group that are mapped to this Direct Trader gateway login 8 To allow a group administrator to edit and directly assign this gateway login check the Group Admins can assign this Gateway Login directly to users without using a TTORD option If this option is unchecked Group Administrators can only map the gateway login to a TTORD to use it indirectly TT User Setup User Manual 201 Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration Gateway Login Info Group Permissions E Group Admins can assign this Gateway Login directly to users without using a TTORD applies to Direct Traders only Available User Groups Gateway Login permitted in the following User Groups User Group User Group 41 Users with Gateway Login TTORDs with Gateway Login filter i TTORDJS001003 TTORDJS004004 T lt General gt Ready 9 Click Save As
266. most current data You can monitor all server activity through a Server Messages window which is available through the TT User Setup Client Note You do not need to be logged in to view server messages You use the Server Messages window to monitor server activity including login attempts server ups or downs error conditions etc In addition the window shows occurrences of database replication whereby administrator changes processed by the Master server are replicated by any Slave servers run ning in the environment For detailed information regarding server replication refer to the TT User Setup System Administrator Manual Note When logged in as a non Super Administrator the administrator can only view logins for users the ad 1 ministrator is designated to manage To access the Server Messages window From the Reports menu select Server Messages The following is an example of the Server Messages window and some of the types of mes sages it displays 246 Severfty Message Source Ji F e Done loading traders from Guardian Loaded 23 traders Guardian and User Setup trader data matches Master detects no other master heartbeats Able to process messages to update database Done with all startup tasks Master ready Login attempt UserSetup style user TTSYSTEM result Ok Stave initializing Detected master at ip Steve detected active master heartbeat Starting repication waste Error Messag
267. n attribute will be set for the new gateway logins e Select Copy source settings to target to use the source gateway s settings e Select Set all to mandatory checked to set the Mandatory Login login attribute on for all users that were mapped to the source gateway regardless of the current setting e Select Set all to optional unchecked to set the Mandatory Login login attribute off for all users that were mapped to the source gateway regardless of the current setting 7 Click Start Update You have successfully migrated users to a new gateway Understanding Server Messages The TT User Setup Server Master or Slave frequently updates its local database with the most current data You can monitor all server activity through a Server Messages window which is available through the TT User Setup Client Note You do not need to be logged in to view server messages You use the Server Messages window to monitor server activity including login attempts server ups or downs error conditions etc In addition the window shows occurrences of database replication whereby administrator changes processed by the Master server are replicated by any Slave servers run ning in the environment For detailed information regarding server replication refer to the TT User Setup System Administrator Manual Note When logged in as a non Super Administrator the administrator can only view logins for users the administrator is designated to manage p
268. n limit from the Account Groups window 1 From the User Admin window select Account Groups 2 From the Account Groups window create or edit an account group If you have assigned accounts to an account group you can also edit that group by selecting any assigned account in the Accounts window and clicking Edit Account Group The Account Group window appears 180 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration Edit Account Group Groupl eo Account Group Info Associated Accounts Margin Limits Group N Gant 1020304 z roup Name Group 1091982 Gateway Enabled Currency Margin Limit Group Description Group1 janaa TE cia z az z BTec USD Y 0 Apply product limits V Allow trading BTec A uso v 0 BTec B uso v 0 BTec C uso v 0 BTec D uso v J Show only configured or visible gatew Product Limits Edit Copy Delete yoni ETRE Gateway 41 ProductType 42 Product 42 TT SIM Only Margin Addl Margin Addi Margin Max Order Qt Max Order Qty Max Position On Max Position Max Long filter v filte v filter v filte v filter v filte v filte v filte v filte v filte v filter v filter BTec FUTURE No No 0 No 0 No 0 No 4 n Add New Close Ready 4 5 In the Margin Limits section enable margin checking for any applicable gateway by checking the Enabled option To show to only gateways that are ru
269. n of the TT FIX Adapter Reference Manual Assigning TT FIX Adapter Client s to a FIX Adapter Server You can assign FIX Adapter client users to a TT FIX Adapter server from either the server or client user s New User or Edit User window To assign a TT FIX Adapter server to a FIX Adapter client user 1 On the client user s New User or Edit User window click the FIX Adapter tab If a version requirement message appears click OK 110 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions FIX Adapter Account Defaults FIX Adapter role Client v C Staged order creation allowed C Enable de client or server Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed C Enable Available FIX Adapters This FIX client user can connect to the following Username 4 Display Name Group Username 4 Display Name filter filter Vv filter v ccDC ClearCo Drop Copy Server CCOR ClearCo Order Router Server FIX Adapter CCOR Versions with an asterisk indicate a planned future release Future releases are subject to change Check the product s release notes for detail View FIX Adapter Client fields i 2 Use the transfer arrow buttons gt lt gt gt lt lt to select the FIX Adapter server users to which each client can connect 3
270. n page 180 Copying Account Based Product Limits to Additional Gateways on page 182 Copying Account Based Product Limits to Additional Gateways on page 182 User Level Risk You can configure user level risk when creating or editing a user profile Per user you can configure e Whether or not this user can trade e The the sum of money available at the start of a trading session and the currency allowed e How far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks e The maximum number of orders per second per TT Gateway For more information refer to Adding User Level Risk Checking on page 185 Setting Pre Trade Price Controls on page 187 and Setting Order Throughput Controls on page 191 TT User Setup User Manual 165 Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration Product Limits Overview Use the Product Limits window to set additional margin the maximum order size the maximum con tracts and allow or forbid trading out for a specific product type and product on a specific Gateway The Product Limits window has two tabs Gateway Login Limits and Account Group Limits Q Product Limits sec Gateway Login Limits Account Group Limits l New l Edt Mass Copy to Other Gateway l Mass Copy to Other Gateway Logins 2 User Groups Member 42 Group Trader a5 et 41 ProdType 5 Product 47 TTSIMOnly filter v v filter v filte Eurex
271. n the gateways Note that no risk check actually takes place on the modification therefore changing the account could cause an account to go over its limits However any subsequent orders will be risk checked based on the modified fills To configure the Account changes on fills allowed option refer to the Applying Basic User Proper ties on page 69 topic TT User Setup User Manual 175 Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration Adding Account Group Level Risk Checking You can configure product specific position limits product specific order size limits and TT Gateway specific margin limits per account or account group The user and gateway login s risk settings still apply but orders submitted with an account will also be checked against the limits of the account group based on the combined positions and working orders of all accounts in the group Note To configure account based risk instead of account group risk refer to Adding Account Level Risk Checking on page 175 You cannot configure account based risk for an account that belongs to an account group Configuring product limits per account group also allows you to perform the following tasks which are not available for Gateway Logins e Disable trading per product to easily prevent trading on one or more specific products without having to specifically define each individual product that is allowed to be traded
272. n to which each Gateway or exchange Gateway Product Product Type Max Qty MaxPos AddtlMrgn Allow Tradout The bottom pane indicates that the product limits for TTORDFA 001 001 match TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials The Publish to Guardian window appears 2 Click a single differences row 3 Click View Differences Details The Guardian User Setup Differences Details window appears Reading data in the Publish to Guardian window The Publish to Guardian window specifies differences in trader data between TT User Setup and Guardian and allows you to publish that data in order to synchronize both systems Publishable records are categorized into one of the three following options and assist in defining differ ences e TT User Setup only Applies to unpublished gateway logins created in TT User Setup e Guardian and TT User Setup Applies to records where for example a TT User Setup login is mapped to an exchange to which the same Guardian login is not mapped e Guardian only Applies to unpublished trader IDs created in Guardian The image below shows how differences can be displayed gt Publish to Guardian Publish Selected Gateway Logins to Guardian Comments Differences Current Guardian TT User Setup Differences Publish to overwrite Guardian Member 4 Group 42 Trader 42 Record exists in IT filter filter v filte
273. nal Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users 12 Click Save and then continue to the next topic Applying X_ TRADER Properties on page 72 Applying X_TRADER Properties 1 To apply X_TRADER Properties Click the X_TRADER X_RISK tab and then click the X_TRADER Properties tab _TRADER Properties x TRADER Customer Defaults _RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS _TRADER mode X_TRADERPro w TT SIM options TT SIM login allowed Live non TT SIM login allowed C Avoid orders that cross Quoting RFG allowed Wholesale trades allowed Staged order creation allowed C Staged order management allowed Direct Market Access DMA order creation allowed Machine gun orders allowed Eurex Persist orders User controlled vi A A a A A pma N n A 2 4 72 From the X_TRADER mode drop down select whether the user s X_TRADER application opens as X_ TRADER or X_TRADER Pro Note When the trader is using TT SIM mode TTUS always sends the X_ TRADER mode as X_ TRADER PRO Use the remaining fields on this tab to specify behavior when orders cross to allow access to the X_TRADER s quoting functionality to enable the wholesale trading functionality and to spec ify the users permissions for creating staged orders managing staged orders and creating DMA orders Refer to the New User and Edit User Window Fields on page 41 topic for descriptions of each field Click Save
274. nc 4 User Administration Administrative Users Available User Groups Can only see Users in the following User Groups User Group 4 Default s Users User Group 4 Users fi Ite Paes a amp Chicago AMURPHY ANOVWAK gt gt lt General gt TTSYSTEM gt gt FIX Adapter CCDC El ABROAN CCBO CCL New York AGOLD JKLINE LJOHN Rosemont 10 Using the transfer arrow buttons gt gt gt lt lt lt move one or more user group from the Avail able User Groups list to the Can only see Users in the following User Groups list 11 Click Save Creating a Collect Log Files Only User A Collect Log Files Only user can use the Collect Log Files feature to collect any log files in the trading environment including log files containing sensitive trading information This user cannot view or edit any user or system settings but can view the TT User Setup server messages TT User Setup server sta tus and environment server status reports To create a Collect Log Files Only user 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 Set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields 3 Click New Note To give an existing user administrative privileges select the user from the Users window and click Edit You can then change the View to TT User Setup Admin fields 4 On the Main tab edit any Login Contact or User Defined fields as needed 5 Click the TT User Setup Permissions tab 6 Select the Collect Log Files Only o
275. nd gateway information and to check for possible setup errors The available reports include Report TT Product Version User Usage Most Recent X_TRADER Version Gateway Versions Users and their Gateway Logins Users and their Gateway Login counts Users and their Risk Parameters collapsed Users and their Risk Parameters expanded Users and their Product Limits Users and their Product Limits including TT SIM Description Displays version information for client appli cations e g X_TRADER that have logged in Displays the most recent version of X_TRADER per user that have logged in Displays a list of Gateways running in the environment Currently TT User Setup only displays the 7 15 1 and later ICE Price Server Displays a list of users by username and includes each user s MGT data Displays a list of the number of gateway log ins for each user Displays a list of users and their associated risk parameters including Credit Currency Ignore P amp L etc Displays a list of users and additional risk related parameters including Auto Login Pre ferred IP etc Displays a list of users by username and includes each user s product limit data Displays a list of users by username and includes each user s product limit data TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 237 17 Reports Report Description Displays the quantity of product limi
276. nfigurations Where it is now TT User Setup The Gateway Logins tab of a user desig nated as a FIX Adapter Server No longer supported TT User Setup The Gateway Logins tab of a user desig nated as a FIX Adapter Cli ent TT User Setup The Gateway Logins tab of a user desig nated as a FIX Adapter Cli ent TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 95 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Field Where it was in FACT Where it is now TT User Setup The Individual FIX Sessions in Account Defaults tab on the Account Defaults Order toute conous FIX Adapter tab of a user amp 8 designated as a FIX Adapter Client TT User Setup The Gateway Trade Filters Individual FIX Sessions in Logins tab of a user desig Drop Copy configurations nated as a FIX Adapter Cli ent For a detailed description of TT User Setup user administration functionality previously managed in FACT refer to the Migrating to Version 7 6 0 Appendix in the TT FIX Adapter System Administra tion Manual Version 7 6 Setting Up a TT FIX Adapter Server Use TT User Setup to configure a user as a TT FIX Adapter server which logs into one or more TT Gateways on behalf of all its FIX clients You must configure the FIX Adapter server user as either a Drop Copy or Order Routing FIX Adapter server e Order Routing The order routing configuration type allows FIX Adapter client users to use all the function
277. nfigure a FIX Adapter client which connects to Order Routing or Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter servers When creating a TT FIX Adapter client user that connects to an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter you must also designate one or more sets of credentials gateway logins that will be used to route orders This procedure is similar to setting up a TTORD in Guardian except in TT User Setup you can create the TTORD and assign it to a FIX Adapter client in one step The gateway logins to which a FIX Adapter client user is assigned determine how the Client submits orders and to which orders and fills the Client can subscribe A FIX Adapter client user can be assigned to more than one TTORD gateway login per Gateway or a single Direct Trader gateway login per Gateway Note The FIX Client can only log into a FIX Adapter that is configured to route orders that the FIX Client can also route Example 1 Assume a FIX client user has a gateway login for CME A with MGT TTORD AAA 001 and a FIX Adapter has a gateway login for CME A with MGT TTORD BBB MGR In this case the FIX Adapter is unable to load orders and fills for the FIX Client TT User Setup will not allow the FIX client user to log in Example 2 Assume a FIX client user has a gateway login for CME A with MGT TTORD AAA 001 and a FIX Adapter has a gateway login for CME A with MGT TTORD XXX MGR In this case the FIX Adapter and the FIX Adapter client have compatible MGTs TT User Setup allows the FI
278. ng or short for a given product Automatically logs a user of a specific gateway login into a given gateway Indicates the time the order is in force Indicates the order type and determines whether the order is sent as a Limit or Market order Specifies if the user has an order restric tion such as FOK Location New Edit Product Limit window Assign to available users tab New User Edit User Gateway Logins tab User s Gateway Login Attributes win dow New Edit Customer Default window New Edit Customer Default window New Edit Customer Default window Minimum Version Supported X_TRADER 7 8 X TRADER 7 17 These fields do not apply to X_TRADER ver sions 7 8 or later These fields do not apply to X_TRADER ver sions 7 8 or later These fields do not apply to X_TRADER ver IOC or LSM sions 7 8 or later Indicates the type of These fields do not position the user can New Edit Customer apply to ORT eNe establish with the Default window X_TRADER ver order sions 7 8 or later TT User Setup User Manual 361 Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Field Enforce max order qty Max order qty Account Info Account Group Info Feature Specifies the maxi mum quantity allowed per trade for the specified account Adds risk checking to accounts Adds risk checking to account groups Location New Edit Customer Default window
279. nly valid when the Gate way is an AlgoSE Server and when the Algo deployment allowed option is checked Refers to the account and associated numeric CTI value for all orders sent through an order session For more information on CTI Origin Default Account values refer to the TT CME Gateway Sys tem Administration Manual or any other applicable TT Gateway System Administra tion Manual Designates a member firm of a clearing house Clearing Member through which trades are settled Specifies the IP address of the gateway through which you want the user s first login Preferred IP attempt to be made If unavailable TT User Setup automatically selects an alternate IP address of the same gateway type Specifies the Operator ID that is used to iden Operatii tify the trader or operator to the exchange The maximum rate of orders per second Prevent more than X orders per second over allowed per TT Gateway This setting over rides the User Level setting rides the rate set for all TT Gateways assigned to a user Scenario The following procedure describes a situation in which multiple users connected to the same gateway e g CME lose access and you must quickly make an alternative gateway e g CME A available to each user simultaneously TT User Setup User Manual 147 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics Note This procedure assumes that each applicable user has been ass
280. nning or have been previously config ured check the show only configured or visible gateways option For each gateway you enable enter a Margin Limit and the Currency for the limit Click Save Copying Product Limits to Additional Accounts or Account Groups You can copy product limits from one or more account account groups to another account account group To copy product limits to additional accounts or account groups 1 From the User Admin menu select Product Limits The Product Limits window appears 2 Select the Account Account Group Limits tab 3 Highlight one or more product limit rows TT User Setup User Manual 181 Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration Product Limits 8 Eom x Gateway Login Limits Account Account Group Limits New l Edt Mass Copy to Other Gateway Mass Copy to Other Account or Group Account Group Account Gateway 5 ProdType Product 7 TT SIM Only Margin AddiMrgn Max Ord Qty Ma filter v filter v filter wv filter v filter w filter v filter filter v filter v filte ST ere fme eoo e O TOO Ao o y rons re e gt vo 0 34 No 0 Erx2 Eurex FUTURE 1000 0 1000 r Total rows displayed 8 Rows selected 2 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 4 Click Mass Copy to Other
281. nt num ber Enter an asterisk to match any account number The name of the market Enter an asterisk to match any market The name of the gateway Enter an asterisk to match any gateway The product type e g futures options spreads etc associated with a secu rity Enter an asterisk to indicate match any product type The type of account associ ated with the trader The member code for the clearing member used for give up trades only The freeform text fields often used for annotations by traders or back offices Type Key Key Key Key Key Default value Default value Default value From the Account Defaults tab within the New User or Edit User window you can set the Restrict user from overriding Account Default option to specify whether a TT FIX Adapter Server rejects orders containing default values e g Clearing Account that don not match or that conflict with a FIX Adapter client user s account default values TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 105 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter Product Group Permissions FIX Adapter Account Defaults filte filter VY filter S filter filter Fajba Copy hom user J l Account 42 Market Product Type Gateway Account Type Clearing
282. o Key match any account number The name of the market Market Enter an asterisk to match Key any market The name of the gateway Gateway Enter an asterisk to match Key any gateway 60 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Fields Product type Account type Clearing account FFT2 FFT3 Description The product type e g futures options spreads etc associated with a security that a trader can trade Enter an asterisk to apply the account default to all product types The type of account associ ated with the trader Indicates the clearing member code Used for Give up trade accounts only The freeform fields often used for annotations by trad ers or back offices Type Key Value Value Value TT User Setup Permissions The TT User Setup permissions apply to Super Administrators Group Administrators Password Administrators and users that cannot log into TT User Setup or have View only permissions None Super Administrator Fields Description Prevents the user from logging into TT User Setup Provides complete access to TT User Setup functionality A user with Super Administra tor permissions has no restrictions in TT User Setup TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 61 2 User Administration Fields Description Provides permission to v
283. o button 7 Click the Gateway Logins tab 8 Ifthe gateway login to which you want to map does not exist click New and create a new gate way login For detailed instructions refer to the Creating a New Gateway Login topic Otherwise if the gateway login already exists click the Assign Existing Logins button and select the appropriate MGT s For detailed instructions refer to the Assigning Gateways to Gateway Logins on page 137 topic Main Gateway Logins FIX Adapter C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways Edit Remove Assign Existing Logins View Edit Product Limits Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway 4 AvailtoUser Exch Trader Account s Addto Guardian Credit per MGT filter filter filter 8 filter filter filter S filter S filter filter TTADM XXX VIEW CME A No TTADM XXX VIE Eurex A No TTADM XXX VIEVY LIFFE C No lt il Total rows PERSI 3 Rows selected 0 4 A 9 Click Save TT User Setup User Manual 99 Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users You have successfully set up a TT FIX Adapter Server After completing the Setting Up a FIX Adapter Client User on page 100 topic continue to the Assigning TT FIX Adapter Client s to a FIX Adapter Server on page 110 topic Setting Up a FIX Adapter Client User Use TT User Setup to co
284. o change initial password 2 Check the Enforce password complexity rules option to enable related fields 3 Specify values in the Minimum length 6 20 and Maximum length 6 20 fields to set mini mum and maximum password lengths Note The default values are 6 and 20 4 Check any or all of the following options e Passwords must contain at least one lowercase letter e Passwords must contain at least one uppercase letter e Passwords must contain at least one digit e Passwords must contain at least one non alphanumeric character TT User Setup User Manual 231 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration 5 To configure the system to enforce password reuse restrictions select the check box next to Enforce password reuse restrictions and then select the Number of unique passwords required before reusing a prior password 6 To configure the system to enforce password expiration rules select the check box next to Enforce password expiration rules and then select the number of days until the password expires and the number of days prior to password expiration that the system will begin issuing expiration warnings This setting does not apply to users with passwords that never expire 7 If users must change their initial password after login or after an administrator updates the pass word check the Require user to change initial password option This setting does not apply to users with passwords that never expire
285. o manage one multiple or all user groups User Groups Opens the Account Groups window which allows you to create and edit account groups Account Groups Once you create an account group you can assign accounts to the group and configure account group based risk Opens the Account Default List window FIX Adapter Account Defaults which allows you to create order values used by TT FIX Adapter when sending orders Opens the Unlock Users Reset Passwords Unlock Users Reset window which allows you to unlock any Passwords locked out users as well as reset their pass words Opens the Diagnostic Checks window which lists potential set up issues based on the infor mation available in the TT User Setup data base Diagnostic Checks e Use the Server Admin menu to configure the system settings manage version rules and collect log files The options available from the Server Admin menu include Option Function Opens the System Settings window which allows you to enable and set specific pass System Settings word rules and login properties enable and disable automatic diagnostic checks and con figure the X_STUDY FMDS settings Opens the Version Rules window which allows you to create rules that allow or pre vent users from logging in with specified ver sions of X_TRADER or X_RISK Version Rules Opens the Collect Log Files window which Collect Log Files allows an administrator to collect remote log
286. o tab click Map to Exchange Traders If the Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Exchange Trader does not exist click Create to create a new Synthetic SE exchange trader Otherwise if the Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Exchange Trader already exists move it to the Selected Exchange Traders list and skip to step 6 320 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials g Mew Exchange Trader Market Autosprd Gateway ASE Member Group Trader Save and Add New Close Ready E 4 Select an Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Market and Gateway and then enter a unique gate way login created in the To establish an Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Gateway Login proce dure above 5 Click Save The newly created Exchange Trader appears as a Selected Exchange Trader in the Map Exchange Traders window 6 Click Done gt To add an Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE Gateway login to a user without an existing TTORD 1 From the Users window select a user that does not log into Gateways using a TTORD and then click Edit 2 From the Edit User window select the Gateway Login tab 3 Ifthe Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE gateway login does not exist click New Otherwise if the Autospreader SE or Synthetic SE gateway login already exists click Assign Existing Log ins select the gateway login and then skip to step 5 4 Enter a unique gateway login created in the To establish an Autospreader
287. of all fills for all traders Based on these requirements ClearCo needs to set up a new Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter Server CCDC and three FIX Adapter client users AB YZ and CCBO 296 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Complete all of the sections in both of the following topics Creating TT FIX Adapter Servers Creating a Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter Server in TT User Setup consists of the following tasks Creating a FIX Adapter Server Username a To create a FIX Adapter Server username 1 From the TT User Setup Control Panel open the User Admin menu and click Users The Users window appears 2 From the New User View list select FIX Adapter Server fields New User View FIX Adapter Server fields 3 Click New The New User window appears 4 On the Main tab enter data in the following fields Username An identifier for the TT FIX Adapter Server limited to 11 characters Display name An identifier for the TT FIX Adapter Server User group An identifier used to categorize users e g Chicago For a detailed description on user groups refer to the TT User Setup User Guide Password Confirm password The password associated with this username which is used to authenticate TT FIX Adapter Servers Country The location of the TT FIX Adapter Server machine Zip The Zip code in which the TT FIX Adapter Server machine is located Zip is neces sary on
288. of ticks from the market the user is allowed to Ticks Users trade This value is enforced when Price Controls Enabled is checked 340 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title TIF Time On Server Trader Trade Out allowed Trading allowed Trading allowed Type Associated Windows XT CD tab TT User Setup Servers GW Logins tab GW Login Window Product Limits Win dow Accounts Window User GWL Attributes Product Limits Window GW Logins tab GW Login Window User Window Main tab XT CD tab Description Time in Force e g GTD GTC Amount of time since the server was started The unique Trader ID used to identify an exchange trader or TTORD as part of their MGT Designates whether you can exceed maximum order quan tity maximum position and or available credit limits to get closer to a flat safe position Determines if a gateway login can be used to actively trade Determines if a user can add modify or delete orders Note Non tradable adminis trator logins e g TTAD MXXX100 or TTORDTSXXXMGR must have Trading Allowed option checked to delete orders even though they are unable to trade Type of order limit market etc TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 341 19 Appendix Use Max Use P amp L Risk Algo User Defined 1 6 User FMDS Settings
289. oid Orders that Cross Associated Windows TT User Setup Servers Users Users Users Users Users Users Users Users Description The version of TT User Setup associated with an active server Specifies whether you have permission to use X_RISK Determines if the user has X_STUDY FMDS enabled Specifies whether X_TRADER will start up as X_TRADER or X_TRADER Pro Specifies whether you have permission to use X_RISK s Contract Session Prices func tionality Specifies whether you have permission to use X_RISK s Instant Message functionality Specifies whether you have permission to use X_RISK s Manual Fill functionality Specifies whether you have permission to use X_RISK s Start of Day functionality Determines whether the user can configure the Avoid orders that cross setting in X_TRADER If XT Avoid Orders that is set to yes the user can configure the Avoid orders that cross option in X_TRADER as needed TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 343 19 Appendix Column Title Associated Windows Description Determines whether the user can configure the Quoting option in X_TRADER If XT Quoting RFQ is set to yes XT Quoting RFQ Users the user can turn the X_ TRADER Quoting func tionality on or off Otherwise the user cannot enable Quot ing in X_TRADER Restricts users from editing XT Restrict Client Override Users her costomer dela
290. ole FIS Adapter Server wt Order routing server client or server Drop copy server Available Fis chent users Username 1 Display Mame Group 6 Click the Drop copy server radio button 7 Continue to the next section Assigning TT Gateway Credentials When creating a Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter you must designate the credentials called gateway log ins that the user uses to login to the TT Gateways TT FIX Adapter Server logs into each TT Gateway once and acts on behalf of all FIX Adapter client users Thus the gateway logins MGTs that the TT FIX Adapter server uses to log into the TT Gateways must have the authority to act on behalf of all FIX Adapter client users Specifically the MGTs TT FIX Adapter Server uses to log into the TT Gateways must have permissions to view all orders and fills of all FIX Adapter client users In our example e TT FIX Adapter client user AB requires a copy of all fills for all traders with a Member ID of TTORDAB e TT FIX Adapter client user YZ requires a copy of all fills for all traders with a Member ID of TTORDYZ e TT FIX Adapter client user CCBO requires a copy of all fills for all traders The credentials that have permissions to view all of these fills is TTADM XXX VIEW TT User Setup User Manual 299 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials To assign credentials to the FIX Adapter Server user On the New User or Edit User window for the CCDC user
291. ologies International Inc 53 2 User Administration Product Account Fields Description Specifies a specific product Enter an asterisk to apply the account and account type to all products in the exchange You can include multiple products by entering each product type separated with only a comma no spaces in between X_TRADER versions 7 8 and later support multiple Products X_TRADER versions prior to 7 8 accept only the first product listed Specifies the customer account number It associates the trade with a specific customer and middle or back office may use the Account as a sub account Some exchanges e g CME require an account number If the user s MGT is a TTORD that is risk managed in Guardian the Account must match one of the accounts 54 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Fields Account type Give up FFT2 amp FFT3 Time in force TIF Description Indicates one of the following account types A1 First Agent Account e g broker A2 A9 Second Agent Account Ninth Agent Account G1 Pre Designated Giveup Trade G2 Designated Giveup Trade G3 Second Giveup Trade M1 First Market Maker Account M2 Second Market Maker Account M3 Third Market Maker Account P1 First Principal Account e g pro prietary trader P2 Second Principal Account P3 Third Principal Account U1 U3 Unallocated
292. ooper een Freee rdehasis ae olen E EEE N E eee omit EEEn 251 How to Setup a New User Who Will Trade Using a TTORD Gateway Login 251 How to Map an Additional Gateway Login to an Existing TTORD User 260 How to Set Up an Administrator Who Uses Both X_RISK and TT User Setup 263 How to Set Up a Third party Risk Administrator 2 2 0 0 0 0 c cece eee 267 Creating the Gateway Login Group 0 0 ccc eee eee eens 268 Creating the Third party Gateway Login Administrator 00 00 0000 268 Assigning Users to the Third party Gateway Logins 2 0 0 0 eee eee eens 269 How to Create a New User by Copying an Existing User 00 00 cece eee 269 How to Assign Existing Product Limits to Other Gateway Login IDs Simultaneously 274 How to Change Multiple Product Limit Values Simultaneously 0 5 276 How to Set Up Customer Defaults s 4 cacek codes RGR a PE EER Oe deed BREE SR REE 277 How to Update Customer Defaults Across Multiple Users Simultaneously 281 How to Review Changes Prior to Publishing to Guardian 2 0 0000 eee eee 285 How to Change the Message Users Receive When Their Logins Fail 288 How to Use Wildcard Characters in Filters 0 0 eee ccc eee een ee 290 How to Set Up a Tiered Administrator 2 oxand dad heesdkePereakeriinarhiceadwnsbie 291 How to Set Up a Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter Server and Corresponding FIX Adapter
293. option is unchecked Force logoff The following shows the Login section of the Main tab for new TT FIX Adapter Client AB TT User Setup User Manual 101 Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Gateway Logins F Adapter Product Group Permissions Login Username Display name Fis Client AB User group Fis Adapter CCDC Password co Confirm password Generate Password Active Password never expires Locked out Limit the number of concurrent logins based on IF address in 5 Configure the remaining options on the Main tab as needed Refer to the New User and Edit User Window Fields on page 41 topic for descriptions of the remaining fields The following table describes options that can cause orders to be rejected in specific instances These settings only apply to FIX clients of Order Routing FIX Adapters Field When orders will be rejected If the Trading Allowed option is unchecked Trading allowed the TT FIX Adapter will reject all orders from the FIX client If the GTC GTDate option is unchecked GTC GTDate orders allowed the TT FIX Adapter will reject all GTC and GTDate orders sent by the FIX client 102 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users Field When orders will be rejected If the Prevent orders option is checked the TT FIX Ad
294. ord Admin to User Groups listed below option A list of the available user groups appears Available User Groups Can only see Users in the following User Groups User Group 4 Users gt User Group 4 Default s Users filter fiter Chicago AMURPHY ANOWAK lt General gt TTSYSTEM FIX Adapter CCDC BROWN CCBO CCE New York AGOLD JKLINE LJOHN Rosemont 9 From the Available User Groups list click to select the user group that you want assigned to the Password Administrator If the group does not exist click Create and add it Note Press the Ctrl key to select multiple groups from the list 10 Using the transfer arrow buttons gt gt gt lt lt lt move one or more user group from the Avail able User Groups list to the Can only see Users in the following User Groups list Note A Password Administrator must be configured to manage at least one user group 11 Click Save 12 Skip to the Configuring the Outgoing Email Settings topic 90 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users Creating a View Only User A view only user can view but not edit data in any TT User Setup data window To create a View Only user From the User Admin menu select Users Set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields Click New Note To give an existing user administrative privileges select the user from the Users
295. order book and risk limits with a TTORD the trader s trades go to the exchange using the Exchange Trader credentials configured here TT User Setup allows you to map TTORD gateway login s to one or more exchange traders TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics When setting up a TTORD you use the Map to Exchange Traders button to assign the TTORD to the Exchange Traders For more information about how to configure TTORDs refer to the TT User Login and Risk Administration Reference Guide Note You cannot save a TTORD gateway login unless it is mapped to at least one exchange trader gt To map a TTORD gateway login to an exchange trader 1 From the Edit Gateway Login window click Map to Exchange Traders This button only appears when the Member portion of the MGT is a TTORD The Map Exchange Traders to window appears This window displays both exchange traders not currently assigned to the TTORD Available Exchange Traders and those that are currently assigned to the TTORD Selected Exchange Traders LJ Map Exchange Traders to TTORDJSOO1001 Co E Available Exchange Traders Selected Exchange Traders Gateway 4 Member 42 Group 4 Gateway 4 Member 42 Group 4 Trader filter M filter filter BTec AUUS LOW WABTT CBOT amp UMOg CM123 TT2 TT2 CME 001 001 AZ44 JP5 CBOT B 8C222 CBOT E NDN3 CBOT G B5002 D54032 001 D54001 ICE012 002
296. ore a single user is allowed to perform any subsequent logins Select a value long enough to allow all GuardServers to synchronize and have an accurate count of the number of current logins for each user The default value of 12 seconds is sufficient for most networks TT User Setup User Manual 227 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Note If the number of seconds defined for this setting is too low a user could log into a second or third machine before Guardian ever realizes that the first login took place Be sure to set the seconds high enough to ensure that users cannot surpass their concurrent login limitations 4 Click Save 5 For this setting to affect a user you must check the Limit the number of concurrent logins option for that user and set the Max number allowed field to an appropriate value These set tings are located on the Main tab of the user s New User or Edit User window You have successfully limited the number of concurrent logins Configuring Password Locking Rules Use the password locking feature to prevent users from logging in after defined limits are surpassed As an administrator you may not lock out a user However you can configure users to be locked out when either of the following conditions occurs e A user enters an incorrect password too many times e A user does not attempt a login within a certain number of days TT User Setup provides the user with a notification
297. ot Allow Trading is checked for a given account or account group Determines whether the prod uct group is allowed or blocked Indicates whether the user is allowed to deploy strategies to an Algo SE Server This setting is only valid when the Gateway is an Algo SE Server 328 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title Algo Sharing Allowed Alias Assigned Accounts see Accounts Assigned Gateway Logins see Gateway Logins Assigned Users see Users Auto Login Auto Gen SOD Positions Available Associated Windows GW Logins tab User GWL Attributes Assign to Avail able Users GW Logins tab GW Login Window Accounts Window GW Logins tab Selected Users User GWL Attributes Assign to Available Users Gateway Logins window Selected Users Description Indicates whether the user is allowed to share algorithms with other users on Algo SE servers This setting is only valid when the Gateway is an Algo SE Server and when the Algo deployment allowed option is checked An identifier associating Guardian data with a gateway login Typically the proper name of the user assigned to the gateway login Specifies if a user of a spe cific gateway login will be automatically logged into the associated gateways Determines whether or not the gateways assigned to this gateway login will be pre vented from generating St
298. ou leave Machine gun orders allowed checked which is the default setting the user can turn X_TRADER s Machine Gun option on or off Otherwise the user cannot enable the Machine Gun option in X_TRADER For information about the X_TRADER machine gun order entry property refer to the X_TRADER Help TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 51 2 User Administration Buttons Fields Description Determines whether Eurex orders sent from X_TRADER are automatically set to persist or whether the user can configure the Persist orders and Only GTC options in the Eurex section of the X_TRADER Order Entry prop erty tab e User Controlled The user can turn X_TRADER s Eurex Persist Orders and Only GTC options on or off as needed This is the default setting e Persist all orders All Eurex orders sent from X_TRADER will be set to persist and the user will not be able to turn X_TRADER s Eurex Persist orders option off e Persist all GTC orders Eurex GTC and TIF orders sent from X_TRADER will be set to persist and the user will not be able to turn X_TRADER s Eurex Only GTC option off Eurex Persist orders For information about the X_TRADER Eurex order properties refer to the X_TRADER Help X_TRADER Customer Defaults The X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab has the following buttons and fields Buttons Fields Description Creates a new customer default Refer to the
299. oup P L or positions for multiple traders via X_RISK s Position window You can also set up TT User Setup Administrators to manage particular user groups TT User Setup User Manual 195 Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration Note A Group Administrator can create user groups but cannot edit or delete them To create a new user group 1 From the User Admin menu select User Groups Assigned Users User Group filter wv filter Y Assigned Gateway Logins filter v Assigned Accounts filter lt General gt TTSYSTEM Chicago AB BOB ABCSYSTEM ABROWN ABCCD1001 AUUSLDWWABTT 001 1091981 1091982 12 London EMASON KAMIR MPATEL WROSE ABCCDUBW001 ABCCDUMK001 12345 ABCCD a ABCCD b New York AGOLD JKLINE LJOHNSON MB ABCCD1001 ABCCD1002 CM123 00099487 2435234534 AA Singapore MKOH MLIM STAN 8C222LL3JL3 AZ44BP5JP5 B50 8C222 a abc123 Abc1234 Sydney CROBINSON JLEE JSIMMS NWA ABCCD1002 CME001001 D5400 AACME15 CBOT2222 CM 4 Total rows displayed 13 Rows selected 0 Ready Note You can also access the User Groups window by clicking Select Group on the Edit User window 2 From the User Groups window click New 3 In the New User Group window enter the new user group name into the Name field 4 Click Save Newly created user groups appear in the User Groups window 196 TT User Setup User Manual Tra
300. oup administrators also can not create a gateway login that shares an order book identical Member and Group IDs with a gateway login from another user group gt To create a Group Administrator 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 Set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields 3 Click New 86 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users Note To give an existing user administrative privileges select the user from the Users window and click Edit You can then change the View to TT User Setup Admin fields 4 On the Main tab edit any Login Contact or User Defined fields as needed 5 Click the TT User Setup Permissions tab Main TT User Setup Permissions Qutgoing Email Settings None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access Group Administrator Can only manage the User Groups listed below Able to manage Gateway Logins Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins If unchecked can only create and edit TTORDSs 6 Select the Group Administrator option 7 To allow this administrator to manage gateway logins check the Able to manage Gateway Logins option Note When copying a user a Group Administrator cannot copy the user s gateway login s unless the Able to manage Gateway Logins option is checked 8 To allow this Group Administrator to create and edit Direct Trader gatew
301. p and Trader fields 3 When creating Direct Trader gateway logins on certain Gateways e g Eurex ICE CBOT and LIFFE the Password and Confirm Password fields are enabled because they are required by the exchange Enter the appropriate password in the fields 4 Do one of the following 5 For exchange traders continue to the Assigning Gateways to Gateway Logins on page 137 topic 6 For TTORDs continue to the Mapping a TTORD to an Exchange Trader on page 138 topic Note When you enter a TTORD in the Member field the Map to Exchange Traders button appears automatically Otherwise the Add Gateways button appears Disabling Start of Day Records Per Gateway Login MGT you can configure whether a Gateway should automatically generate Start of Day records When the Disable Auto Calculate SOD option is checked gateways will not gener ate Start of Day records for the configured Gateway Login To disable Start of Day Records 1 Open the New Gateway Logins or Edit Gateway Logins window 136 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics 2 Check the Disable Auto Calculate SOD option to prevent SOD records from being gener ated for this gateway login Gateway Login Info Group Pemissons Member TTORDJS Group O01 Trader on Set Password Alias E Disable Auto Calculate SOD Assigning Gateways to Gateway Logins When c
302. per Administrator 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 Set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields 3 Click New Note To give an existing user administrative privileges select the user from the Users window and click Edit You can then change the View to TT User Setup Admin fields 4 On the Main tab edit any Login Contact or User Defined fields as needed 5 Click the TT User Setup Permissions tab Main TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access 6 Select the Super Administrator option and then click Save 7 Skip to the Configuring the Outgoing Email Settings on page 93 topic Creating a Group Administrator A Group Administrator can view edit and create users gateway logins and accounts that exist in one of the groups the administrator is designated to manage A Group Administrator must be configured to manage at least one user group and could potentially manage all of the user groups Depending on the options selected the Group Administrator can manage gateway logins and create Direct Trader gateway logins Note Group Administrators cannot grant permissions they have not been granted themselves For example if the administrator does not have X_RISK Manual Fill Access then the administrator cannot assign Manual Fill access to any other users in a user group he manages Gr
303. permissions logout of TT User Setup and then log back in using the login of the user you created e g AMURPHY If this is the first time logging in the system prompts you to change the password TT User Setup User Manual 295 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials The Users window only displays the users that belong to the group s that the group administrator is allowed to manage How to Set Up a Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter Server and Corre sponding FIX Adapter Clients In this tutorial you will learn how to set up IDs for a Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter server as well as FIX Adapter client users that will connect to it After creating the IDs you will then be able to assign the FIX Adapter clients to the FIX Adapter server The following example demonstrates these tasks Example ClearCo hosts three TT Gateways CME A Eurex A and LIFFE C used by traders at two separate firms AB Asset Management and YZ Capital The credentials used by the trad ers at these firms for all TT Gateways are as follows AB Asset Management YZ Capital TTORDAB 001 001 TTORDAB 001 002 TTORDAB 002 001 TTORDAB 002 002 TTORDAB 003 001 TTORDAB 004 001 TTORDYZ 001 001 TTORDYZ 001 002 TTORDYZ 002 001 TTORDYZ 002 002 TTORDYZ 003 001 TTORDYZ 004 001 These firms require a copy of all fills for all of their traders ClearCo s Back Office Department also requires a copy
304. ping a TTORD to an Exchange Trader on page 138 Assigning Accounts on page 141 Configuring Risk on page 143 Publishing to Guardian on page 205 Assigning the MemberGroupTrader ID A gateway login is either an Exchange Trader ID or a TTORD ID Exchange Trader ID A login assigned in part by the exchange that indicates the user s mem bership with the exchange All traders need an exchange trader ID or must be associated with one to trade with an exchange TTORD ID A proxy login that allows multiple logins to be mapped to a single exchange mem bership It also allows for more configurable order routing and risk limit setups For more information about defining gateway logins refer to the TT User Login and Risk Administra tion Reference Manual To assign the MemberGroupTrader ID 1 From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins and then click New Note You can also create gateway logins from the New User or Edit User window For more information refer to Creating a New Gateway Login through the Users Window on page 82 The New Gateway Login window appears TT User Setup User Manual 135 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics ft New Gateway Login Group Pemissions Gateway Login Info Member TTORDJS Group 00i Trader 001 Set Password Alias E Disable Auto Calculate SOD 2 Enter the appropriate ID data in the Member Grou
305. ple users have simi lar account numbers that only differ slightly because of the current restriction that TTORDs must be assigned unique accounts For more information refer to the Creating and Managing X_TRADER Customer Defaults topic e Collect Log Files Only Permissions TT User Setup includes a new permission type Collect Log Files Only A user with this permission type will be able to collect any log files in the trad ing environment including log files containing sensitive trading information This user cannot view or edit any user or system settings For more information refer to the Creating a Collect Log Files Only User topic e Add and Delete Currencies Super administrators can now set the primary currency and add and delete currencies from within TT User Setup The administrator publishes any changes to Guardian For more information refer to the Adding and Deleting Currencies topic e Viewing and Publishing Licenses Super administrators can now view load and publish licenses from within TT User Setup Previously this functionality was only available from Guardian For more information refer to the Viewing and Publishing Licenses topic e Editing Product Margins Super administrators can edit the product margins per market from within TT User Setup This functionality was previously only available in Guardian For more information refer to the Editing Product Margins and Viewing and Clearing Product
306. ption 92 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users Main TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access Group Administrator Can only manage the User Groups listed below Able to manage Gateway Logins Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins If unchecked can only create and edit TTORDSs Gateway Login Administrator Restrict Gateway Login Administrator to User Groups listed below Password Administrator Can only reset user passwords and unlock users Restrict Password Admin to User Groups listed below O View Only Restrict View Only User to User Groups listed below Collect Logfiles Only Can only use TT User Setup to collect log files 7 Click Save Configuring the Outgoing Email Settings TT User Setup allows you to send newly generated passwords to users over email This functionality is available only to Super Administrators Group Administrators and Password Administrators Note When upgrading from a pre 7 2 version of TT User Setup TT User setup populates the Outgoing Email Settings tab with the Email Account settings if available To enable and set up outgoing email settings 1 Access the Edit User or New User window for a Super Administrator Group Administrator or Password Administrator and then click the Outgo
307. ption is also available from the right click menu You are about to assign one or more accounts to an account group In doing so any existing risk parameters associated with these accounts will be lost and they will inherit the risk parameters of the selected account group hcan Gow a a New Ready TT User Setup User Manual 162 Trading Technologies International Inc 10 Account Group Administration 3 From the Assign Account Group window select an account group and then click OK If the account group does not exist click New and create an account group refer to the Creating Account Groups on page 160 topic if needed The accounts will lose any existing risk configu ration and inherit the risk parameters of the assigned groups 4 To remove an account from an account group select one or more accounts and then select Remove from account group Note To assign risk limits to the account group refer to the Adding Account Group Level Risk Check ing on page 176 Note To determine which accounts are assigned to a group you can either filter the Account Group column in the Accounts window or open the Edit Account Group window and view the list of Associ ated Accounts TT User Setup User Manual 163 Trading Technologies International Inc 10 Account Group Administration 164 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Gateway Login Risk Administration Risk and Administrat
308. r filter filter KE1 003 TT User Setup only Publishing will send to Guardian This record exists in Guardian and TT User Setup but TT User setup has changes that are not 4p Publishing will overwrite Guardian 7Accc yet published to Guardian 1g will overwrite Guardian Gatewa KE1 001 TT User Setup only Publishing will send to Gus This record only exists in etup only Publishing will send to Guardian TT User Setup until it is published to Guardian and TT Use excnange iraqers anter TTORDNY 4p Publishing will overwrite Guardian Accounts er TTORDOR TTORDOR TTORDOR lt 1g will delete from Guardian olishing will send to Guardian setup only Publishing will send to Guardian This record only exists in Guardian and can be imported via the context menu E v gt Total rows displayed Rows selected 9 TT User Setup does not support setting up risk in Guardian However for instances where risk was pub lished outside of TT User Setup e g records exist in Guardian only you can use the Import from Guardian option Note Because TT User Setup automatically imports all trader data from Guardian when the TT User Setup Server starts up you will rarely use this functionality To import data from Guardian TT User Setup User Manual 287 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 1 From the File menu select Publish to Guardian Or On the toolbar click the Publish to G
309. r Second 600 500 400 300 _ Orders 200 100 T f Seconds Order Throughput Example Enabling and Setting the Order Throughput Controls a 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 From the Users window click a user row and then click Edit To enable and set the order throughput controls The Edit User window appears and defaults to the Main tab The User Level Risk section con tains the order throughput controls TT User Setup User Manual 193 Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking User Level Risk Trading allowed Currency eh E Use FAL risk algorithm E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price Only enforce a maxdmum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders E Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second Ovenide credit for TT SIM Unlimited 3 To prevent more than a specific number of orders per second check the Per TT Gateway pre vent more than X orders per second checkbox and enter the number of orders per second Note Use the Prevent more than X orders per second overrides the User Level setting option to set the maximum rate of orders per second allowed per TT Gateway and override the user level setting For more details refer to Overriding the Order Throughput Controls on page 194 4 Click Save Overriding the Order Throughput Controls To override the maximum order
310. r book i e traders with the same Member and Group can access orders from a common Group order book Brokers who manage each other s customer accounts often use groups Traders who do not want to share an order book use a unique Group Specifies the user specific identifier for the individual trader Exchanges might have spe cific requirements regarding the Trader ID Trader portion as well For example on CME a Trader ID can be used to uniquely identify each trader within a firm 124 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Password Confirm password Alias Disable Auto Calculate SOD Add to Guardian Risk Check Description Note The Member Group and Trader fields form a unique Member Group Trader set also called an MGT Specifies the password for an Exchange MGT Passwords are only needed for Exchange Trader Logins in some markets When not needed TT User Setup disables the Password and Confirm Password fields Identifies a given gateway login It is typically the proper name of the user assigned to the gateway login Determines whether or not the gateways assigned to this gateway login will be pre vented from generating Start of Day records When the Disable Auto Calculate SOD option is checked gateways will not generate Start of Day records for the configured Gate way Login Designates whether a ga
311. r client user in TT user Setup that connects to an Order Routing TT FIX Adapter consists of the following tasks Creating a FIX Adapter Client username To create a client username 1 From the TT user Setup Control Panel open the user Admin menu and click users The users window appears 2 From the New user View list select FIX Adapter Client fields New User View FIX Adapter Client fields 3 Click New The New User window appears 4 On the Main tab enter data in the following fields 5 Username The name of the FIX Adapter Client user In FIX this is also known as Remote Compld 6 Displayname A more detailed description of the TT FIX Adapter Client user typically the full name of the client 7 User group An identifier used to categorize users e g FIX Adapter CCOR For a detailed description of user groups refer to the TT user Setup user Guide 312 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 8 Password Confirm Password The password associated with this username which is used to authenticate TT FIX Adapter Client users The following shows the Login section of the Main tab for new TT FIX Adapter Client AB BOB Gateway Logins Fl Adapter Product Group Permissions Login Username B BOB Display name Fis Client 4B BOB User group Fis Adapter CCOR Password Confirm password e Generate Password Active Password never expires
312. r gt Customer DMILLER Make Ft Gateway Product type FUTURE Product values difer E Account type Give up FFT2 FFT3 Note Columns containing various values display lt values differ gt e g One row may have CME as the Market value and another may have Eurex 5 Inthe Account field click the ellipsis button The Select Account window appears TT User Setup User Manual 283 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 41 Account Description Member v filter Y 6 Filter the Account field by 1091982 Highlight the row with an Account Description of DMiller and click Select The Account field on the Edit Multiple Customer Defaults window is populated 8 Click Save The Customer Defaults window updates to reflect the change in the account number 284 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials E Customer Defaults secs x Username l DisplayName Group User Status Customer 4 Sel Market 4 Gatew Prod filter v filter v filter v filter Y dmiller v v filter w filter w filter AMURPHY Alan Murphy DMILLER 2 2 mowak adamvowat crease newe omer a omer oovamaer crease acive owej a S Mm Total rows displayed 4 Rows selected 4 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit How to Review Changes Prior to
313. r is currently locked out Allows you to restrict the number of times a single user s login can be in use simultane ously You must also enforce the Concurrent Logins rules at the system level for this field to have affect Refer to Configuring Concur rent Login Rules on page 227 if needed Allows you to shut down a user s running X_TRADER application to reclaim the X_TRADER license The user cannot log back in until Force logoff is unchecked Enables a user s ability to access the TT API This option is unchecked by default and is only applicable to TTNET customers Determines whether a user can place Good Till Cancel and Good Till Date orders Stores optional information such as MGT account number etc Stores the user s Country Address City State Zip Email and Phone Number Enables a user s ability to trade The Trading allowed option is visible only after saving a new user it is checked by default Note The Trading Allowed option must be checked for any user that will add modify or delete orders This means that non tradable administrator logins e g TTADMXXX100 or TTORDTSXXXMGR must have the Trad ing Allowed option checked to delete orders even though they are unable to trade TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 43 2 User Administration Fields Credit Currency Use P amp L risk algorithm Prevent orders that are more than X ticks from the marke
314. r more fields as needed e g change the User group field to London 6 When you are finished editing save your changes and close the window The data grid shows the updated user information You successfully edited multiple users information a To delete multiple records Open a data grid window Click Delete A ae a You have successfully deleted multiple users Applying Filters 30 Press the Ctrl or Shift keys and select the rows you want to delete On the delete confirmation warning message click OK TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Filters make it easier to locate specific data in data grids by displaying only the rows that match the col umn filter s Filters can be blank non blank or a string including wildcards that you enter gt To filter a column 1 From the User Admin menu or Server Admin menu select any window with a grid display e g the Gateway Logins window The filter options are above each column in the column header row Note The available filter options vary based on the data displayed in the associated column s fields 2 To display the available filters select the column you want to filter and click the drop down arrow The filter options available in every applicable window include Filter No Filter Blank Non Blank lt string gt Function Removes the current filter Disp
315. r same gateway FIX Adapter client Users configured for gateways that a FIX Adapter is not configured for FIX Adapter Client Users with Gateway Logins FX Adapter that are incompatible with an assigned FIX Adapter FIX Adapter client Users with multiple available to FIX Adapter fix client flags checked for same gateway Order Books with Users with mismatched Order Book Gateways Users with Direct Trader Logins that arent fully Order Book compatible with some TTORD Order Books Order Books with mismatched Product Order Book Unselect All Sync selection with automatic diagnostics 4 From the Diagnostics Checks window click Run Refresh Diagnostic Checks Any issues are listed by issue type and include a summary of the issue For a detailed explanation of an issue type click explain this M Resolve any issues discovered through the diagnostic check 6 To run other diagnostic checks re open the Configure Diagnostics window and select your typ ical diagnostic checks or click Sync selection with automatic diagnostics to select only the checks that are configured to run automatically After the diagnostic checks are selected click OK and then click Run Refresh Diagnostic Checks When all the issues are resolved you are finished with this tutorial TT User Setup User Manual 307 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials
316. r v filter filter filter v filter v filter v filter v filter fil 7 Trading allowed BTec FUTURE No 0 100 Unlimited Ignore P amp L CBOT A FUTURE No 0 100 Unlimited CBOT B FUTURE No 0 100 Unlimited Credit Unlimited CBOT G SPREAD No 0 Unlimited Unlimited CME FUTURE No 0 1000 100 Currency USD KA Eurex FUTURE No 0 2000 Unlimited E Overide credit for TT SIM Eurex SPREAD No 0 2000 Unlimited Unlimited 4 m a a Note The Add to Guardian option must be checked for product limits to be enabled 3 From the Product Limits section of the Edit Gateway Login window click Copy from Exist ing 4 From the Copy from Existing Product Limits window select the rows that you want to copy Note Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple rows 5 Click Done The copied product limits appear in the Product Limits pane 6 On the Edit Gateway Login window click Save You have successfully copied existing product limits TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 171 11 Risk Administration Copying Product Limits to Additional Gateways or Gateway Logins You can copy product limits from one or more gateways to another gateway or you can copy product limits from one or more gateway logins e g MGTs to additional gateway logins To copy product limits to additional Gateway Logins 1 Do one of the following From the User Admin menu select Product Limits e From the Edit User w
317. rade to a version that complies with this version rule e Select Warn User if a message will alert the user to the warning but login will be allowed Note If the selected application is managed by TT Update users will be allowed but not required to upgrade or downgrade to a version that complies with this version rule 8 Inthe Additional Message field define text that displays after the message that appears indicat ing the reason the user was warned or had their login rejected 9 Click Save Resetting the Guardian Exchange Tree The Reset Guardian Exchange Tree option removes any exchanges and IP addresses where there are no running services for all Guardians in the environment gt To reset the Guardian exchange tree 1 From the Server Admin menu select Reset Guardian Exchange Tree 2 When prompted to confirm the reset click Yes The Guardian exchange tree resets Editing the Currency Exchange Rates The Edit Currency Exchange Rates feature allows you to edit the exchange rates listed in Guardian These exchange rates are used in P amp L and risk calculations in X_TRADER and X_RISK Note If you use TT User Setup to edit the currency exchange rates do not edit currency rates with Guardian gt To edit the currency exchange rates 212 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration 1 From the Server Admin menu select Currency Exchange Rates The Currency
318. raded Price and the P L based on setting in X_TRADER remains editable Prevent orders that are more than X ticks from the market price Determines how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks You can allow traders to sell above this range and buy below it by checking the Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders option Per TT Gateway prevent more than X orders per second Limits the number of orders per second per TT Gateway Override credit for TT SIM Provides a different credit limit for TT SIM Trading To add user level checking to an existing user 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 From the Users window click a user row and then click Edit The Edit User window appears and defaults to the Main tab 3 In the User Level Risk section check the Trading allowed option to allow the user to trade Note Trading allowed is checked by default TT User Setup User Manual 185 Trading Technologies International Inc Nn 13 User Level Risk Checking User Level Risk Trading allowed Currency usp m E Use FAL risk algorithm E Prevent orders that are more than ticks from the market price Only enforce a maxdmum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders E Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second Ovenide credit for TT SIM Unlimited In the Credit field enter a monetary limit as needed Note The default setting is for
319. raders customer defaults use the same customer setting for all of a trader s customer defaults and check the Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults option Creating a Customer Default To create a customer default 1 From the X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab or the Customer Defaults window click New The New Customer Default window appears TT User Setup User Manual 75 Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users 76 es New Customer Default ole V Selected Usemame AGOLD These fields do not apply to X_TRADER versions 7 8 or later Customer Time in force TIF GTD v Market i 4 Order type Limit X Gateway in d Order restriction lt None gt X Product type e v Open Close Open z Product Enforce max order qty Max order qty 1 Account Account type A1 Give up FFT2 FFT3 Save and Add New Close Ready Enter the Customer name for this default and select the Market Gateway Product type and Product defaults that this customer default uses These options together make up the key for this record Two records cannot have the same key Enter an Account number or click the browse button to select an account number If you enter an account that does not exist TT User Setup creates it Select the Account type and then enter the Give up clearing member code and the free form te
320. rate of orders allowed per TT Gateway This value overrides the user level Per TT Gateway prevent more than X orders per second setting The value entered in the Prevent more than X orders per sec Max Orders Sec ond overrides the User Level setting field displays in Max Orders Sec You can edit the maximum orders per second in this column per TT Gateway for the selected user Specifies the Operator ID that is used to iden Operator ID tify the trader or operator to the exchange Gateway Login Window Field Descriptions This topic describes all of the New Gateway Login and Edit Gateway Login window tabs and fields The available tabs and associated windows are as follows Gateway Login Info The Gateway Login Info tab contains the gateway login basic information as well as the Gateways Exchange Traders Accounts Product Limits and Group Permissions sections TT User Setup User Manual 123 Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Description Specifies the broadest type of ID The Mem ber may identify one of the following e The exchange on which the user trades The firm with which the individual user is associated Member e A branch office Member content depends on exchange spe cific requirements as described in the Trader Login Requirements table in the TT User Login and Risk Administration Reference Guide Identifies traders who share an orde
321. reated The sum available at the start of a trading session against Credit per MGT GW Logins tab GW Login which a single MGT can Window entering orders whereby only that trader s activity can affect the credit limit GW Logins tab GW Login The currency in which trades Currency Window are calculated e g USD United States Dollar 330 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title Customer DB Location Default Account Description Display Name Directly Assignable to Users Associated Windows XT CD tab TT User Setup Servers GW Logins tab Selected Users User GWL Attributes Assign to Available Users FA Account Defaults XT FA Account Defaults tab Assign Accounts Account Groups Users Selected Users Assign to Available Users UserGWL Attributes FA tab Gateway Logins Description Ordinarily the proper name of a user which is used to define customer default records The location of your TT User Setup database files on your machine Specifies the default account type as defined by the exchange A1 A9 G1 G2 M1 M3 P1 P3 or U1 U3 Assign Accounts Text describing what an account is used for e g proprietary trading customer account broker error account etc Account Groups An optional description of the account group An identifier associated with the username that appears in grid displays to help identify
322. reating an exchange trader login you must assign at least one gateway to the gateway login To assign a gateway to a gateway login 1 From the Edit Gateway Login window click Add Gateways Note You can also assign gateway s to one or more gateway login s from the Gateway Logins window Refer to the Assigning Gateways to Multiple Gateway Logins on page 150 topic The Select Gateway window appears TT User Setup User Manual 137 Trading Technologies International Inc 8 Gateway Login Administration Basics Gateway 410 Market Exchange ID filter filter filter lgoSE A IgoSE 1030 A IgoSE AA AlgoSE IgoSE B AlgoSE IgoSE BB AlgoSE IgoSE C AlgoSE A A A A lgo SE CC IqoSE IqoSE IqoSE IgoSE D IgoSE DD A A A A A A A A A Igo SE E IgoSE Note If you add a new market to the TT User Setup environment you must restart the TT User Setup server before the new market is available from the Select Gateway window Click the row of the gateway s you want to add and click Select Note You might need to create a password depending on the gateway to which you mapped the gateway login Ifyou want to manage risk for this gateway login check the Add to Guardian option and con tinue to the Assigning Accounts on page 141 topic Otherwise click Save You have successfully created a gateway login Mapping a TTORD to an Exchange Trader While the TT system associates a trader s
323. rency Margin Limit Group Name gpSSE44 Iter filter filter filter v Group Description Group SSE44 BTec USD Apply product limits V Allow trading x Show only configured or visible gateways Product Limits New Edit Delete Gateway 4 ProductType 42 Product 2 TT SIM Only Margin Addi Margin Max Order Qty Max Position LastChanged Last Chang Max v ite v ilter v filter d filte d filter Y filter Y filter Y filter v filter v filter Account Group risk checking only available in 7 16 8 gateways or later Save and Add New Close Ready In the New Account Group window enter the new account group name into the Group name field In the Group Description field enter a description if needed Configure the product limits as described in the Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups on page 176 topic When you are ready for the product limits to be applied check the Apply product limits option No account or account group risk checking will take place until this option is enabled If you want trades submitted with an account in this account group to be rejected uncheck the Allow trading option Otherwise leave the Allow trading option checked Note Users logging in with Gateway Logins that end in MGR e g TTADM XXX MGR can delete orders regardless of whether or not Allow Trading is checked for a given account group
324. rmines if the user is restricted to entering orders within a specified number of ticks from the market price 338 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title Priority Product Product Group Product Type Pwd Never Expires Restrict Restrict Order Throughput Restrict FA Account Defaults Restrict XT Cust Defaults Risk Check Associated Windows XT FA Account Defaults tab FA Account Defaults XT CD tab Product Limits Window XT Product Group Permis sions tab XT CD tab XT FA Account Defaults tab FA Account Defaults Product Limits Window Users XT CD tab Users Users Users GW Logins tab GW Login Window Description Specifies the priority of the FIX adapter account default When an order matches more than one account default based on key values TT FIX Adapter server uses the match with the highest prior Ity Defines the product e g FGBL ODAX etc that a trader can trade The product group e g CA Futures Defines the product type e g futures options spreads etc that a trader can trade Indicates whether there is a time limit enabled on a users login password Specifies if the user has an order restriction such as FOK IOC or LSM Determines if the user is lim ited to a specified number of orders per second per TT Gateway Identifies whether or not this user is restr
325. rnational Inc 2 User Administration Fields Collect Log Files Only Description Provides permission to collect any log files in the trading environment including log files containing sensitive trading information The user will not be able to view or edit any users or settings but will be able to view the TT User Setup server messages TT User Setup server status and environment server status reports Outgoing Email Settings The Outgoing Email Settings apply to Super Administrators Group Administrators and Password Administrators Fields Enable outgoing email settings SMTP server host or IP address SMTP port SMTP server requires authentication Use SSL From email address Email subject Description Enables the email settings for TT User Setup administrators who need to email user pass words Specifies the email server used for sending email Specifies the port used for sending email 25 is standard for most ports Enables SMTP server authentication This is an optional setting that is only necessary if your email server requires authentication When this option is enabled you must provide an SMTP server account name and password Enables SSL This is an added security mea sure required by most servers Specifies the string that appears in the From field of the email sent to the recipient Specifies the subject that appears in the pass word email TT User
326. roduct limits for the source CME A Gateway are copied and saved as product limits for the target CME B gateway al ad Users Member 42 Group 43 Trader Product 4 ProdType 4 Margin Addl Mrgn Max Ord Cty filter v filter filter x filter v filter x ffilter filter x filter v filter v TTORDKL 002 002 FUTURE 0 100 TTORDKL 002 002 FUTURE 0 100 e MGTs Any MGTs that a user may have for the source gateway are copied and saved as MGTs for the target gateway For example MGTs for the source CME Gateway are copied as MGTs for the target CME B Gateway 222 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Username 4 Display Name User Group User Status Gateway 42 Member Group Trader Avail to User filter vi fi tera vi filter filter x filter v filter filter vi filter filter v JDOE John Doe Chicago Active TTORDJS 022 002 Yes JDOE John Doe Chicago Active TTORDJS 022 002 Yes Note When migrating you can chose to remove the gateway login information for the original gate way or you can keep the gateway login information for both the original and the new gateways To migrate users to a new gateway 1 From the Server Admin menu select Migrate Users to New Gateway The Migrate Users to New Gateway window appears TT User Setup User Manual 223
327. rol Panel includes a Toolbar and a Menu bar Note Use the Find Control Panel option available on most right click menus to bring the control panel into focus This is useful when other screens have overlapped the control panel Use the Toolbar to access the various TT User Setup windows The buttons that appear on the Toolbar are as follows TT User Setup User Manual 17 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Button Function Opens the Users window which allows you to 3 set up new users and their login properties contact and password information Opens the Gateway Logins window and allows you to configure a gateway login A gateway login includes Member Group and Trader IDs account numbers and pre trade risk parameters which traders use to log into gateways lin Note The Gateway Logins window in TT User Setup 7 1 7 4 is very similar to the Trader Setup window in Guardian Even if you do not set up users for universal login you can still manage your Guardian trader and risk setup from this window Opens the Product Limitswindow which allows you to view and edit all product limits across all traders Opens the X_TRADER Customer Defaults window which allows you to view and edit customer defaults used in X_TRADER p TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Using the Menu Options Getting Started Button ip K Fun
328. rom X_TRADER automatically persist supported in X_TRADER 7 12 and later For more information refer to the X_TRADER Properties section of the New User and Edit User Window Fields topic 7 4 2 Enhancements TT SIM Support TT User Setup supports TT SIM mode trading using existing gateway logins and user profiles If needed you can also configure credit limits and product limits that apply only to TT SIM trades and you can configure a user to only trade in TT SIM mode For more information refer to the Creating TT SIM Credit Limits and Product Limits topic Copying User Enhancements TT User Setup now provides additional options when copying users including copying admin gateway logins customer defaults and account defaults The Copy User feature continues to support copying direct trader gateway logins as well as copying TTORD gateway logins For more information refer to the Copying Users topic Replacing Account Numbers in Customer Default Records You can replace one or more customer default account numbers with similar account numbers based on selected pattern matching rules For example you can append or prefix the existing account numbers with addi TT User Setup User Manual 9 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started tional characters or replace the first or last n characters with other characters This is useful for making slight modifications to many accounts at once for example if multi
329. roup Assigned Users Assigned Gateway Logins Assigned Accounts Y filter filter w filte lt General gt TTSYSTEM Chicago AB BOB ABCSYSTEM ABROWN ABCCD1001 AUUSLDWWABTT 001 1091981 1091982 123 London EMASON KAMIR MPATEL WROSE ABCCDUBW001 ABCCDUMK001 12345 ABCCD a ABCCD b New York AGOLD JKLINE JOHNSON MB ABCCD1001 ABCCD1002 CM123 00099487 2435234534 AAC Singapore MKOH MLIM STAN 8C222LL3JL3 AZ44BPSJP5 B50 8C222 a abc123 Abc12345 Sydney CROBINSON JLEE JSIMMS NWA ABCCD1002 CME001001 D5400 AACME15 CBOT2222 CME2 _ 4 w p Total rows displayed 13 Rows selected 0 Ready e To add or edit a user group refer to the Creating User Groups on page 195 topic e To assign gateway logins to a selected user group refer to the Assigning User Groups to Gate way Logins on page 200 topic e To create an administrative user that is limited to managing specific user groups refer to Creat ing a Group Administrator on page 86 Note The User Groups window is a standard data grid except that you cannot copy or mass edit user groups Refer to the Data Grid Functionality on page 25 topic if needed Creating User Groups From the User Groups window you can create user groups to set up divisions in your organization After you create user groups you can assign users gateway logins and accounts to those user groups X_RISK administrators can then use the user groups to gr
330. roup Trader CME CME 001 001 The highlighted row indicates that the ID TTORDFA 001 001 is mapped to exchange trader CME in TT User Setup but not in Guardian The middle pane specifies the Gateway Login to which each Gateway or exchange trader is mapped fer Setup CMEA CME om on uadian CMEA CME 001 lom Product Limits The bottom pane indicates 4 that the product limits for TTORDFA 001 001 match between TT User Setup and Guardian Data Gateway Product ProductType Max Qty MaxPos AddtlMran Allow Tradout User Setup CME A FUTURE 0 2000 0 True CME A FUTURE o 2000 0 True Note If DisableProductLimitPublishingMode is on Risk related fields are not published and are therefore not listed in the difference detail refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual for more information about the DisableProductLimitPublishingMode parameter TT User Setup User Manual 207 Trading Technologies International Inc 15 Publishing to Guardian Understanding Publish Warnings After publishing TT User Setup provides some helpful hints about your data that might indicate errone ous setups For example Warning The data you re attempting to publish may include some risk configuration problems You should review the following items before publishing 7379954 KE1 004 doesn t have product limits for the following gateways CBOT 4 CBOT B
331. roup window appears TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials T Mew User Group Mame E Order passing 9 Enter the Name of a new group e g Chicago and click Save The new group is added automatically to the Can only manage the following User Groups pane Available User Groups Can only manage the following User Groups User Group 4 Default s Users Chicago AMURPHY ANOWAK APOUL User Group 4 Users filter w filter lt General gt TTSYSTEM FIX Adapter CCDC ABROVYN CCBO CCD FIX Adapter CCOR AB BILL AB BOB AB London EMASON KAMIR MPA Hew York AGOLD JKLINE LJOH Singapore MKOH MLIM STAN Sydney CROBINSON JLEE JSI Note If the Default s option is checked any direct traders created by the Group Administrator automatically go into that default group e g Chicago 10 Click Save and then click Close 11 On the Users window select highlight multiple users and click Edit 12 On the Edit Multiple Records warning click OK to proceed The Edit Multiple Users window appears TT User Setup User Manual 293 Trading Technologies International Inc Main All User Properties X_STUDY FMDS 18 Tutorials Login Usemame lt VALUES DIFFER gt Display name lt values differ gt User group lt values differ gt A V Active E Password never expires E Limit the number of concurrent lo
332. rs active servers within your environment and determines and displays which have an appropriate license The location of your TTUser SetupServer exe file on your machine 332 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Column Title FA DMA Order Creation FA Order Logging FA Price Logging FA Role FA Staged Order Creation FFT 2 3 First lt DEFAULT gt FMDS Primary Secondary IP Addr FMDS Primary Secondary Port FMDS Primary Secondary Service FMDS Primary Secondary Timeout Associated Windows Users Users Users User GWL Attributes Users Users XT CD tab FA Account Defaults XT FA Account Defaults tab XT CD tab Users Users Users Users Description Determines whether the user is allowed to claim and work staged orders Determines if debug mes sages generated by the Order Server are logged to the log files Determines if debug mes sages generated by the Price Server are logged to the log files The Fix Adapter role client or server Determines whether the user is allowed to create staged orders Free Form Text Field 2 A value assigned by a user of TT s X_TRADER applica tion and displayed in X_RISK for annotation pur poses by the trader or back office sub account Specifies whether a lt DEFAULT gt customer default entry was the first such default created for that user Specifies t
333. rs will retain the gateway login information for the source gateway leave the checkbox unchecked This option is typically used when adding additional gateways e To delete the gateway login information for the source gateways check the checkbox This option is typically used when gateways have been rebranded TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration 4 Select how the Available to User or Available to FIX Client login attributes will be set for the new gateway logins e Select Copy source settings to target to use the source gateway s settings e Select Set all to available checked to set the option on for all users that were mapped to the source gateway regardless of the current setting e Select Set all to unavailable unchecked to set the option off for all users that were mapped to the source gateway regardless of the current setting 5 Select how the Automatically Login login attribute will be set for the new gateway logins e Select Copy source settings to target to use the source gateway s settings e Select Set all to auto checked to set the Automatically Login login attribute on for all users that were mapped to the source gateway regardless of the current setting e Select Set all to manual unchecked to set the Automatically Login login attribute off for all users that were mapped to the source gateway regardless of the current setting 6 Select how the Mandatory Login logi
334. s 8 Password Confirm Password The password associated with this username which is used to authenticate TT FIX Adapter client users The following shows the Login section of the Main tab for new TT FIX Adapter Client AB Gateway Logins Fl Adapter Product Group Permissions Login Username Display name Fis Client AB User group Fis Adapter CCOC Password Confirm password Generate Password Active Password never expires fo Locked out Limit the number of concurrent logins based on IF address Ml Because FIX Adapter client users are unable to update an expired password using the same pro cedure as an X_TRADER user TT recommends that you leave the Password never expires option checked For information about the other user fields refer to the TT User Setup User Guide 9 Repeat this procedure to create users YZ and CCBO 10 Continue to the next procedure Assigning TT Gateway Credentials When creating a TT FIX Adapter client user that connects to a Drop Copy TT FIX Adapter you must designate one or more sets of credentials gateway logins that have permissions to view the fills that 302 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials are required This procedure is similar to setting up a TTORD in Guardian except in TT User Setup you can create the TTORD and assign it to a FIX Adapter client in one step In our example TT F
335. s on page 41 topic Note You can create a new user by copying an existing user record Refer to the Copying Users on page 64 topic as needed Using Views The New User and Edit User windows contain all the fields needed to create any type of user How ever some fields apply only to X_TRADER X_RISK users while others apply only to FIX Adapter Servers FIX Adapter Clients or TT User Setup administrators Selecting the appropriate view from the View or New User View drop down determines what the New User or Edit User window displays _TRADER X_RISK fields FIX Adapter Server fields FIX Adapter Client fields The View and New User View options are e X TRADER X_RISK Fields on page 39 e FIX Adapter Server Fields on page 40 e FIX Adapter Client Fields on page 40 e TT User Setup Admin Fields on page 41 X_TRADER X RISK Fields To create an X_TRADER or X_RISK user select X_TRADER X_RISK fields as the View TT User Setup User Manual 39 Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration View X_TRADER RiSK fields When you create or edit a user the New User or Edit User window includes the following tabs Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X RISK Product Group Permissions X_TRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS FIX Adapter Server Fields To create a FIX Adapter Server user s
336. s and corresponding FIX client users The New User and Edit User windows contain new FIX Adapter tabs and the User Admin menu contains a new FIX Adapter Account Defaults menu item Views Added a View or New User View drop down list to the Users New User and Edit User windows that allows an administrator to show only the tabs that are applicable to the type of user being created For example when creating a FIX Adapter server user the administrator selects the FIX Adapter Server View to show only FIX Adapter server tabs X_STUDY FMDS configuration enhancement Added a tab to the System Settings window that allows an administrator to enable or disable X_ STUDY and FMDS at a system level and to configure the primary and secondary X_STUDY FMDS server settings for the entire system When X_STUDY and FMDS are enabled at the system level the administrator can enable or disable X_STUDY and FMDS on a per user basis and can also override the FMDS server set tings if needed If you have questions suggestions or other information to share about features and functionality please visit the TT online user forum at http forums tradingtechnologies com Introduction to TT User Setup TT User Setup serves as the central location for managing all TT Users their gateway login informa tion their risk and more TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started User Administration Administrators create n
337. s International Inc vv 18 Tutorials Diagnostic Name Enabled filter filter w filte w filter Y Gateway Logins missing Accounts Yes Gateway Logins Explain Missing Product Limits Yes Gateway Logins Explain Order Books with mismatched Credit Currency Yes Order Book Explain Order Books with mismatched Product Limits Yes Order Book Explain TTORDs mapped to invalid Exchange Traders Yes Gateway Logins Gateway Logins missing passwords Yes Gateway Logins Users with Customer Default Markets missing corresponding Gateway Login Markets Yes Gateway Logins Explain Users with TTORD Accounts missing corresponding Customer Default Accounts Yes Gateway Logins Explain Users with Customer Default Accounts missing from User s TTORDs Yes Gateway Logins Explain Accounts improperly shared between unrelated Order Books Yes Gateway Logins Users with multiple available to user flags checked for same gateway Yes Gateway Logins FIX Adapter client Users configured for gateways that a FIX Adapter is not configured for Yes FIX Adapter FIX Adapter Client Users with Gateway Logins that are incompatible with an assigned FIX Adapter Yes FIX Adapter FIX Adapter client Users with multiple available to fix client flags checked for same gateway Yes
338. s Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum User Defined 2 m price on sell orders E Per TT Gateway prevent more than orders per second User Defined 3 X User Defined 4 E Overide credit for TT SIM S Unlimited User Defined 5 m User Defined 6 X View X_TRADER X_RISK fields v cavarand eta iNew Ready Note If TT User Setup lists a version number after a field e g XT 7 8 then the field or feature only applies to that version and later of X_TRADER or FIX Adapter Leave the Active option checked if this user should be able to log in Set the password expiration and concurrent login settings as needed To allow Good Till Cancel and Good Till Date orders leave the GTC GTDate orders allowed setting enabled Configure whether or not the gateways will immediately reject orders submitted with an account that is not defined in TT User Setup or whether the gateways will allow undefined accounts as long as it is permitted by the customer default settings Check the Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed option to allow undefined accounts or uncheck the option to pro hibit undefined accounts TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users 9 Leave the Account changes on fills allowed option unchecked to prevent the user from updat ing the account number on a fill If the user should not be prevented from updating the a
339. s menu TE Environment Server Status Ex IP address Exchange License Service Name Status Most Recent Heartbeat filter filter te filter v filter AlgoSE GUARDSERVER TT_GUARDSERVER_ACTIVE 10 22 21 TTGLOBAL TT USER SETUP SERVER TT_SERVER_ACTIVE 10 22 21 SSE GUARDSERVER TT_GUARDSERVER_ACTIVE 10 22 21 Done Generating an ICE Product Groups Report The ICE Product Groups report collects information about the users product group permissions set tings the trading environment and the TT applications used to connect to the trading environment The report includes e The time and date that the named administrator created the report on the named TT User Setup server e Timestamp and configuration settings for the users that connect to ICE gateways e A list of the allowed and blocked product groups per customer A product group is only listed as blocked when all traders assigned to a given customer are blocked from the product group e A list of users that have blocked ICE product groups along with which product groups are blocked and when an administrator created the block e A list of ICE live Gateways and ICE Live Gateway connections This information identifies the network as a valid trading environment e The versions of recently used TT products and the date that the user connected This allows ICE to determine if users can connect using older TT applications that do not support product filter ing Note
340. s per second allowed for all TT Gateways assigned to a selected user check the Prevent more than X orders per second overrides the User Level setting option on the Assign Gateway Login to Available Users or Edit User Gateway Login window This option allows you to set the maximum rate of orders per second allowed per TT Gateway The value entered for this option also appears in the Max Order Sec Override column in the Selected Users pane of the Assign to Available Users window For each selected user you can edit the value in this column on a per TT Gateway basis to control the rate per gateway instead of assigning one rate for all gateways assigned to a user To set the Prevent more than X orders per second overrides the User Level setting option refer to Editing a User s Gateway Login Attributes on page 146 and Assigning Users to a Gateway Login on page 144 194 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc User Group Administration User Group Administration Overview User groups allow you to group users accounts and gateway logins You can then limit an administra tor to managing one or more specific user group s and therefore only a subset of users and gateway logins within a given trading network by editing the TT User Setup Permissions for that administrator From the Select User Group window you can select an existing user group or create a new user group T Select User Group User G
341. s per second as follows TT User Setup User Manual 191 Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking e Each add change and delete message to the exchange counts as an individual message e Cancel replace actions count as two messages a delete and an add e Cross Intention to Cross ITX Wholesale Over the counter OTC Inquire series create RFQs do not count towards the number of orders per second limitation Order Rejection Overview The TT Gateway accepts orders while the number of orders in a one second time frame remains at or below the configured maximum When the maximum number of orders allowed in a second is exceeded the TT Gateway rejects all new add orders When one or both messages in a cancel replace action exceeds the limits the TT Gateway rejects both the delete and the add portion of the cancel replace action and the order remains working The TT Gateway counts but will never reject stand alone delete orders Example Order Throughput Control In this example an administrator has configured a user with an allowed order throughput of 500 orders per second The TT Gateway will allow no more than 500 orders per second for that user It will accept all orders up to and including the 500th order in a one second time frame and will reject ALL subse quent orders within that second 192 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 13 User Level Risk Checking Orders Pe
342. s to display Shortcut Keys You use the shortcut keys as an alternative to choosing commands from the various TT User Setup menus To use the shortcut keys Click the button combinations as listed in the table below to access the related menu or window The available shortcuts include File Menu File Menu Shortcut File Menu ALT F Login ALT F L Logout ALT F O Publish to Guardian ALT F P Exit ALT F X TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 353 User Admin Menu 19 Appendix User Admin Menu Shortcut User Admin Menu ALT U Users ALT U U Gateway Logins ALT U L Accounts ALT U A Product Limits ALT U P X TRADER Customer Defaults ALT U C Product Group Permissions ALT U R User s Gateway Login Attributes ALT U W User Groups ALT U G Account Groups ALT U O FIX Adapter Account Defaults ALT U F Unlock Users Reset Passwords ALT U K Diagnostic Checks ALT U D Server Admin Menu Server Admin Menu Shortcut Server Admin Menu ALT S System Settings ALT S Y Version Rules ALT S V Collect Log Files ALT S C Reset Exchange Tree ALT S R Currency Exchange Rates ALT S E Add Remove Currencies ALT S C 354 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 19 Appendix Server Admin Menu Shortcut Product Margins ALT S P License Setup ALT S L Migrate Users to New Gateway ALT S
343. ser Setup System Administration Manual for more information gt To collect log files 1 From the Server Admin menu select Collect Log Files The Collect Log Files window appears LE Collect Log Files b IP address Select IP Address 2 In the IP address field enter the address of the remote machine from which you want the log file data collected or click Select IP Address and select the IP Address from the list of user names 3 Click OK The zip file lt IP address gt _ lt DDMMYYYY gt zip will be placed in your lt root drive gt tt log files directory If they are present on the local machine some of the following types of files will be included in the zip file TT User Setup User Manual 209 Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration e TT application and local machine specific diagnostic settings For example netstat ipconfig tcpip registry etc e TT application installation log files for each installed product version e TT application log files e TT application crash dump files e TT client application audit logs e TT application specific CSV export files e TT server or client specific data files For example order tables risk limits risk audit files license files currency table etc e Guardian Product Table fields e TT Gateway audit files e TT application configuration files including Aconfig xml and Aconfig_local xml e The Tick Table e T
344. signing Gateway Logins to a User Group To manually assign a gateway login to a user group 1 From the User Admin menu select User Groups 2 Select a user group row and then click Assign Gateway Logins The Assign Gateway Logins to User Group window appears Member Group Trader DirectlyAssignabletoUsers Member Group Trader 4 Directly Assignable to Users filter v filter v filter v filter ABC cD No cD1 002 No No MGR No No No No No No No No 3 Use the transfer buttons lt lt lt gt gt gt to move selected user groups from the Available Gate way Logins list to the Assigned Gateway Logins list 202 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 14 User Group Administration 4 Click Save Assigning User Groups to an Account When a gateway login is assigned to a user group refer to Assigning User Groups to Gateway Logins on page 200 the user group automatically inherits any accounts that have been assigned to the gateway login and any user group assigned to users who have the account in their customer defaults If an account is assigned to a user group any administrator of that user group can manage the account You can also manually assign user groups to an account To assign user groups to an account manually 1 From the User Admin menu select Accounts 2 Select the account to assign and then click Edit 3 On the
345. sing TT User Setup To provide traders access to an ICE Gateway ABC Trading uses the cre dentials of a second company XYZ Futures Because XYZ Futures owns the ICE credentials XYZ Futures administrators want to manage risk for any ICE trades However because the traders also trade CME and Eurex ABC Trading administrators want to manage risk for any CME or Eurex trades as well as all other aspects of the users configuration ABC Trading administrators also want to control which traders can trade on the XYZ Futures Gateways To satisfy these requirements ABC Trading administrators will create a new TT User Setup group that contains only the ICE gateway logins They will then assign the new group to an XYZ Futures Gateway Login administrator When the XYZ Futures administrator logs in he will be able to manage the gateway logins which include all the risk limits for the XYZ Futures Gateways XYZ Futures administrators will not be able to assign these gateway logins to users This will be done by ABC Trading Creating the Gateway Login Group gt To create a group that contains only gateway logins Log into TT User Setup as a super administrator From the User Admin menu select User Groups From the User Groups window click New Create a new user group that will only be used for the third party s gateway logins e g XY ZFu turesRisk 5 If TT User Setup already contains some or all of the third party gateway logins you
346. sort 4 In the Sort by these columns section double click any column to toggle between ascending Asc or descending Desc sort order 5 Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to assign a priority to each column TT User Setup assigns the topmost column priority one 6 Click Apply and then OK You have successfully sorted by a column Showing Hiding and Arranging Columns TT User Setup User Manual 35 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started You access the Show Hide Arrange Columns dialog box from the context menu of any window that includes a data grid Each window lists the visible and hidden columns and the order in which visible columns will appear By default TT User Setup displays all available columns in each window Note For a list and description of the columns and fields available in each TT User Setup window refer to the Field Descriptions topic To show or hide columns 1 Open a data grid window For example Users 2 Right click in one of the columns and on the context menu select Show Hide Arrange col umns p a Lj Show Hide Arrange Columns rc fnC fs Hidden Columns Visible Columns Exch Member Member Exch Group Group Exch Trader Trader Alias Gateway Enable SODs Users Account Hs Add to Guardian Risk Check Group Pemissions Trading Allowed Comments Ignore P amp L Credit per MGT Restore Default Currency Column Order Directly Assignable to Users Overnide
347. splay lt values differ gt e g One row may have CME as the Gateway value and another may have Eurex 6 Inthe Maximum order qty field set the quantity to a new value such as 100 and then click Save Changes to the maximum order quantity are reflected in the Product Limits window How to Set Up Customer Defaults e In the first example you control which customer defaults can be selected as well as which attri butes are associated with each customer default record e Inthe second example you can select from multiple customers each with their own unique set of customer defaults created in TT User Setup by an administrator This second option would typically be used by a broker who trades for several customers For a detailed description of how to use customer defaults refer to the Creating and Managing X_TRADER Customer Defaults on page 73 topic Example 1 Set up customer defaults for a trader where you control which customer default attributes the trader can select from such as what account is used when trading on different markets a To set up customer defaults where you define the account the trader uses 1 From the User Admin menu select Users The Users window appears 2 Highlight the row of the user for whom you want to create customer defaults 3 Click Edit TT User Setup User Manual 277 Trading Technologies International Inc The Edit User window appears 18 Tutorials 4 From the X_TRADER X_
348. t Default window appears 5 Enter data in the Account Market Gateway and Product type key fields as needed The image below shows a New Account Default window with the key fields completed T Mew Account Default Usemame YZANDER Account TT45678 Note You can type an account number directly in the Account field or you can click the button select an account from the Select Account window and then click Select 6 Click Save The new account default appears in the Edit User window 7 On the Edit User window click Save You have successfully set up an account default How FIX Adapter Servers Match an Account Default TT FIX Adapter Server uses a FIX Adapter client user s account default key values to match incoming orders received from the FIX client application prior to submitting the orders to the TT Gateway When TT FIX Adapter Server receives an order message from a FIX Adapter Client user it starts the process of matching the order to the key values in the set of account defaults If it finds a match TT FIX Adapter Server inserts any specified default values into the order before routing it to the specified TT Gateway If the Restrict user from overriding Account Default option is checked all the key and default val ues are taken into consideration when matching an order 108 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 5 User Administration FIX Adapter Users You can cr
349. t Spreads you must enter both FUTURE and SPREAD type position limits for each of the products that comprise that Inter Product Spread For example if the limit is 5 an account can buy 5 calendar spreads because each con tract in the spread is limited to a long or short position of 5 This check would also apply to the futures contract being traded directly so in the previous example no more futures could be bought in the contract that is long 5 and no more cold be sold in the contract that is short 5 Option Limits the maximum option position to the value in the Maximum Position field In other words limits the maximum position long or short that a trader may accumulate at the product level the sum total of all delivery months at all exercise prices For the purposes of risk checking calls and puts are treated as separate products For example buying a call and selling a put will not result in a flat position but instead will result in two separate positions that do not offset each other TT User Setup User Manual 179 Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration e Strategy Limits the maximum contract level position for each call or put of a specific strike price and delivery month to the value in the Maximum Position field The Maximum Position field does not put a hard limit on the number of strategies that a trader may enter it only limits the position for each contract of a produ
350. t have been configured for outgoing email refer to the Configuring the Outgoing Email Settings on page 93 topic can create an automatically generated password and email it to the email address that is configured in the Email field in the Contact section of the Edit User window TT User Setup s audit trail records when an email address is changed a password is generated etc To auto generate an existing user s password 1 From the User Admin menu select Users and then select the user whose password you want to generate 2 On the Main tab in the Contact section ensure the Email field contains a valid email address TT User Setup sends the password to this email address 3 In the Login section click the Password button The Password change window appears Note For enhanced security you can disable the user s ability to enter a password For a detailed description on disabling the New Password fields refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual Version 7 4 4 Click Auto Generate Password 5 When prompted to confirm that you would like to proceed click Yes TT User Setup sends the user an email message that includes that user s new password and user name You have successfully auto generated a user s password Unlocking Users Users become locked out when they exceed the password locking rules the number of failed login attempts or the days of inactivity For a detailed description on enforcing passwor
351. t price Per TT Gateway prevent more than X orders per second Description Determines the overall dollar amount a trader can lose during a given trading session Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited Determines the currency of the credit value above Determines if the P amp L risk algorithm is used to risk check this user If Use P amp L risk algorithm is checked the P amp L risk algorithm is used for risk checking Additionally the P L based on setting in X_TRADER defaults to Risk Algorithm If Use P amp L risk algorithm is unchecked the Last Traded Price is used for risk checking The P L based on X_TRADER setting remains editable Determines how far from the market price a user may enter an order in ticks Check the Only enforce a maximum price on buy orders and a minimum price on sell orders option to allow traders to sell above the speci fied range and to buy below it For more infor mation about pre trade price controls refer to Setting Pre Trade Price Controls on page 187 Limits the number of orders per second per TT Gateway This setting applies to all Gate ways that a user logs in to For more informa tion about pre trade order throughput controls on a per user basis refer to Setting Order Throughput Controls on page 191 44 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 2 User Administration Fields Override credit for TT SIM Submitting
352. t_risk_on 1 mat_publish_to_guardian 0 mogt_mgt_key CME002002 magt_password hidden mgt_can_associate_with_user_directly 0 mat_comp_id 0 lt Company1 gt mat_enable_sods 1 Note You can copy data into Excel or any other applicable application You have successfully displayed a logfile via the Audit Trail window Displaying Logged in Users TT User Setup allows you to list all users currently logged into the trading environment You can dis play a list of logged in users based on username gateway connection product license and product license per number of markets Viewing the logged in users report allows you to determine how your licenses are currently being used and how many licenses you have available Note When logged in as a Group Administrator TT User Setup only displays the user and gateway logins that exist in one of the user groups the administrator has permission to manage TT User Setup User Manual 243 Trading Technologies International Inc gt To view connected users 1 From the Reports menu select Logged in Users The Logged in Users window appears 2 Torefresh the window click Refresh 3 View the Logged in Users window tabs as needed 17 Reports e Use the By User tab to list each user that is currently consuming a license You can also force a logoff from this tab By User By Gateway Connection By Product License Force Logoff Username 2 ProductName amp l Client IP 44 V
353. ta becomes stale The Refresh feature is useful when for example multiple administrators are updating records in TT User Setup 2 Do one of the following e Double click the row for the gateway login you want to update e Select a gateway login row and click Edit or right click a gateway login row and select Edit from the context menu e Select multiple gateway logins and then click Edit or right click the selected gateway logins and then click Edit from the context menu Refer to the Editing and Deleting Multiple Records Mass Editing topic if needed The Edit Gateway Login window appears with the Gateway Login Info tab selected Note Uneditable fields are disabled grayed out Deleting a Record This procedure describes how to delete an X_TRADER customer default record from the Customer Defaults window The same techniques can be used to delete records in the Users Product Limits Gateway Login Account Default List and Version Rules windows Note TT User Setup permanently removes deleted users from the database To delete a customer default 1 From the User Admin menu select X_TRADER Customer Defaults E Customer Defaults ocr e fa Username i Display Name Group User Status Customer 42 Market Gatew Product Type filter v filter v filte v filter v filter v v filter filter ABROWN Alfred Brown Chicago i lt DEFAULT gt AGOLD Abraham Gold New York i lt DEFAULT gt AMURPHY Alan M
354. ta needs to be pub lished Sp In addition a message appears indicating that TT User Setup and Guardian are out of synch Note Because publishing sends data over the trading network which could impact trading perfor mance TT recommends avoiding or limiting publishing during trading hours When you click the Publish icon the Publish to Guardian window appears and displays any differ ences in trader data between TT User Setup and Guardian The differences fall into one of three catego ries as listed in the Record Exists in column e TT User Setup only A gateway login exists in TT User Setup but not Guardian For example gateway logins have been added to TT User Setup but have not yet been published to Guardian e Guardian and TT User Setup Changes to a previously published gateway login have been made in TT User Setup but not published to Guardian e Guardian only A gateway login exists in Guardian but not TT User Setup For example gate way logins have been deleted from TT User Setup but have not yet been deleted from Guardian by publishing To publish records to Guardian 1 Do one of the following 2 From the File menu select Publish to Guardian 3 On the toolbar click the Publish to Guardian icon The Publish to Guardian window appears 4 Highlight the records you want to publish 5 Click Publish Selected Gateway Logins to Guardian The following image specifies the records that require publishing
355. tal rows displayed 212 Rows selected 1 Hide TTORDs Hide Exchange Traders V Expanded Gateway Exchange Trader View Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 2 Click Assign to Users The Assign Gateway Login to Available Users window appears Selected Users Username 4 Display Name Group Username 4 Display Name Group Gateway 42 AvailtoUser Avail to FIX Clien v filter v filter eTAYLOR Brenda Tay encase ASE E ABC System BTAYLOR Brends Taylor Chicago cme 7 v Alfred Brown BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor Chicago CME A Abraham Gold BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor ehicago emes A m aan Murphy BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor chicago Eurex v v Adam Nowak BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor Chicago Eurex A v v asexander Poulos BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor cicage Eurex B E Brian Stevens BTAYLOR Brenda Tayior Chicago F 7 Christen JDOE John Doe ABCTrading ASE v v E Carlos Martinez i n a Christian Robinson Login Attributes initeaksico 7 Available to User Defaut Account eae 7 Available to FIX Client Clearing Member basan amina 7 Automatically Login Preferred IP E Mandatory Login XT 7 177 Operator ID gt amma F Ago deployment allowed E
356. te 8 Click Save 9 To assign risk limits to the account group refer to the Adding Account Group Level Risk Checking on page 176 topic You have successfully created a new account group Note To prevent users from using accounts that have not been defined in TT User Setup make sure the Submitting orders with undefined accounts allowed option is unchecked the default setting To configure this setting refer to the Applying Basic User Properties on page 69 topic Note To only allow an X_RISK administrator to publish manual fills or start of day records to accounts within specified user groups configure the Restrict X_RISK administrator to publishing option To configure this setting refer to the Applying X_RISK Properties on page 73 topic Assigning One or More Accounts to an Account Group You can assign one or more accounts to a single account group from the Accounts window To create an account refer to the Creating Accounts on page 154 topic and to create an account group refer to the Creating Account Groups on page 160 topic To assign accounts to an account group 1 From the User Admin menu select Accounts 156 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 9 Account Administration Overview Accounts ACEA New Edit Account Delete _Assign to Account Group Account 42 Account Group Member Trader Account Description filt
357. ted by a trader s margin and P amp L Enter 0 to reset the credit to unlimited e Currency Specifies the currency for the Credit field e g USD United States Dollar To edit the risk settings for an existing gateway login 166 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 11 Risk Administration Pees 7 8 Do one of the following From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins A user s Edit User window click the Gateway Logins tab On the Gateway Logins window click a login row and then click Edit Note You can also edit risk data when creating a new gateway login On the Edit Gateway Login window check the Add to Guardian option risk settings are always published to Guardian Note The Add to Guardian option is checked automatically after TTORD is entered in the Member field TTORDs must all be published to Guardian Note The Add to Guardian option does not appear if DisableProductLimitPublishingMode is on Risk checking is based solely on the Risk Check checkbox Refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual for more information about the DisableProductLimitPublish ingMode parameter The risk options enable V Add to Guardian E Risk check Trading allowed E Ignore P amp L Credit Unlimited Ovenide credit for TT SIM Unlimited Configure the Risk Check Trading allowed Ignore P amp L Credit and Currency fields as needed Note Risk settings and product
358. ternational Inc 18 Tutorials The New User window appears and is populated with most of the data from the BTAYLOR pro file Notice however that the Gateway Logins have the TTORDJS 001 002 MGT but the same gateways and product limits as the gateways in the BTAYLOR profile If you edit the Gateway Logins you will also see that the account number is TT111_b GC aaa inasaisamaad Gh New User anrima Main Gateway Logins x_TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all Gateways Edit Remove View Edit Product Limits Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway amp 4 Exch Member Exch Gro Exch Trader Availto User filter filter filter S filter filter filter v filter filter TTORDJS 001 CME CM123 TT2 TT2 TTORDJS 001 CME 4 CME 001 001 TTORDJS oot Eurex AZ44 BPS JPS TTORDJS 001 lEwrex A D54032 TEO 001 TTORDJS 001 Eurex B D54048 TEB 001 TTORDJS 001 ICE JPE l ICE012 loo 002 lt Total rows displayed 6 Rows selected 0 View X TRADER X_RISK fields v Add New BIO eo Ready 5 Locate the X_TRADER X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab As requested TT User Setup copied all of Brenda s customer defaults However you will need to update the account numbers to ones assigned to Matt Main Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK
359. teway login and ordinarily consists of the login s MGT IDs alias and other applicable login data as needed A unique identifier to group multiple accounts A unique identifier assigned to a login TTORD or Exchange Trader to be used by customer default records and when incorporating risk Determines if this user is allowed to update the account number on a fill TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 327 19 Appendix Column Title Add to Guardian Addl Mrgn Address Admin Groups Admin Type Allow Trading Allowed Algo Deployment Allowed Associated Windows GW Logins tab GW Login Window Product Limits Window Users Users Users Account Account Group Product Limits Window XT Product Group Permis sions tab GW Logins tab User GWL Attributes Assign to Avail able Users Description Designates whether risk parameters are applied to a gateway login Specifies an additional required margin above or below the amount in the Margin column Optional contact data for a particular user Identifies the user groups that this administrator can manage or view The type of administrator Determines whether trades submitted with this account or an account in this account group will be allowed or rejected Note Users logging in with Gateway Logins that end in MGR e g TTADM XXX MGR can delete orders regardless of whether or n
360. teway login will be published to Guardian The Add to Guardian option is only needed for TTORDs and gate way logins that will be risk checked This option is not available when DisableProduct LimitPublishingMode is on refer to the TT User Setup System Administration Manual for more information about the DisablePro ductLimitPublishingMode parameter Specifies whether Guardian risk checks orders sent with this gateway login When Risk Check is checked the related risk settings will be applied to a trader s orders TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 125 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Description Determines whether the gateway login can Trading allowed actively trade Determines if P amp L is used in available credit Ignore P amp L calculations Specifies the sum of money available at the Credit start of a trading session which can be affected by a trader s margin and P amp L Specifies the currency for the Credit field Currency e g USD United States Dollar Determines if traders using this gateway login have a different credit limit for TT SIM trad ing Override credit for TT SIM When Override credit for TT SIM is checked the user s credit limit while trading on TT SIM is set to the value in the TT SIM credit field If Override credit for TT SIM is not checked the user s credit limit applies to both TT SIM and non TT SIM trading Gat
361. thout logging in you can still access TT User Setup s Server Messages TT User Setup Serv ers and Environment Server Status windows gt To log into TT User Setup 1 On your desktop double click the TT User Setup icon The TT Login window appears 14 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Username TTSYSTEM Remember my Usemame Your use of this software and related services and documentation is governed by a software licensing agreement For a copy of the agreement contact your administrator or email legalittradingltechnologies com View license agreement Login Change Password TT User Setup Servers 2 In the Username and Password fields enter a valid username and password Note For first time logins the default username is TTSYSTEM and the default password is 12345678 TT Recommends that you change this password by clicking Change Password 3 To populate the Username field automatically the next time you log in check the Remember my Username option 4 Click Login If the login is successful the TT User Setup Control Panel appears TT User Setup User Manual 15 Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Additional Login Requirements Before an administrator can log into TT User Setup another administrator must grant them the appro priate TT User Setup permissions from the New User or Edit User window as seen below
362. through the Users Window on page 82 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 81 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users Creating a New Gateway Login through the Users Window Gateway logins are the MemberGroupTrader IDs used to log into TT Gateways Each gateway login can have its own account numbers and risk limits Note For more information about configuring Gateways Logins refer to the User Login and Risk Administration Reference Manual When creating a gateway login through the Gateway Login window you must manually assign the gateway login to a user However when created via the Users window the gateway login is automati cally assigned to the user you are editing or creating Note For a detailed description on creating a gateway login through the Gateway Logins window refer to the Creating a New Gateway Login on page 135 topic 1 To create a new gateway login using the Users window Access the Gateway Logins tab for an X_TRADER user 82 G Edit User BTAYLOR oo etm Main Gateway Logins TRADER _RISK Product Group Permissions C Generate Admin Gateway Logins for all gateways New Edit Remove Assign Existing Logins View Edit Product Limits Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Gateway 4 ExchMember Exch Gro ExchTrader Avail to User filter Vv filtern W filter v filter v filter v filter x filter x
363. ting records in TT User Setup You can customize the gateway login display so that TTORDs are filtered from view Hiding TTORDS gt To hide TTORDs TT User Setup User Manual 131 Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics From the Gateway Logins window check the Hide TTORDs option The Gateway Logins window displays only non TTORD gateway logins Hiding Exchange Traders gt To hide Exchange Traders From the Gateway Logins window check the Hide Exchange Traders option The Gateway Logins window displays only non Exchange Trader gateway logins Enabling the Expanded Gateway Exchange Trader View When a single MGT has more than one tradable gateway assigned TT User Setup condenses the rows for each entry into a single row and replaces the Gateway name with an asterisk and the number of gateway rows hidden To list all the gateways for example so that you can filter by a specific gateway type enable the expanded gateway exchange trader view gt To expand the gateway exchange trader view 1 From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins The Gateway Logins window appears An asterisk in the Gateway column indicates multiple rows are available Exch Member Exch Group Exch Trader Users Account s RADAMS cme222 JSMMS MFOO1Mike Total rows displayed 79 Rows selected 1 Hide TTORDs Hide Exchange Traders Expanded Gateway Exchange Trader View Ready
364. to be submitted with an account number that is not defined in TT User Setup For more information refer to the Applying Basic User Properties topic e Allowing Traders to Change Accounts on Fills Administrators can determine whether or not to allow traders to update the account number on a fill For more information refer to the Applying Basic User Properties topic e Disabling Start of Day Records Per Gateway Login MGT you can configure whether a Gateway should automatically generate Start of Day records When the Disable Auto Calcu late SOD option is checked gateways will not generate Start of Day records for the config ured Gateway Login For more information refer to the Disabling Start of Day Records topic e Specifying the Accounts Allowed for Manual Fill and Start of Day Publishing If a TT User Setup administrator has given a user the ability to publish manual fills or SODs the administra tor can allow the user to publish SOD records and or Manual Fills for any account number or the administrator can limit the user to specific accounts For more information refer to the Applying X_RISK Properties topic 8 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started 7 4 7 Enhancements Operator ID The new Operator ID field is used to identify the trader or operator to the exchange The field is accessible from a user s Gateway Login tab as a column in the Gateway Login table
365. tomer Defaults option the trader must use the configured customer default s e When you uncheck the Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults option then the trader can choose to use the configured customer default s by checking the Sel option in the X_TRADER Customer Defaults window Note TT User Setup automatically assigns users lt DEFAULT gt customer default entry in TT User Setup If you do not edit the lt DEFAULT gt customer default record and if you do not create any other customer defaults X_TRADER does not use the TT User Setup s customer defaults for that user If you 74 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users later edit the lt DEFAULT gt customer default or add a new customer default X_TRADER begins pick ing up customer defaults from TT User Setup after it is restarted Assigned customer defaults determine the defaults applied to a trader s orders For example a selected user whose Customer lt DEFAULT gt Market LIFFE and Account ACT555 means that when the lt DEFAULT gt user trades on LIFFE and has only his lt DEFAULT gt Customer selected that could be the only customer he has the trader uses account number ACT555 When one user has multiple customer default records with the same Customer value X_TRADER uses the record that best matches a trader s transaction In the following example the user has five cus to
366. ton to the Product Limits window This allows you copy any selected product limits from one gateway to another For more information refer to the Copying Product Limits to Additional Gateways or Gateway Logins topic e Using the P amp L risk algorithm Added the Use P amp L risk algorithm option to the User win dow s Risk Check section If Use P amp L risk algorithm is checked the P amp L risk algorithm is used for risk checking and the P L based on setting in X_TRADER defaults to Risk Algorithm If Use P amp L risk algorithm is unchecked the Last Traded Price is used for risk checking For more information refer to the Adding User Level Risk Checking topic 10 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started Resetting the Guardian exchange tree Added the Reset Guardian Exchange Tree feature to the Server Admin menu This feature removes any exchanges and IP addresses where there are no running services for all Guardians in the environment It is identical to the Reset Exchange Tree feature on the Guardian Tools menu For more information refer to the Resetting the Guardian Exchange Tree topic Editing currency exchange rates Added the Edit Currency Exchange Rates feature to the Server Admin menu This feature allows you to edit the exchange rates listed in Guardian These exchange rates are used in P amp L and risk calculations in TT client applications such as X_TRADER For more in
367. tor Creating a Gateway Login Administrator A Gateway Login Administrator can manage gateway logins by assigning them and their attributes to various users in user groups the administrator is designated to manage To create a Gateway Login Administrator 1 From the User Admin menu select Users 2 Set the New User View to TT User Setup Admin fields 3 Click New Note To give an existing user administrative privileges select the user from the Users window and click Edit You can then change the View to TT User Setup Admin fields 4 On the Main tab edit any Login Contact or User Defined fields as needed 5 Click the TT User Setup Permissions tab 6 Select the Gateway Login Administrator option Main TT User Setup Permissions Outgoing Email Settings None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access Group Administrator Can only manage the User Groups listed below Able to manage Gateway Logins Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins IF unchecked can only create and edit TTORDSs Gateway Login Administrator Restrict Gateway Login Administrator to User Groups listed below ipl i p 7 To allow this administrator to manage each gateway login in every available user group uncheck the Restrict Gateway Login Administrator to User Groups listed below option 8 To restrict this administrator to managing specific user groups check the Restrict Gateway Login A
368. torials The Additional margin Maximum order qty Maximum position and Maximum long short fields are highlighted to indicate that the product limit is for TT SIM only 3 Enter the Additional margin Maximum order qty Maximum position and Maximum long short values as needed Enter 0 to reset the Maximum fields to unlimited TT User Setup User Manual 325 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 326 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc Appendix Field Descriptions When you open a window in TT User Setup pre selected default columns appear in that window These default columns vary from window to window Each window includes a customized Hide Show win dow that lists all of the columns available in that window You can hide or show columns in the various data grid windows by configuring the Visible Columns list in the Show Hide Arrange Columns dia log box The following table describes the columns available in TT User Setup and the window s in which the columns appear Column Title Account Description Account Group Acct Account s Account Changes Allowed Account Account Type see Default Associated Windows Accounts Window Accounts Window GW Logins tab XT CD tab XT FA Account Defaults tab FA Account Defaults GW Login Assign Accounts Accounts User Groups Users Description An optional field that is asso ciated with the ga
369. trader is allowed to trade If the product limit applies to all product names for a given Gateway enter an asterisk Product The product types to which this product limit applies Future Spread Option Strategy Stock Bond Swap Energy FOREX NDF or Warrant Product Type 128 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 7 Gateway Login Administrati on Basics Margin Addl Mrgn Max Ord Qty Field Description The margin amount configured in Guardian for a given product Margin is the amount of money deducted from a trader s available credit for holding a position Note If the Product field is set to TT User Setup disables the margin field The percentage above or below the exchange set margin requirement that a trader must have available to trade the contract In other words entering a positive percentage increases the exchange margin requirement when calculating risk limits and entering a negative percentage decreases the exchange margin requirement The maximum individual order size that the trader can entered at a time for a specified product TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies Internation al Inc 129 7 Gateway Login Administration Basics Field Description The number of contracts the trader can be long or short for a given contract or product Note The selected Product Type determines how the Max Position fi
370. trols Overview 4 5 6c in5ce bea RAGE RERG RHEE RAR AE LAR AEA EARD READE RAS 187 Price Checking OVErViEW 4 av lt 406 4054 ee cde Coa coe So o kepa SE eS ee 188 Example Static Price Range Control sds s4446naseadd ones bargeanceet4can peas 188 Example Directional Price Range Control 0 2 cece cece eee ee teenies 189 Enabling and Setting the Pre trade Price Controls 0 c eee eee eee 190 Setting Order Throughput Controls 0 0 0 eects 191 Order Throughput Controls Overview 000 ccc cece eee eee 191 Order Rejection Overview 264 4nisaccdinkieotedmnataddagetadtsaatawiadad 192 Example Order Throughput Control 0 00 ee 192 Enabling and Setting the Order Throughput Controls 2 0 0 00 ee eee eee 193 Overriding the Order Throughput Controls 0 0 c eee eens 194 User Group Administration 0 00 ee 195 User Group Administration Overview 54641400446 lt 3 aeen Ke ees eee Mae daees Bada ees 195 Creating User Groups cai sate eee ee eae pedal eae penta e eee ae eee eae 195 Creating User Groups for Order Passing 204 2 dicee i eceneed eee buwasd een bueane 197 Assigning Users to a User Group wi 05 co 55 vanedae yeas eeeS wee Awes a hakak wed eraud 199 Assigning User Groups to Gateway Logins 0 00 6 ennenen arere 200 Assigning User Groups to a Gateway Login 0 0 c eee eee eee 201 Assigning Gateway Logins to a User Group 0 cee eee 202 Ass
371. ts per Product Limit Counts MGT Displays a list of users and their gateway Users and their Accounts j login and customer default accounts Displays MGTs that share an order book but are associated with different credit and curren cies Order Books with mismatched Credit Cur rency Displays MGTs that share an order book but Books with mi tched P t Limit a oe I area nee roeg Laing are associated with different product limits Displays a list of users with available CME Product Group Permissions CME Gateway Logins and lists whether each CME market is allowed or blocked Displaying a Report To display a report 1 From the Reports menu select Run Reports The Reports window appears 2 From the Report drop down list select a report type and then click Run Reports oe oC fz Report Users and their Gateway Logins x Export asHTML ExportasCsv Username Member Group Trader Gateway Exch Member Exch Group Exch Trader Display e v filter Y filter Y filter v filte Y filter Y filter v filte v filter CMARTINEZ TTORDJS 004 004 ICE_IPE ICE012 001 002 Carlos CROBINSON NSE0391 001 001 NSE NSE0391 001 001 Christia CROBINSON TTORDAA 001 003 CME A ABC cD1 002 Christia CROBINSON TTORDAA 001 003 SSE A TTSSE cD1 002 Christia CROBINSON TTORDAA 001 003 TOCOM A XYZ cD1 002 Christia DMILLER TTORD CHI 002 CBOT CBOT1 SIM 001 David h on 1 vid h You have successful
372. ture releases are subject to change Check the product s release notes for details View FIX Adapter Server fields v Save and Add New 2 Use the transfer arrow buttons gt lt gt gt lt lt to select the FIX Adapter client users that can con nect to this server 3 Save and close the Users window You have successfully assigned FIX Adapter clients to a FIX Adapter server Allowing or Blocking Product Groups for a FIX Adapter User You can allow or block any of the listed product groups for a FIX Adapter client user For more infor mation refer to the Allowing or Blocking Product Groups for Specific Markets on page 119 topic Note When a new user is created all product groups are allowed by default When a new product group or market is added it is allowed for all users by default The administrator must manually block the product groups for the appropriate users 112 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc User Maintenance How to Maintain Users User maintenance includes e Resetting a User Password on page 113 e Auto Generating and Emailing a User s Password on page 114 e Unlocking Users on page 114 e Forcing a User Logoff on page 115 e Activating and Deactivating Users on page 116 e Allowing or Blocking Product Groups for Specific Markets on page 119 Resetting a User Password A Super Administrator Group Administrator or Password
373. uardian icon The Publish to Guardian window appears ES Publish to Guardian Current Guardian TT User Setup Differences Publish to overwrite Guardian Publish Selected Gateway Logins to Guardian iew Difference Details Member 4 Group 42 Trader 4 Record exists in Comments Differences filter v filter filter 5 filter 003 001 002 001 MIKE 003 001 002 003 Total rows displayed 2 Rows selected 2 3 Click Import from Guardian Advanced 4 To import additional gateway logins on the Import message click OK After importing the highlighted records that were Guardian Only appear in the Gateway Log ins window Matching values for records that are both Guardian and TT User setup will be over written Note Records are never deleted from TT User Setup after importing but are appended instead Once imported the Guardian Only entries from the Guardian TT User Setup Differences win dow will no longer be displayed How to Change the Message Users Receive When Their Logins Fail 288 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials This tutorial shows how an administrator edits the message the users receive after a failed login attempt gt To enable and edit the failed login attempt message your users receive 1 From the Server Admin menu select System Settings The System Settings window
374. urphy ABCTrading lt DEFAULT gt V AMURPHY Alan Murphy ABCTrading i DMILLER ANOWAK Adam Nowak Chicago j lt DEFAULT gt ANOWAK Adam Nowak Chicago j DMILLER APOULOS Alexander P Chicago h lt DEFAULT gt BSTEVENS Brian Stevens ABCTrading h lt DEFAULT gt BTAYLOR Brenda Taylor Chicago j lt DEFAULT gt ww Total rows displayed 57 Rows selected 0 Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit 28 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 1 Getting Started 2 Do one of the following e Click the row of the customer default you want to delete and then click Delete e Right click the row of the customer default you want to delete and then select Delete from the context menu e Select multiple customer defaults click or right click the selected customer defaults and then click Delete 3 When prompted to confirm the deletion click OK Editing and Deleting Multiple Records Mass Editing Most data grids support editing and deleting multiple records at once also referred to as mass editing The Users Gateway Logins Product Limits Customer Defaults Account Default List Users Gateway Login Attributes and Version Rules windows support mass edits and mass deletions while the Accounts and User Groups windows only support mass deletions To edit multiple records 1 Open a data grid window For example Users 2 While pressing the Ctrl key click the rows you
375. user and login data more quickly Wildcard character options include the following 1 290 is a wildcard used to match multiple characters is a wildcard used to match a single character To use a wildcard character to filter for all A flavored gateways From the User Admin menu select Gateway Logins The Gateway Logins window appears Note Wildcard characters can be used when filtering a column in any window with a grid dis play Click in the filter display in the Gateway column header Type the following A The Gateway column displays only A flavored gateways TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials 2 Member Group Trader 4 Gateway 4 Users Add to Gua filter v filter w filter v A v filter v filter 001 ANOWAK DMILLER Total rows displayed 88 Rows selected 0 Hide TTORDs Hide Ready To edit multiple records just select them and click Edit You have successfully filtered the Gateway column for all A flavored gateways How to Set Up a Tiered Administrator In this tutorial you will learn how to setup a new Group Administrator AMURPHY After creating the Group Admin user you will give the user access to the user group Chicago that you will also create In addition this tutorial will illustrate how to assign gateway logins to a user group select the user groups that a group administrator can manag
376. user and server reports The options available from the Reports menu include TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 23 1 Getting Started Options Function Opens Logged in Users window which Logged in Users allows you to view all users currently logged in and connected to TT servers Opens the Audit Trail window which tracks Audit Trail updates made to the data in TT User Setup Opens the Reports window from which you Run Reports can generate various reports that display user and system information Opens the Server Messages window which Server Messages allows you to monitor all TT User Setup server activity Opens the TT User Setup Servers window TT User Setup Servers which allows you monitor the status of each TT User Setup Server Opens the Environment Server Status win Environment Server Status dow which shows whether the servers in your environment are active Creates an ICE Product Groups report that ICE uses to verify that only the allowed users can access market data for the specified prod uct groups ICE Product Groups Report e Use the Help menu to access the Help System and version information The options available from the Help menu include Option Function Help Topics Accesses the TT User Setup Help System What s New Accesses the What s New topic of the help system TT Remote Launches a browser directed to the TT Help Center Remot
377. user s X_TRADER X_RISK tab click the X_STUDY FMDS tab 80 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users Main _ Gateway Logins X_TRADER X_RISK Product Group Permissions X_TRADER Properties X_TRADER Customer Defaults X_RISK Properties X_STUDY FMDS allowed for this user Ovenide system settings with user settings Primary FMDS Server User Settings IP address Port 10200 1 65535 Service 250 1 99999995 Timeout secs 30 1 300 Secondary FMDS Server IP address Port 0 1 65535 Service 0 1 99999999 Timeout secs 0 1 300 X_STUDY FMDS X_STUDY FMDS allowed for system System Settings 1 1 1 1 10200 View X_TRADER X_RISK fields v Note This feature works only with X_TRADER 7 7 3 X_ STUDY 7 3 0 or later 2 If X_STUDY is allowed for the system enable or disable X_STUDY FMDS for this user You can also select whether to override the FMDS system settings with settings you configure here Refer to the New User and Edit User Window Fields on page 41 topic for descriptions of each field Note To enable X_ STUDY FMDS for the system refer to the Enabling and Configuring X_STUDY and FMDS System Settings on page 233 3 When you are finished click Save and continue to the next topic Creating a New Gateway Login
378. user with Gateway Login Administrator permissions cannot edit users but can assign gateway logins and gateway login attributes to users in a user group the administrator is designated to manage Refer to Creating a Gateway Login Administrator on page 88 Password Administrator Provides access to only unlock users and reset passwords for some user groups or all user groups depending on the restrictions applied Refer to Creating a Pass word Administrator on page 89 View Only Provides permission to view any TT User Setup data window A user with View Only permissions cannot edit data in any accessible window Refer to Creating a View Only User on page 91 Collect Log Files Only Provides permission to collect any log files in the trading environment including log files containing sensitive trading information This user cannot view or edit any user or system settings Refer to Creating a Collect Log Files Only User on page 92 Creating a Super Administrator A Super Administrator can log into TT User Setup and have access to all functionality users who had TT User Setup Access in a pre 7 2 version of TT User Setup automatically receive Super Administrator permissions Note Only a Super Administrator can access reports audit trails log files and the System Settings window TT User Setup User Manual 85 Trading Technologies International Inc 4 User Administration Administrative Users gt To create a Su
379. w illustrate mapping John s TTORD ID to real registered Trader IDs Exchange Traders and TT gateways In addition follow the steps to setup pre trade risk parameters that apply to all orders submitted by John s new TTORD ID 8 To create a TTORD login enter a Member ID beginning with TTORD and a Group and Trader ID The Member ID must be 7 characters or less Note To prevent John s MGT from sharing an order book with others the Member and Group fields must be unique TT User Setup User Manual 253 Trading Technologies International Inc 18 Tutorials Disable Auto Calculate SOD Note The Add to Guardian option is automatically checked for any tradable TTORD The Add to Guardian option does not appear if DisableProductLimitPublishingMode is on 9 Click Map to Exchange Traders The Map Exchange Trader to window appears whereby for example you can map TTORDJS 001 001 to registered trader IDs Available Exchange Traders Selected Exchange Traders Gateway 4 Member 42 Group 4 Trader Gateway 4 Member 42 Group filter M filter M filter filter j gt gt BTec AUUS LDV WABTT gt CBOT amp UMOg ZM3 CM3 CBOT B 8C222 LL3 JL3 CBOT E NDN3 TT9 CBOT G B5002 KJ 10 If there are no available exchange traders you can create one by clicking Create 254 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc
380. window and click Edit You can then change the View to TT User Setup Admin fields On the Main tab edit any Login Contact or User Defined fields as needed Click the TT User Setup Permissions tab Select the View Only option Main TT User Setup Permissions lo utgoing Email Settings None Cannot log into TT User Setup Super Administrator Complete TT User Setup access Group Administrator Can only manage the User Groups listed below Able to manage Gateway Logins Able to create Direct Trader Gateway Logins If unchecked can only create and edit TTORDSs Gateway Login Administrator Restrict Gateway Login Administrator to User Groups listed below Password Administrator Can only reset user passwords and unlock users Restrict Password Admin to User Groups listed below View Only Restrict View Only User to User Groups listed below 7 To allow this user to view all users in all available user groups uncheck the Restrict View Only User to User Groups listed below option 8 To restrict this administrator to viewing specific user groups check the Restrict View Only User to User Groups listed below option 9 From the Available User Groups list click to select the user group that you want assigned to the View Only user If the group does not exist click Create and add it Note Press the Ctrl key to select multiple groups from the list TT User Setup User Manual 91 Trading Technologies International I
381. xt fields FFT2 and FFT3 Select the Time in force for orders the Order type Order restriction if any and the type of position Open Close FIFO If you want to set a maximum quantity allowed per trade check the Enforce max order qty option and then enter an order quantity in the Max order qty field Max order qty is typically used to prevent traders from accidentally entering too large of an order e g 10000 instead of 1000 Note the Time in force Order type Order restriction Open Close Enforce max order qty and Max order qty options are not available in the X_ TRADER customer defaults starting with X_TRADER 7 8 These options are moved to the X_TRADER order options Click Save and then Close The new customer default appears in both the Edit User and Customer Default windows Note Changes do not take affect until the trader starts X_TRADER TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 3 User Administration X_TRADER or X_RISK Users 8 Continue to the next procedure to configure X_ STUDY and FMDS settings Note You can choose to lock down customer defaults and force a trader to use only the defaults set up by a TT User Setup administrator by checking the Restrict user from editing their local Customer Defaults option which is available on the Users window s X_TRADER Customer Defaults tab Replacing an Account Number Use this procedure to assign a new account to one or more customer defaults
382. y Logins window which allows you to manage and create gateway log ins Gateway logins are the Member GroupTrader IDs used to log into TT Gateways Each gateway login can have dif ferent account numbers and risk limits For a more complete list of gateway login functionality refer to the topics in the Gate way Logins section of this Help system Opens the Accounts window which allows you to create and edit account numbers assign accounts to an account group and to edit account groups Once you create an account you can configure account based risk Opens the Product Limits window which allows you to view and edit all product limits across all traders Opens the Customer Defaults window which allows you to configure customer defaults for X_TRADER users Customer defaults determine order parameters such as account number that are to be applied to a trader s order Opens the Product Group Permissions win dow which allows you to allow or block user access to individual product groups in sup ported markets Opens the Users Gateway Login Attributes window which allows you to edit specific login attributes such as Auto Login and Available to User across all users TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 21 1 Getting Started Option Function Opens the User Groups window which allows you to create and edit user groups You can configure TT User Setup Administrators t
383. y Records 0 cece cece cence eee e eee e tee ennas 136 Assigning Gateways to Gateway Logins 0 00 c ccc ee nen ees 137 Mapping a TTORD to an Exchange Trader cs 2c4 44s0 6244ee0k ceebgasbieriaankbes 138 Adding Gateways to Existing TTORDs 20 0 0c ccc cee eens 140 ASSIONING ACCOUDIS Sax lt i cadens 2th Rea AREER oa dowd PEER EET EEE ARSE E E bE ed 141 Configuring Risk yo4 tt anc thane hosiehen boned edtoes dd whol at a 143 Assigning Users to a Gateway Login 0 0 ccc cece tenn eens 144 Editing a User s Gateway Login Attributes 0 0 0 0 eens 146 Assigning Gateways to Multiple Gateway Logins 00 0 cece eee eee ene 150 Account Administration sssusa asesan anaana eee eed One ene ee eee ee 153 Account Administration Overview 0 ccc oranana nnne 153 Greating ACCOUMNS fracas aks hu ae ede oR Rae we EY eRe Ree ERSHR HERRERO es oh 154 Assigning One or More Accounts to an Account Group 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee 156 Account Group Administration 00 02 e eee 159 Account Group Administration Overview 0 0 0 cece ene eee 159 Creating Account Groups o 6 04605 4445 40h edd EEr DERE EVE RAE RES REE KE TREE RC 160 Assigning Accounts to an Account Group 00 0 ccc cee nee ees 162 Gateway Login Risk Administration 0 00 c cee eee eee 165 Risk and Administration OvervieW 2 0 02 cece eee een teen teen neces 165 Gateway Login bevel Risk ce cadu
384. y Start Date filter filter 20 02 22 2010 20 02 22 2010 0 0448 2008 0 0448 2008 0102 2007 01 02 2007 01 02 2007 mW v Expiration D filter 1045 2020 10 15 2020 0715 2008 0715 2008 1245 2007 0445 2020 12 5 2007 PROD SIM v filter SIM PROD SIM PROD SIM PROD SIM The license table contains the following information Client Server TT Product Qty Start Date Expiration Date Field Lists whether this license is a Client license or a Server license Lists the TT Product to which the license applies Lists the number of licenses assigned The date the license becomes valid The date the license expires Lists whether the license applies to environ Description Prod SIM en ments running in Prod mode or SIM mode Min Version Internal use only 220 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 16 Server Administration Field In Effect of Markets Exchange IP Address Description If the current date is between the license Start Date and Expiration Date and if the Prod SIM setting for the license matches the Prod SIM setting in guardian the license is consid ered in effect In Effect is set to yes If the license is expired or set to a different Prod SIM setting than guardian the license is not in effect The number of markets to which the license applies If the license applies to all market t
385. ying Basic User Proper ties on page 69 topic Creating Product Limits for Accounts and Account Groups You can set up and change product limits for a single account or for an account group If an account belongs to an account group only the account group settings are used Account and Account Group risk requires TT Gateways 7 17 and later 176 TT User Setup User Manual Trading Technologies International Inc 12 Account and Account Group Risk Administration Note You can also create product limits per Gateway Login For more information refer to the Creat ing Product Limits for Gateway Logins on page 168 topic When configuring product limits for an account or account group you can determine which products are tradable specify various limits on maximum order size and position per product and configure addi tional margin per product Note Account based product limits do not have a Trade out allowed option like Gateway Login based product limits Traders can always trade out of account positions This procedure describes creating product limits from the Account Group window but the same proce dure applies when creating product limits from the Accounts window You can also edit account group product limits from the Account Group Limits tab of the Product Limits window using the field descriptions in step 4 of the following procedure gt To create a new product limit from the Account Groups window 1 From the User
386. you selected html your selected report also automati cally opens in your Internet browser You have successfully exported a report Note You can also copy data directly from any report to a spreadsheet word processor text editor etc by selecting the data with your mouse and pressing Ctrl C Use Ctrl V or the destination application s paste function to paste the selected data Tracking the TT Product Version Number Use the TT Product Version User Usage report to track the use of TT product s version numbers and related login activity Tracking version number is useful for both administrators and traders For exam ple if you know what version of X_TRADER your traders use you can inform those traders when they need to upgrade TT User Setup User Manual 239 Trading Technologies International Inc 17 Reports The report displays a history of client versions and logins related to specific version username product and IP address keys In the report a new row is displayed for each combination of the four key fields For example a trader with a single username and IP address who uses both X_TRADER and X_RISK is displayed in two separate rows one for X_TRADER and one X_RISK The fields displayed in the TT Product Version User Usage report include the following Field Username Display Name User Group Status Email Phone IP Address TT Product Version Last Recorded User s Most Recent Version Record

TT User Setup User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents